Home

IGW - User`s Manual - Michigan State University

1. Figure 17 1 visualization of a 3D grid The arrays in the model can be categorized in two broad groups viz input parameter arrays and output parameter arrays The input parameter arrays would primarily include values for initial conditions boundary conditions and physical properties of the hydrogeological medium The output arrays contain values of parameters such as final hydraulic heads velocities and solute concentrations Grid Based Operations in IGW Version 5 0P allows the user to perform many operations on these arrays The operations may include addition subtraction of arrays from each other addition of constant values in arrays and multiplication of an array with a constant etc Other operations may include saving arrays in text files importing and assigning arrays from text files copying array layers to Excel spreadsheets etc The usefulness of Grid Based Operations can be highlighted with the following example Suppose in a multilayered model the user wants to do a sensitivity analysis for the effect of change in hydraulic conductivity on the contaminant transport Using Grid Based Operations all the user needs to do is select the hydraulic conductivity array and multiply it with a desired factor then simply run the model and see the effect Without Grid Based Operations although the user can change the hydraulic conductivity by the same desired factor in Multiplier For Sen
2. 253 Changing Symbol Display 254 Changing Symbol Display Wells eres 255 Adding New Modeling ayers iab 252 Adding New Mapping Layers 256 Removing a Single Layer in the GIS Model Importer 256 Removing all GIS Layers in the GIS Model Importer 257 Moving the Map by Using the Pan Map 257 Options to Change the Viewing Area 258 Mo asuritie Distan Gies cca dene baie 250 Rectangular Data Selector Function 259 Selecting Data to be Exported to IGW eese 260 Selecting Data to be Exported to IGW Using Watershed Boundary 260 Extractine Data to TOW oes od 261 Extraction Criteria Window ossia ienai Ea ID UNO a 261 Extracting Point Data as Pumping 115 262 Nue WE I E oem Sen dor E Daher 263 Scatter Point Extracting Criteria sesser aea a A A ARA 264 Selecting the Method for Calculating Hydraulic Conductivity 265 Iteration Settings for Theis and Bradbury Methods 265 Modified Method
3. 22 10 Removing a Single GIS Layer It is possible to remove a single model data or mapping shapefile layer if necessary This is done by positioning the cursor over the shapefile in the GIS Layer Explorer and right clicking the mouse Scroll down to highlight the Remove this layer option Figure 22 22 and left clicking the mouse to complete the layer removal GIS Model Importer Figure 22 22 Removing a Single Layer in the GIS Model Importer 22 11 Deleting All GIS Layers It may also be desirable to delete all shapefiles that have been imported This is done by positioning the cursor over any shapefile category e g Layers for Modeling Point Layers etc in the GIS Layer Explorer and right clicking the mouse Scroll down to highlight the Delete all layers option Figure 22 23 Left clicking the mouse completes the layer removal 256 shapefiles listed in the GIS Layer Explorer are removed whether or not the selection box to the left of each shapefile is checked EAE Poirie Layer Delete all imported shapefile layers Roads sho Polygon Layer Fasten Laver B ebrei Al Figure 22 23 Removing all GIS Layers in the GIS Model Importer 22 12 Moving the Map Within the GIS Window The entire map that is displayed in the GIS Viewing Window may be moved around the window This is done by selecting the Pan Map button m on the GIS Model Importer
4. 223 Figure 20 16 Manual Fitting of Semi Variogram 224 Figure 20 17 Changing Number of Nearest Points Used in Kriging Interpolation 225 Figure 21 1 Main Window for Demonstrating 3D Surface 226 Fisure 21 2 sDisplds Me Wyss crssiestaaecauntadvaaeatades totg toto incesto tome b ee eed 2241 Figure 21 3 Drop Down List for Display Variables 22 Figure 21 4 3D Chart Control Properties 229 Figure 21 5 3D Volume Main Display Window eese 220 Figure 21 6 3D Visualization 230 Figure 21 7 3D Visualization 1 231 Pieute 2I 5 Fence Diaeranm ODUODS a n 232 Figure 21 9 Sete e 232 28210 ODLDODS 233 Figure 21 11 1 8 Cropped Model eerte trennen ni 233 Figure 21 12 Customize Cropping 234 Fieure 21 15 Custom cropped model un SES vut in eus t DE 234 Figure 21 14 3D Visualization Options for Wells eere 235 Figure 21 15 Wells seen in a customized cropped mode
5. e Access the Frequently Asked Questions FAQ list by clicking _ frequent Asked luestions e Open the step by step tutorial by clicking Step by Step Tutorial e Open the on line help by clicking Online Help Close Close the window and e Decide whether or not Tip of the Day window should be displayed next time the Show tips on startup software starts Completing the step by step tutorial lessons 1s a very good way for beginners to become familiar with the IGW Version 5 0P interface and basic functionality The step by step tutorial is a help file version of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document It contains a number of movies associated with the tutorial lessons that show how the steps should be completed and what should occur after each step is taken available only with the movie software download bundle see footnote 1 on page 5 Closing the Tip of the Day window provides a complete view of the main window it can be reopened at any time through the Help menu see Section 3 3 7 This is the starting point for all features and provides a focus point for discussion of the software implementation continued in Chapter 3 Step by step tutorial and FAQ is not fully functional in Tip of Day in IGW Version 5 0P There are some Versions of Windows 95 and 98 that may require the system to be restarted Refer to Section 2 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document
6. fe Prescribed head Treat as prescribed head Show model layers as mapping features UB A bize Filter in IGW f Specific Capacity B t Nor specitied W Hydraulic Conductivi Include Following As IG Basemap GIS modeling layers Sampling density Show Place all points witht selection box in IGW Cancel DK Figure 22 48 Selecting Mapping Criteria GIS selection polygon 22 17 7 Placing all Points in a Single Polygon It is very likely that WHPA delineations may cross county or watershed boundaries or involve the selection of scatter point data from more than one county or watershed These point layers are contained within separate polygons one for each county or watershed These will show up in the GIS Layer Explorer as separate point layer shapefiles under Layers for Modeling In order to interpolate across polygons county or watershed boundaries it is necessary to place all point 274 layer shapefiles in the same polygon This is done by selecting the Put all points within selection polygon option at the bottom of the Extracting Criteria window Figure 22 49 Extraction Criteria Point Layers Polyline Layers M Fret ax medic Extract wells with zero or unknown pumping capacity f Treat as prescribed head Treat az head dependent flux M Use E 00 for wells with following pumping rate wy ses Options Reported Zero or unknown Iw Drains Options
7. 107 Pieure T0 5 RHP Tora Particle a 107 Figure 10 9 RHP for Particles Along a 108 Fig re 10 10 RHP Tor Particle Wells Uit er Meet eben ee eet est traces 109 Figure 11 1 Simulation Time Parameters sees 112 LFieure Te Thes AED oM put eto Men DU putate auam MM Det ance IR 114 Figure 12 1 Definime Model Grid a u seien etae reos e edocs 116 Figure 12 2 dd new layer s WindOW Sets atl eoe cone radeon eati 118 Figure 12 3 Set Layers Position 1 118 Fieure L2 4 MeSSabee WIDQON ap eclectic omis len sets ea totae E 118 Figure 2 5 Vertical Diseretization 119 Figure 12 6 Geological layers with different dimensions and different number of bun ade air 119 Fieure 12 7 Layer Navigation Window uisus cies ronis c Tekted 120 Figure 12 8 Advanced Discretization 120 Figure 12 9 Assigning Minimum Aquifer 5 121 Figure 12 10 Figure 12 11 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 Figure 13 3 Figure 13 4 Figure 13 5 Figure 13 6 Figure 13 7 Figure 14 1 Figure 14 2 Figure 14 3 Figure 14 4 Figure 14 5 Figure 14 6 Figure 14 7 Figur
8. E Figure 4 6 for Layers 4 1 2 4 Zones 40 The RHP for the Zones entry on the Group level provides a location to add Multipliers for Sensitivity Analysis This RHP allows the user to manipulate the model consistently with multiplier factors versus the more tedious task of having to hand edit every single zone There are three tabs in this window There are three main tabs on this RHP Physical Properties tab has the multipliers for Hydraulic Conductivity Retardation Storage Terms Molecular Diffusion Local Dispersion and First Order Decay The user can enter different multipliers for different model layers or click Apply this setting to polygons in all other layers button to use the same multiplier s in all layers Physical Properties tab is shown in Figure 4 7 Multipliers For Sensitivity Analysis Physical Aquifer Elevations Properties Calibration Data sources and Sinks Hydraulic Conductivity Storage Terms Conductivity 1 Specific Yield Kx Ky Specific Storage d Molecular Diffusion Orientation of mt Lr m Orientation af d Ix Kz x Lrzz Retardation Onen XT Retardation Orient Mz Factor Partitioning Kd Local Dispersion Long Soil Particle Density rans Effective Porosity First Order Decay Decay Coett Halt Lite Apply this setting to polygons in all other layers Figure 4 7 Multi
9. Figure 7 18 Assigning Domain Control One of the advantages of using the Domain Control option is illustrated in Figure 7 19 The user may want to overlap other regular or irregularly shaped polygons onto an existing model zone e g adding recharge polygons Since IGW will solve the model for every active cell in the Working Area the user should assign the real model polygon here watershed as the domain control Domain Control will therefore make it easier to define the model boundary Recharge polygons Model boundary 544579 Figure 7 19 selecting watershed Boundary as Domain Control 76 ee Scatter Points Scatter points are discrete points that may be associated with zones to achieve greater resolution when data such as bore hole logs are available at one or more points in the model domain GW Version 5 0P can interpolate values at scatter points for spatial attributes in the associated zones see Section 7 7 6 The user can add scatter points in model zones in any or all of the following ways e manually add scatter points see Section 7 7 1 e import from a file see Section 7 7 4 and e import from GIS data see Section 7 7 5 The following subsections describe the implementation and functionality of scatter points 7 7 1 Defining Scatter Points Scatter points must be associated with a zone in the Working Area Therefore the first step in defining scatter points is to make the desired zone act
10. network be used as Master Slave 196 18 7 2 Starting a Parallel Computing Session In order to start GW Version 5 0P for parallel computing the software has to start through WMPIEXEC program This program becomes available after 2 is installed To being a parallel computing session the user should follow these steps 1 Run WMPIEXEC exe file on the Master machine The file can be accessed from the program menu or a desk top shortcut This will bring up MPIEXEC wrapper window as shown in MPIEXEC wrapper e Application a Number of processes ES 1 Execute Break in an separate window Load Job Save Job Show Command more options Figure 18 23 MPIEXEC wrapper window 2 Click Load Job 3 Browse to the file TGWMPI3D txt saved on your machine and click OK 4 Click Execute button in the MPIEXEC wrapper window This will open GW Version 5 0P main window The user can either create a model for Monte Carlo Simulations in the window as explained in previous sections or just open a saved model for simulations After discretizing and setting the model including display and TPS options the user can enter the Monte Carlo simulation mode as explained in Section 18 3 5 Before hitting the Run Model Forward button click button The Solver window pops up Figure 18 24 Select Modeling Methods f Single Realization Simulation
11. Kurtosis Select a Parameter to Visualize C moc C Process mes n C Head Conc PDF Realization Mean Show Stats on CDF Mean Std Mean Std Master C Master Slaves _ChangeProbabity Rein _ Save T Mem 98 TO Figure 18 15 PDF CDF and Histogram for concentration process Process Curve Choice area allows the user to plot the stochastic process It also allows to plot the dynamic display of mean value of a parameter at the end of last realization along with the bounds around the mean at plus and minus of one standard deviation In the Graphical Display area one or all of the choices can be plotted simultaneously Figure 18 16 shows all three parameters InK Head and Conc with all of their process curves selected simultaneously Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 InK Process Head Process Realizations 100 150 200 250 Concentration Realizations e Select a Parameter to Visualize amp Process Head Conc PDF Iv Real Show Stats on CDF Mea Master C Master Slaves Hstgram Variation Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Mean Median Mode Ave Err 0 50 100 150 200 250 Realizations Skewness Kurtosis Select a Parameter to Visualize process Process Curve Choice C nK Head Conc PDF Realization V Mean Show Stats on CDF Mean Std Mean Std v Master C Master Slaves
12. gatos tune dus 159 Pieure 16 5 Prode Model SOlVeE cueeiessatctoebe bate rib Oni 161 Figure 16 4 Display Options for Profile 162 Fieure 16 5 Drawing WIDQOW a Saas ea Sec 163 7s Visualization ol 3D psa uas E des 166 Figure 17 2 Grid Based Operation Window cccsecccccsesecceeeeeecseeeeeeseseceseseeesenees 167 Figure 17 3 Assigning an array for single array 168 Figure 17 4 Data Table window for Editing 169 Figured gt Import Tile format TOr txt 6 sae oo reet ree res 170 Figure 17 6 Array Calculator Interface not functional in GW Version 5 0P 172 Breure 1777 Caleulatine DrawdOWT an te PR ttal Ee uns 173 Figure T9 Tyo array dodi tenis 174 Figure 17 9 Two Array Operation Adding constant to an 175 Figure 18 1 Monte Carlo Simulation Window eese 179 Figure 18 2 Buttons Palette during stochastic simulation mode 180 Fiorello SOLVER Wind OWN d B ARD es 181 Figure 18 4 Display Options for Monte Carlo 51
13. mb Cool gt Using the arrow buttons one can navigate between geological and computational layers in the model The terms geological layer or conceptual layer convey exactly the same meaning in GW Version 5 0P documentation These terms also appear interchangeably in the GW Version 5 0P interface and menus Vertex Coordinates Interface Vertex Coordinate Interface VCI Coordinates 651 78 37958 m gt Action accepted displays the coordinates of the last vertex defined and allows the user to manually enter the coordinates of features when defining them in the Working Area This provides for much greater accuracy compared to pointing and 25 clicking with the mouse The user should enter the coordinates in simple Cartesian format by adding a end for the final vertex Note that only available unit for input in VCI is meter The VCI text appears black gray otherwise only when the cursor is in draw mode see Section 3 16 The end command is not necessary when defining point features such as wells or single particles Also using the end command to describe the feature before enough vertices or points have been defined will result in the feature defining process being aborted Certain feature related status messages will also appear to the right of the VCI field such as Action accepted or Action accepted and ended Instead of using the end command the user may
14. C Width Zone Type Active Inactive For Display Domain Control Figure 7 3 Vertexes 4 Zone Budget Show Interpolation Model Molecular Diffusion D xx D yy D zz Orient XY 0 0e0 earee Orien 0 0e0 Local Dispersion Long Po Trans ft Vert Macrodispersion Sol Particle Density Zone Visible All Scatter Points mo RHP for a Model Zone The Zone RHP is divided into an upper and lower section The upper section is referred to as the Attribute Entry Area AEA The lower is referred to as the Visualization Option Area VOA The following subsections discuss them further 7 6 1 Attribute Entry Area AEA The AEA is divided into 6 layers 1 Physical Properties layer 2 Biochemical Properties layer 3 Aquifer Elevations layer 4 Sources and Sinks layer 5 Scatterpoint Control layer and the 6 Calibration Data layer Refer to Section 3 2 Section 3 53 and Section 3 4 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for examples of defining zone attributes 58 These layers allow for the input of the type of data inferred by their title They are discussed in the following subsections 7 6 1 1 Physical Properties This layer is where the physical properties of the aquifer material are defined The layer can be seen highlighted with blue background in LHP as shown in Figur
15. Mean Std Mean Realization Solute Flux Max 8514 32 Mn 27 3026 1452 24 Median 895 593 Mode 288 228 544 168 sa 123238 Skewness 202497 Kurtosis 5 64013 Process Curve Choice Realization Mean Std MV Mean Mean Std Mean Realization C Hstgram w Std Realization CV Realization Total Solute Flux en a e e e e 0 20 40 60 80 100 Realizations Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C Seepage Solute C PDF Show Stats on C CDF Master Master Slaves Total Solute Flux Process 20 40 60 80 100 Realizations 120 140 Max Min rss pra Mean 45224 b day Median 895 693 Mode 28228 AveEn 944168 133239 S keunesd 2 02497 Kurtosis 5 64013 Process Curve Choice Realization 120 140 Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage Solute C PDF Show Stats on C CDF Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Mean Std V Mean Realization C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Solute Flux 1432 Min 73025 145224 Median 895 633 Mode 288 228 bday AveEn 944 168 sa 133238 Skewnes2 02497 Kurtosis 5 5402 b day Process Curve Choice Realization iw Mean Std Mean w Mean Std Mean Realization C Hstgram Y Std Realization CV Realization
16. Hstgram Variation w Realization pM Figure 18 16 Process Curves for stochastic parameters Concentration Sa a ENTE Process C Ink amp Head Conc PDF Show Stats on C CDF Master MastersSlaves Hstgram Change Probability Resolution Save Variation w Realization area allows the user to observe the variation in Mean standard deviation Std and coefficient of variation CV at end of each realization Variation in mean and standard deviation can be plotted simultaneously Also the same plot can include all the curves selected in the Process Curve Choice area When CV box is checked no other curve can be seen except that of the CV in the Graphical Display area 191 The choice of plots in Variation w Realization area are useful in determining whether or not enough of realizations have been generated to have statistically more meaningful modeling results This aspect is discussed further in Section 18 7 Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Process CV Concentration C oef of Variation 0 50 100 150 200 Realizations 250 Concentration Max iem pem Min 0 05446 ppm Mean 1 05551 ppm Median pem Mode 22228 pem AveEn 062345fppm std 0 84386 pem Skewnes 5 579 pem Kurtosis 3 22537 ppm Select a Parameter to Visualize amp process C nK C Head Conc e ppr C CDF C Hstgram Show Stats
17. Various displays of solute flux stochastic process Note that the probability results displayed in these windows include all realizations up to the present time If only two simulations have been run then the probability results are based on those two simulations only Stochastic Modeling Results This section briefly describes the results obtained for each type of stochastic simulation 195 18 6 1 Single Realization Simulation In single realization mode there are no extra interfaces to display model results All solution data is presented in the same fashion as would be expected when operating in mean mode It is important to note that a single realization is one out of an infinite number of realizations and hence there is no measure of the likelihood of the given solution values being encountered 18 6 2 Monte Carlo Simulation The results for Monte Carlo simulations are continuously updated The Working Area will show the current realization The past realization windows will show the specified number of past realizations at the specified time state All other windows display information based on all of the realizations generated and solved up to the present realization 18 7 Parallel Computing Parallel computing feature of GW Version 5 0P allows the user to take advantage of maximum computing resources available in a network to perform a large number of realizations for Monte Carlo simulations Within the networ
18. eee 91 Fisure 5 9 Prescribed Head S 91 Figure 8 4 Editing Polyline Attributes for constant 92 Figure 8 5 Dependent Fux abe aust eth 93 Figure 8 6 Editing Polyline Attributes for head dependent flux 94 Figure 8 7 Selecting Calculate and display flux across the polyline in the Polyline RHP 95 9 1 lt Wells Attributes IB ihe EE 97 Figure 9 2 RHP tor Wells oom teo Peck hne tosta Ente eode Oeil 98 9 5 ASS nine Plow Rate erede bac Rhea opone ate toda 100 Figure 9 4 Defining a Monitoring Well eri te EE ea ete D eee ee ue 100 Figure 9 5 Input for Head Concentration Data 101 Pieure 10 1 Particle Proper esena nuu ddnde 102 Figure 10 2 Vertical Definition Settings for Particles eeeeeeeessseeeesess 103 Fiecare tO gt Particle Properties c 103 Figure 10 4 Particle added in 3D realm of a 104 Figure 10 5 Particles Along a Polyline eese nennen 105 10 0 Adding Particles tO Wells toda ve E di wees da rhon ance 106 Fieure 10 7 RHP tora te
19. 284 Plots from process files at monitoring wells 284 Figure 23 6 Example data of stochastic processes across polylines 285 Figure 23 7 Plots from process files across polylines 286 XVI Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION This brief chapter provides an introduction to the capabilities and requirements of Interactive Groundwater Modeling GW Version 5 0P in addition to pointers for using this document and contact information 1 1 IGW Version 5 0P Software Synopsis IGW Version 5 0P is a real time interactive and visual software system for unified deterministic and stochastic groundwater modeling Letter P in the version number stands for Parallel Computing The software is capable of parallel computing making optimal use of computing power of multiple processors in the networked systems This capability reduces computing time by many folds for complex stochastic simulation models Taking advantage of recent developments in groundwater research numerical simulation techniques and visual programming Dr Li and his group are developing a software system for unified deterministic and stochastic groundwater modeling The system is designed to simulate unsteady flow and reactive transport in general groundwater formations subject to both systematic and randomly varying stresses along with geological and chemical heterogeneity The c
20. DIO well 1001 243 Probability DC MPolplines Pline 1003 8 Probability 192 4 Click Numerical Solver Settings button open Stochastic tab Figure 13 7 from the Model 1 Solver Settings window and select Monte Carlo Simulations 5 Run the model After second realization Model 1 Probability at Pline xxxx window appears as shown in Figure 18 13 This window keeps updating after every realization till the simulations are stopped Model 1 Probability at Pline 1003 Seepage Flus Seepage Flux Process Max 168574 m dg Min E61 376 m 2 day Mean 1098 76 m 3 das Median 989 292 1374 Mode 1277 686 m 3da ave Er 1185 085 o 3day Total Seepage Flux x pe ce r3 fa co co um eh e e co el e mq e e Realization ee Kurtosis e 20 40 60 100 120 140 Select a Parameter to Visualize F Process Process Curve Choice Q 2220902 0 snis FOF Iw Realization Mean Mean Std Show 7 oe Mean Std Mean Realization fe t Master wees 7 Hetgam Std Realization CV Realization Change Probability Resolution Save A Graphical Display Area B Statistical Parameter Area C Display Options Area Figure 18 18 Window for monitoring stochastic process at point locations monitoring wells The window in Figure 18 13 can be divided into three main areas as shown These areas are discussed below GRAPHICAL DISPLAY AREA Based on the di
21. Discrete particles Figure 10 9 RHP for Particles Along a Polyline The user may adjust the number of particles along the line by entering a number in the appropriate field The user has the option of displaying each particle at a single location at each point in time Discrete Particles or displaying the entire pathline each particle has traveled Continuous Pathline the default The user can change the number in the Draw Width field to adjust the display size of the particles along the line default is 3 pixels Vertical aspects of the particle location can be defined in the same manner using the appropriate boxes as described in Section 10 1 3 108 The user may also click the Color button or the sample particle point box next to it to open the Color window and subsequently select a new color for the particles The default color is pink Using particles along a polyline is very useful for delineating a family of streamlines 10 2 4 RHP for Particles Around a Well A sample of the RHP for particles around a well is shown in Figure 10 10 Particle ell 1001 Horizontal Setting Number of particles released 40 Release Location of the particles released Particles Around well at a radius of 3 28083 E Vertical Settings 2D matris at a vertical location of 10 5 3D matrix Vertical location top 1 Vertical locaton bottom 0 1 enden ars Vertical density
22. Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt C Documents wile Modeling GIS 3D Visualization Utilities Display Help Create New Model I Open Model From File Open Conceptual Model Open Grid Based Model Save Save Model As In IGW you cannot double click on an existing model file to run it Instead the user should go into File menu If the Working Area for an existing modeling session contains a large amount of data then it may be difficult to create a new model using the same session due to memory issues Instead the user is recommended to open a fresh IGW session and then create the new model in that session Save Saves the latest changes in the model currently open The first time you click on Save in a new model will automatically open the Save As window Once the model is saved subsequent use of Save will save the model with the latest changes Save Model As Selecting this saves all present work A window titled Save As appears allowing the user to save the file in the desired location A valid name must be supplied as no default name 1s given The user can also select in a subsequent Message window whether or not to include file parameter comments see Section 23 2 for more information Interactive Groundwater 5 0P C Documents e File Modeling I5 3D visualization Ukilities Display Help Create New Model Open Model Fram File
23. Vertical Discretization Geological Layer Number of Computational Layers Laver 2 Child S Layer 3 Parent 3 Apply to All Layers Fined Grid Factor ta Coarse DZT 279 Figure 15 2 vertical Discretization window for submodel The vertical extent of submodels can only be chosen between the geological layers of the main model Submodels or sub submodels at any hierarchical level cannot be assigned a vertical extent covering only part of any geological layer 15 5 2 Up scaling Downscaling Up scaling Downscaling tab in the RHP shown in Figure 15 3 provides the options to the user for boundary conditions interpolation schemes and iteration criteria When Downscaling from parent option is selected the user can choose Boundary Conditions between Prescribed head and Prescribed flux For detailed information on the usage of each please refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual Also in this area user can choose between interpolation schemes Linear interpolation with conceptual layer and Linear interpolation are currently available in JGW Version 5 0P The user needs to select submodel boundaries so that the results are meaningful This means the submodel boundaries must be defined far enough away from sharp gradients so that the boundary conditions have not been compromised by the limitations of the coarse grid parent model solution When Up scaling to paren
24. 184 Figure 18 5 Visualizing Variance and Other Model Parameters Results 186 Figure 18 6 Display Options for spatial 187 Figure 18 7 MCS Field Statistics window and the main model display 187 Figure 18 8 Draw options for MCS Field Statistics window ssesssss 188 Figure 18 9 Window for monitoring stochastic process at point locations monitoring wells 189 Figure 18 10 Probability resolution for PDF CDF and Histograms for various Daramelfe Os geen aM TO SES TT re OY Tey 190 Figure 18 11 PDF CDF and Histogram for concentration process 19 Figure 18 12 Process Curves for stochastic parameters 191 Figure 18 13 Various displays of stochastic processes 192 Figure 18 14 Window for monitoring stochastic process at point locations monitoring wells 193 Figure 18 15 Probability resolution for PDF CDF and Histograms for various E epee ane ee eas 194 Figure 18 16 PDF CDF and Histogram for concentration process 194 Figure 18 17 Various displays of solute flux stochastic process 195 Fig re 185 ISIGWMPDD text TIG i ei reU dise eu eee p pen eec man odo m en ee ies 19
25. Changing the font style and size of the chart label boxes Changing the font style and size of chart labels Importing image to the background of the chart label boxes Changing the row column format for bar style chart groups Changing bar colors Surface Changing the view for surface style chart groups View 3D Changing 3D view settings of chart Levels Changing contour levels for the chart 27 3D Chart Control Properties Plott ube ChartLabels Bar Surface Wiew 30 Levels Control Axes ChartGroup Styles Titles Legend Chart rea The Leader in GUI Components EL Ere UF Olectra Chart 30 Control version 5 0 1 Copyright 1887 KL Group Inc S eral Ma OF Cancel Figure 21 4 Chart Control Properties 21 2 Visualizing Model as 3D Volume The three dimensional surface feature is a powerful tool for viewing models created in IGW However the second main option viewing as a three dimensional volume offers the user unprecedented ways of viewing and even dissecting their model The main display screen is shown below in Figure 21 5 and contains an example highly simplified model for consideration This model will be the one used in future demonstrations of the capabilities of this feature Model 1 3D Visualization DAR 5 e e o Q Live update Reset X X Y Y Z Z Fit All Redraw Option Exit Save
26. Dot C Continuous pathline C Triangle C Bos Color lt Use color in Particle diameter conceptual model 48 21 25 it C Use given color Figure 21 21 3D Visualization Options for Particles 238 21 2 2 11 Drape On Site Maps This tab gives options for adding and editing a map that will be overlain or draped onto the three dimensional model Figure 21 22 Features include style rotation display and image mode options JD Visualization Options Annotation Mises Show Site Browse Paste from modeling Image Mode fe Capture memory F JPEG C BMP Capture screen Rotate f Rotate right 90 degree lo Rotate left 90 degree Distance above top surface 10 1 thickness T HERE Drap on Style ransparen c f Comply with first layers top elevation surface Flip around axis Flat surface Flip around y axis Site Map Cutting Style x wp ss interpolation Cutting complies with the first layer Ma cutting extended to whole domain Show dry area gurFacel Figure 21 22 Drape On Site Map Window 21 2 2 12 Lights This feature allows for a top light to be added to the model changing its view to the user Figure 21 23 3D Visualization Options Genea Attributes Cropping Scatter Points Annotation Misca D rape on Cite gres Volume Surfaces Vectors Particles Map Lights Add top light Figure 21
27. Iw Show as banded color Band number 30 Iw Global contour Apply Cancel OF Figure 21 7 visualization Attributes 21 2 2 3 Fence Diagram This feature is one of the highlights of IGW and offers an incredible new way in which to view three dimensional models The user has the option to dissect the model into a series of linear planes or crosses through the model Using the features described in Section 21 2 3 the graph may be rotated any number of directions showing the full extent of the model s outcome by looking at one or more simultaneous cross sections through the simulation The Fence Diagram tab specifically allows for either pre set slices through the model one or two crosses or the user can custom design the slices they wish to view Additionally these can apply to the volume surface water table sitemap 1sosurface and vectors of the simulation When the desired slice 1s selected the user should click the Apply button to make these features active within their model Figure 21 8 displays the Fence Diagram interface window 23 3D Visualization Options Annotation Mises Drape on Site Volume Surfaces Vechors Particles M ap Attributes Fence Cropping Wells Scatter Points Fence style r Apply ta One Cross Cutting planes at 1 2 of x length 1 2 of Y length Surface wo Crosses Cutting planes at 173 of amp length 2 3 of length 1
28. The Data Points window is shown in Figure C II I Clicking the OK button saves any 296 Trend Data Time day Time 0 0e0 Value 0 0e0 NM Recycle period 0 020 Figure C II I Data Points The upper portion of the window lists the data The left hand column lists each datum s index the Time day column gives its time value in days and the m column gives its value in meters The lower portion of the window is for data entry To select a specific datum click on any of its columns in the upper portion of the window The lower portion of the window updates to show the current values Clicking the Insert button inserts a copy of the current datum at that point forcing the current one down the list Clicking the Delete button deletes the current datum To edit a datum simply enter new values in the Time Value and or Recycle Period fields and select desired units then click the Update button Import from File button imports cumulative data points in csv format instead of entering the values manually When all desired changes have been made click the OK button to close the Data Points window and return to the Transient Settings window 297 APPENDIX D IGW VERSION 5 0P PLOT TYPES IGW Version 5 0P offers a number of plot types available for displaying model results These plot types are discussed in the following sections D Zone Mass Balance Plots There are two main plots that are available with
29. The polyline becomes outlined in red therefore indicating that is currently selected Alternately the desired polyline may be selected in the AE see Section 4 1 1 8 3 Redefining Polylines A polyline that has been defined in model can be redefined by placing the cursor in Node Edit mode see Node Edit Mode in Section 3 16 The user may change the shape of the polyline in either the Working Area or any submodel windows by 1 Moving the existing vertices and or 2 Creating new vertices To move an existing vertex line segment endpoint click and hold the mouse above the black square that corresponds to the desired vertex drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button To create a new vertex make one line segment into two click and hold the mouse above the blue crosshair symbol one exists between each vertex nearest to the desired location of the new vertex Drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button These steps may be repeated as many times as necessary until the desired polyline shape is achieved 8 4 Moving Polylines Polylines can be moved in the Working Area by selecting the CTRL key and clicking on the Polyline at the same time While holding down the CTRL key use the cursor to move the polyline into the user s desired position and then release the cursor and CTRL key 8 5 Setting Polyline Attributes Polyline attribute
30. eleeeeenns es Ium Pp Y 4 Custom cropped model Figure 21 13 234 21 2 2 5 Wells This tab Figure 21 14 gives options for the well screen location cap height bottom elevation well diameter and color options within the three dimensional model 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs sutaces ese or Cropping i Scatter Points 1 Show wells m Set size h1 Cap height fi 3 1233 r h2 Bot Height 212 3 8 D1 Diameter 150 r D2 Diameter 300 Kr Set screen color For pumping wells Set color Apply to all wells For injection wells Set color du Monitoring well color For monitoring wells takes the priority for c Ca aan Show calibration combined wellsl data if availble Show wells name Pumping Injection Monitoring C Select an attribute to display Resolution No facets 8 Use on grid location Apply Cancel OK Figure 21 14 3D Visualization Options for Wells Using these options the user can enhance the appearance of wells It can be seen in Figure 21 14 that well are presented more prominently than how they look like in Figure 21 15 gt Model 1 3D Visualization eeeoeenoses P Reset X 2 Fit All Redraw Option Exit Save 551167 Figure 21 15 Wells seen in a customized cropped model 21 2 2 6 Scatter Points
31. f Monte Carlo Simulations a Parallel Host ame 2 8 oK Cancel Figure 18 24 Selecting Parallel Computing option in Solver window Host ame HumPracs 6 Check box on the left of Parallel and click Tasks window pops up as shown in Figure 18 25 button Parallel Hosts and 197 Parallel Hosts and Tasks Child Machine Option HostName Number of Process Total Number of Realization multiscale1 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 multiscale multiscale3 multiscale4 multiscale5 multiscale6 multiscale multiscale multiscale stochastic jupiter THREE r B E o w EE Howard Auto Data Collecting and Save 500 Num of realizations on Master for each collecting File name of monitoring well probability and Statis Overwrite IPFux File name of Plineflux probability and Statis Overwrite Field File name of field mean and variance Overwrite i Cancel Figure 18 25 Parallel Hosts and Tasks window Parallel Hosts and Tasks window is divided into two area The Child Machine Option area has three columns The first column contains the names of all the machines available on the network The second column contains the fields in which user can allocate assign number of processes each machine will perform The last column is number of realizations for each process a machine will perform This n
32. p 2 where s 5 points in spase Mee by h z and Z attribute values at s and s n number of pairs in the data set separated by lag h and y h experimental variogram A theoretical variogram is a mathematical function optimally fit into the variogram points of an experimental variogram plot Some commonly used mathematical models are spherical exponential and Gaussian The parameters governing the shape of these mathematical curves are sill range and nugget of the variogram Figure 20 15 shows a theoretical variogram fitting into an experimental variogram Range can be defined as the minimum lag distance h for which the value of the variogram becomes equal to variance The correlation scale is approximately 40 of range The data are still correlated within range but after incorporating the scale the correlation is weaker Within the Range the Variance is assumed to have reached its maximum value for the data The Variance is the difference between the Nugget and the Sill Each of these parameters may be varied either by moving the sliding button until the desired value is achieved or typing a value into the window to the right of the sliding button Nugget in a variogram represents measurement error data noise and the variability that cannot be resolved also subscale variability Figure 20 15 Variance 1000 24000 3000 4000 S000 6000 000 sooo Figure 20 15 Illustration of Nugget Range and
33. using the Change button To change a value first type the new value in the field provided next to the 9 button Then move then move the cursor and click in the cell where new value will be added the cell is selected Move the cursor back and click on the Change button The value in the selected cell is update To save data present in the table to Microsoft Excel click 29 button An Excel window opens with all the data already written in the spreadsheet You may save the spread sheet just as you do in Excel You can do linear interpolation of values across any column in the table You can also do linear interpolation within a portion of the column To do linear interpolation enter the desired values in the first and last desired cells of the column using the button 92 Click to select the first cell and then holding the shift key click in the last cell This will select all the cells from the first to the last cells When cells are selected just click on the Do Linear Interpolation f in the button You will see the linearly interpolated values from the first to the last cells selected HEAD Y ELEVATION Selecting Head Y Elevation e g water table in the Polyline Type area sets the head associated with the polyline equal to the y axis value at each point This feature is especially useful in building 2D profile models Assigning t
34. Concentration Process Concentration Realizations Concentration Mean 1 05551 ppm Median 222222 Mode 04225 5 AveEn 052545 _ su oos pem Skewnes o pem Kurtosis 3 22537 ppm Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C Ink Head Conc C PDF C CDF C Hstgram Change Probability Resolution Save Show Stats on Master C Master Slaves Process Curve Choice Realization Mean V Mean Std Mean Std Variation w Realization Mean v Std CV Various displays of stochastic processes Figure 18 17 shows different plots for Conc parameter Please note the selection of check boxes in Display Options area and relate them to the curves on the plots 18 5 2 3 Observing Fluxes Across Polylines To observe stochastic nature of fluxes across a line the user can define a polyline at the desired location in the model and assign its attributes as explained in Section 8 5 4 The line does not have to be a straight one GW Version 5 0P allows to user to observe stochastic nature seepage flux and solute flux across the line To observe stochastic fluxes across a polyline follow these steps 1 Define a polyline and set its attributes for calculating fluxes across Section 8 5 4 2 Discretize the model see Chapter 12 3 Check the Probability box in TPS for Pline xxxx probability see Section 4 1 3 Main Model 2D Layer IQ
35. Creat In order to assign values from an existing array to a new array created by the function the user can follow the same steps as mentioned above In that case the existing array will be assigned as Array and the newly created array will be assigned as Array3 17 6 2 Addition and Multiplication by a Constant Say for example the user wants to simulate a drought scenario by lowering the recharge rate by a constant number 0 001 m day all over the model area This scenario will require the a constant number 0 001 added to the Recharge array To do so e Select Recharge from the Attributes Array List and assign it as Array Enter value 0 001 for C Again select Recharge from Attributes Array List and assign it as Array3 e Click the PPlv button Done message will pop up advising the user that the operation has been completed If for example the user wants to reduce the recharge rate to 80 of existing one This scenario will require the a constant number 0 80 to be multiplied by the Recharge array To do so e Select Recharge from the Attributes Array List and assign it as Array 174 e Enter value 0 8 for A e Again select Recharge from Attributes Array List and assign it as Array3 e Click the PPlv button operation has been completed Done message will pop up advising the user that the Figure 17 9 shows the Two Array Operation area for
36. Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Pond Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Slough Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Ditch Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Drain Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Polygon Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Recharge Evapotranspiration Storage Storage at the corresponding zone 14 3 2D Chart Control Options Right clicking on the water balance window brings up the 2D Chart Control Properties window Zone budget 2D Chart Control Options Figure 14 5 are briefly given in Table 14 2 2D Chart Control Properties Lhart amp rea Flat amp rea ChartLabels Wiew Sl Markers Control Axes Chart roups ChartStules Titles Legend The Leader in GUI Components FELIPE Olectra Chart 20 Control wersion 5 0 1 Copyright 1387 EL Group Inc Serial Ma Figure 14 5 2D Chart Control Properties window Table 14 2 2D Chart Control Properties 2D CHART CONTROL PROPERTIES 136 SUB BUTTONS FUNCTION Loading saving 2D chart files in oc2 format Changing the view of the chart border Control Changing the color of the chart background and axis components Importing image to the background of the chart Credits for the manufacturer of the chart interface Bus Changing the annotation angle of axes Changing the chart s
37. The user can observe simulation results for parallel computing for spatial fields monitoring wells and polylines exactly the way it is done in normal simulations as explained in Section 18 5 2 The only exception is that the user can now have the option to either select Master or Master Slaves option in the Show Stats on area please see C Display Options area in Figure 18 13 and Figure 18 18 Some parallel computing results for Monte Carlo simulations are illustrated below These illustrations also highlight the advantages of parallel computing Figure 18 26 shows the Conc process and the variation of its Mean with realizations One can see that after 300 realizations the Mean blue line is still fluctuating Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Process co e e e Concentration 4A e m TIE F T T L Select a Parameter to Visualize Chi r Process Curve Choice Ink C Head amp Conc v Realization Mean Show Stats on CDF Mean Std v Master C Master Slaves 7 Hstgram r Variation w Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Std CV Figure 18 26 Master Process and its Mean However when the display is switched in Show Stats on area from Master to Master Slave one can see in Figure 18 27 that the number of realizations close to 2700 and the mean is
38. Total Seepage Flux n o E amp Select a Parameter to Visualize gu Realization Show Stats on Mean Std Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux PDF 2 00 0 00 Total Seepage Flux Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage C Solute Realization Show Stats on Cc CDF Mean Std Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux Process 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 Realizations Total Seepage Flux Seepage Flux Min fda Mean 0 0e0 Median 0 020 p 3 a UST prie Ave Err 00 37da ee skewness 20 385 Kurtosis 500 23 923 Process Curve Choice Mean Mean Std Mean Realization C C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Seepage Flux rer pesa Min fda Mean 3 Median 3 0 020 3 Ave Err su v Been caia Skewnesd 060 r 37d Kurtosis ads Mean Mean Std Mean Realization C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Seepage Flux Max j 3 Min 40507 Roda Mean 024 Median 02555 R 3 daj Mode 01501 3day AveEn 050279 d su 8255737924 Skewnesd 0 2571 3743 Kurtosis 2 49304 73 499 Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Process Curve Choice Seepage 7 Solute PDF Realiz
39. are currently not implemented 32 Selecting Property opens up the AE window see Chapter 4 with the selected feature attributes accessed Selecting Copy allows one to copy a feature in the model and then place it either into a different layer of the model or a different model altogether Selecting Node Edit either puts the cursor in Node Edit mode see Section 3 16 or takes the cursor out of Node Edit mode The current state is indicated by the presence or lack of a check mark to the left of the Node Edit entry In order to edit polylines and polygons the user should click the related selection button or right click on the polyline or polygon which will be edited and select Node Edit When the user switches to node editing mode a new vertex is automatically assigned to the middle point between two existing nodes The user is free to change the location of that vertex in order to edit the nodes 33 Chapter 4 ATTRIBUTES EXPLORER While the features of the Main Window provide access to most of the functions of IGW Version 5 0P there are some operations that need to be performed through other interfaces Attributes Explorer AE is a secondary interface mechanism described in this chapter The AE is the IGW Version 5 0P interface that provides access to the attributes of all features defined in the model It is pictured in Figure 4 1 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hi
40. d elevation of the zone L L leakance The user may specify the leakance for the zone in the Leakance field In the Elevation field the user may enter a value for the elevation of the zone The default value entry is 0 0e0 The default units are meters m with centimeters cm feet ft and inches inch all available The user may also choose to set the zone elevation equal to the top elevation of the aquifer by selecting Same as Top Elevation EVAPOTRANSPIRATION AREA The user can specify the head dependent evapotranspiration ET flux LT that will occur in a zone The three fields in the ET area are explained below Max ET is the maximum ET flux which takes place when head in the aquifer is equal to or very close to surface elevation Depth 1 is difference between the surface elevation and the head in the aquifer for which ET will be maximum Depth 2 is extinction depth below which no ET will take place It is given by the difference between the surface elevation and the head in the aquifer at or below which ET flux will be zero When the head in the aquifer 1s above Depth 1 the ET flux from the zone is equal to Max ET When head in the aquifer is between Depth 1 and Depth 2 The model calculates ET flux based on linear interpolation from Max ET at Depth 1 to zero at Depth 2 When head in the aquifer is below Depth 2 ET flux in the zone 1s zero Additionally the user can set ET rates to specific levels t
41. of in Mang Mane Head Correction 2 Constant pem C Transient Equals tof z of Conc in Mane Monitoring well Monitoring Head and Concentration Monitoring Probability Distribution Figure 9 2 RHP for Wells WELL LOCATION This field displays the location of the well in terms of X and Y coordinates Default units are in feet ft SCREEN INTERVAL The Top upper elevation of the screen interval and Bot bottom elevation of the screen interval fields display the depths over which the well is screened These are set by default the middle one third of the aquifer thickness but can be changed by unchecking the Use default interval box 98 and subsequently entering numbers and selecting the unit of measure meters m by default centimeters cm feet ft and inches inch available The screen interval is only considered within a profile model In all other modeling situations the well is treated as fully penetrating COLOR AREA The current color of the well is displayed in the Color Area Clicking the Color button or in the sample color patch opens the color window and allows the user to specify a desired color The user may also specify size of the well on the screen 5 is default and has the option to not display both the well and its label by un selecting the appropriate boxes WELL TYPE AREA The user can select between four options for the Well
42. 290 B I l Spectral Algorithm If this method is chosen it is the default for all scales a window appears similar to that shown in Figure B I 1 The user may subsequently select in the Model area whether to employ an Anisotropic model Bell default for Scale 2 and all subsequently added scales Exponential default for Scale 1 or an Isotropic variation Whittle Mizell A or Mizell B LambdaX LambdaY Seed Theoretical Variance Angle Rotation angle around coordinates and Nugget are available The default values can be observed by switching between Scale 1 and Scale 2 For all subsequent scales the default lambda values increase by an order of magnitude B I Il Sequential Gaussian Simulation If this method is chosen the main portion of the Option of Unconditional Random Field window appears as shown in Figure B I II 1 Spectral Algorithm Lambda Lambda LU Decomposition Algorithm Smp z 7 Lambda D Simulated Annealing Thenretical variance Model Anisotropic ngle Hatate Around Z C Gaussian Spherical 3 Angle Ratate Around f Exponential Hole Exponential isle oaie o Bambing model amp ngle Hotate Around r Nugget 10 01 Cancel Figure B I II 1 Sequential Gaussian Simulation Window The user may subsequently select in the Model area which Anisotropic model to employ The options are Bell Exponential the default for all scales Spherical Ho
43. Save E Save Model s Save Conceptual Model Import Third Party Model Save Grid Based Model Import Third Party Model This option is not active in IGW 5 0P Import Picture Selecting this allows the user to import a picture into the model The cascading options allow the user to choose As BMP or As JPEG See Chapter 5 for instructions on how to import pictures permanently 10 Export Picture Export Model Results Page Setup Print Exit This function will only temporarily places a picture in the Working Area Selecting this allows the user to export the Working Area discussed in Section 3 13 as a picture The cascading options allow the user to choose As BMP or As JPEG See Section 23 1 for more advanced graphics capture options Selecting this allows the user to save data for hydraulic head m concentration ppm seepage velocity m d in x y and z directions and hydraulic conductivity m d from the current model A window titled Save As appears allowing the user to save the data file with a desired file name and specify the path This selection is available only after the model has been discretized see Chapter 12 See Section 23 4 for more information Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untitled im Modeling SIS 3D Visualization Lltilibies Display Help Create Mew Model b Open Model From File Save Save Model As Import Third Party M
44. The grid line is node centered This means that a node exists at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines Therefore the corners of each node centered cell exist at the centers of the grid squares 123 Chapter 13 SOLVER ENGINE SETTINGS The Solver Engine Figure 13 1 is the main interface for defining solver options for the software This window may be accessed by clicking the Solver Engine button on the Button Palette or by clicking the Model Solver button on the Model entry in the AE Model 1 Solver Settings Ea Particle Tracking Stochastic Matris Solver Algebraic Multiarid Transpose Free Quasi Minimum Residual successive Uver Relaxiation f Generalized Minimum Residual Conjugate Gradient Flexible Generalized Minimum Residual Biconjugate Gradient Solver Parameters Full Orthogonalization Damping Parametel 1 Biconjugate Gradient With Partial Preating Peeran ae 2 Right precon e D Conjugate Gradient Normal Residual Eg Direct Juasi Generalized Minmum Residual D D t Bieonjugate Gradient Stabilized Iteration Parameters Inner Iteration atris Solution Outer Iteration water T able Iteration Iterations 4000 Iterations Relative Tolerance 01 oe Tolerance 0 0001 m scan Dry wet Cel 1 Quter Iterations Conversion E very Advanced Options Apple This Solver Setting To Entire Flow Model Hierarchy Figure 13 1 Solv
45. The middle fields display the values and units associated with the variables the unit field is user changeable The right hand side contains a scroll bar that allows the user to view the desired variable if too many are displayed to be seen in the CAT simultaneously Clicking the Cell Attribute Viewer button brings up the Choose Parameters at Cursor window as shown in Figure 3 7 This window allows the user to select the parameters to be displayed in the CAT and also generally defines Refer to Chapter 5 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an interactive exploration of the CAT 26 them as the variable names displayed in the CAT are truncated Refer to Table 3 2 for expanded definitions of these variables and cross references to other sections of this document Choose Parameters at Cursor Aq Top Reall op Aq Bot Thick n Ex Ts Ka Ey Ex Ez Ky Leg KxzDeg 85 5 SY LE Yy We Lone HivLeak AivHead HivBatE DrnLeak DinE ley Aquifer Cell Bound Figure 3 7 T T T T v fa a rJ rJ y y rJ wf Coordinate 1 Coordinate Grid 5 Grid Ir Aquifer Top Elevation Real Top Elevation Aquifer Bottom Elevation Thickness Porosity Conductryity Tranemisstvity Anizotrapy Factor y Anisotropy Factor z Anisotropy Onentation vy Anis
46. This feature is similar to the Wells interface in that different elevations and diameters of scatter point locations can be specified The upper and lower bound contaminant concentrations may also be denoted within this interface Figure 21 16 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs Drape on Site Volume Surfaces Vechors Particles Map Scatter W Show scatter points Set size Segment Dot Color Range h1 Cap height 3 84251 Po Upper bound _ Reset h2 Bot Height 5 84251 E 3 9999 Lower bound D1 Diameter 1 9 6850 E ho 8 99388 D2 Diameter B5 6167 t Di Segment sample _ samnle om Ww Show drilling pipe Drilling pipe Set color E MN ge even screen eight is nat zero Segment dat f Given Dat D1 W Apply to all scatter points f Select an attribute to display Show legend v Default color if mnm attribute assigned Ww Show Scatter Points Mame Resolution No facets E In Log scale Figure 21 16 3D Visualization Options for Scatter Points Legend options for scatter points are available through Legend button Figure 21 17 Show Legend Top Title Legend Title Font Left C Right Sefi Eottom x Figure 21 17 Legend Window 236 21 2 2 7 Volume This feature allows the user to specify the layers they wish to view in their three dimensional volume model Figure 21 18 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs Show volume Layer visibilit
47. area sets the polyline at a constant head value The desired value is entered in the field that appears to the right of the Constant Head entry after it is selected The default entry is 0 0e0 The default unit is meters m with centimeters cm feet ft and inches inch all available 91 VARIABLE HEAD Selecting Variable in the Prescribed Head area sets the polyline to have a linearly variable head along its total length The desired values are entered in the Edit Polyline Attributes box that appears when the user selects the __ box next to the Variable choice Edit Polyline Attributes window is shown in Figure 8 4 Edit Polyline Attributes Headin 43 275633369286 426 264984411722 o 0 143 800263355221 601 031959407964 357 023975296609 357 023975296609 395 306266354055 i 636 917578097671 Change Save to Excel Do Linear Interpolation Figure 8 4 Editing Polyline Attributes for constant head The first and second fields are the X and Y coordinates for the nodes of the polyline The third field allows the user to specify a head value for each node location thereby giving the polyline variability across its extent Note that all of the columns have a unit of meter The user cannot change the unit in this table User should make sure that while making any changes in the values the values entered in meters Any value in the cells of the table shown X Y and Head can be modified by the user by
48. button XR When this is selected the software will capture an image each time model jo is solved or iterates This continues until the simulation ends or the user stops the simulation Capturing will commence the next time the model is solved unless the No Capture button is clicked 280 Also when this button is clicked the manual timer in the Automatic Capture window can be activated using the Begin and Stop buttons described in the previous section Every time the software captures an image the computer will emit an audible beep the sound defined as Default Beep in the operating system 23 1 3 Saving Display as a Picture An alternative to using the capture option is to manually save the current Working Area state as a 27 picture On the File menu the user selects Export Picture and then as BMP or as JPEG from the cascading menu The user then selects a path types in a desired file name in the Save As menu and then clicks Save to complete the procedure Using the Print Screen function associated with the computer usually a key on the keyboard also saves the current screen in the Windows clipboard The user can subsequently edit the picture with a variety of graphics editing programs ranging from the relatively simple Paint included in Windows to powerful third party software packages such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe 23 2 Savin
49. conceptual model only in the computational model only or in the whole model both conceptual and computational The conceptual model is the default choice 127 One benefit of allowing the particles to be seen in the conceptual model and not the computational model is the user can iteratively manipulate the particles until they have the desired configuration and then incorporate it into the numerical model This would be beneficial to those seeking exploratory analysis of uncertain plumes and also for sensitivity analysis 13 2 4 Velocity Interpolation Scheme There are two ways to manipulate the velocity interpolation scheme 1 Tri Linear default and 2 Inverse Distance in which the user can also change the exponent value Explanations for these methods can be found in the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual 13 3 Transport Layer This layer allows the user to change features relating to the particle transport attributes Figure 13 4 Model 1 Solver Settings E Particle Tracking Linear Backward Interpolation Scheme Trlinear Inverse Distance Exponent 2 Number of Particles for Mas Concentration Rel Maximum Number of Particles Allowed 10000 Particles Mumber of Particles Actually Released Display Mode Display Uption E f Concentration Particles Size in pixels 2 r Color Matris Solver Algebraic Multigrid Biconjugate Gradient With Partial Pivoting f Successive Over
50. for each f value that exists in the model an x value is calculated from Equation B II I given the software determined value a randomly selected w value selected by the computer and based on the distribution and the user specified value Clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes in the software Clicking the Cancel button closes the window and discards any changes 204 APPENDIX C TRANSIENT SETTINGS This appendix explains the windows that may be encountered when specifying transient settings for features in IGW Version 5 0P C i The Transient Settings Window The Transient Settings window is shown in Figure C I 1 Iw Data points Edit Iw Random fluctuation Periodic fluctuation with exponential decay Comelation scale 5 Ew Ay Bo B Standard deviation fm Phase difference 0 0e0 day Recycle 360 fay Decay constant i day Amplitude e m Recycle period 0 De0 Redraw IK Figure C I 1 Transient Settings There are three parameters the user can manipulate with respect to transient conditions 1 Data points 2 Periodic fluctuation with exponential decay and 3 Random fluctuation By default all three are active the boxes next to the titles are checked The data points can be edited by clicking the Edit button next to Data points This opens the Data Points window discussed in Appendix C II Refer to Chapter 17 of the IGW Vers
51. have particles The user may select wells individually by clicking in the corresponding box select them all by clicking All button or clear all checked boxes by clicking the None button and the user can also enter the number of particles to add to each well The default particle setting 1s 40 In addition IGW Version 5 0P allows for vertical settings of these particles identical to those in previous sections Using 3D option will create a cylinder of particles around the well in a 3D realm The user can also designate the radius from the well that these particles are released the default is 10 default units in meters m with feet ft centimeters cm inches in kilometers km and miles mi as additional measurement options 105 Add Particles To Wells Add particles to Horizontal Setting Well 2003 Add how many particles to each well 40 Well 2004 Well 2005 Vertical Settings All Mone fe 2D matrix at a vertical location of 10 5 Wells already having particles 3D matrix Vertical location tap 1 Vertical location bott ertical location bottom 0 isses Vertical density multiplier 1 0 aquifer bottom Location of particles released At radius of 10 fence Figure 10 6 Adding Particles to Wells Once the proper selections have been made click OK to add the particles or Cancel to abort When particles are added around wells the particle group asso
52. iw Input Data T Iw Use model level display option Show Treemap Cancel Solution Status and Number of Iterations Figure 19 1 Drawing Options for the Main Model Refer to Section 7 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for examples of changing the options in this window 203 19 2 Reference Maps Area In this area the user may choose to activate or deactivate visualization for the Basemap GIS mapping layer Model Grid Horizontal Scale Bar and or Vertical Scale Bar by checking the respective boxes By default Model Grid is unchecked and all other features are checked There are option buttons for Vertical and Horizontal scales bars in this area Clicking on these buttons will open the respective windows for Horizontal Scale and Vertical Scale as shown in Figure 19 2 Horizontal Scale Vertical Scale m Scale Bar Option Scale Bar Option Thickness l Pixels Thickness IB o Pixels Step Width 275 590 t Step Width iem Origin oo ft Origin oo Factor Zz Factor 2o Color EZ Color Contour Color Contour Color ae Contour width n Pixels Contour width 1 Pinels Font Style Font Style Display Unit az Meter Display Unit az Cancel Figure 19 2 Horizontal and Vertical Scale windows Both of these windows work exactly the same way The user may adjust the Thickness the default is 6 as pixels Step Width the number is chosen by the software as t
53. window is used to manually define the spatial statistics when unconditional or conditional simulation is being implemented The window will appear slightly differently depending on which method is chosen in the Simulation Methods area in the Alternate RHP Section Error Reference source not found The three window variations are hown in Figure F III 1 Figure F III 2 and Figure F III 3 For all three windows software supplies the initial values in the fields based upon an automatic variogram analysis Also clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes Clicking the Cancel button discards the changes and closes the window Refer to Appendix B I I for a discussion of the Spectral Algorithm parameters Refer to Appendix B I II for a discussion of the Sequential Gaussian Simulation parameters Refer to Appendix B I III for a discussion of the Turning Bands Algorithm parameters The variogram analysis is shown in the Variogram window see Appendix 308 x Model Anisotropic Isotropic f Bell whittle v Exponential Mizell Lambda 30 33 Mizell B Seed 542835 Lambdas 30 39 Variance 2 44 Mean Angle LIock wise Black average 0 1 f Ma C Yes Puget Cancel Figure F III 1 The Random Field Options Window Spectral Algorithm Variation gt Random Field Options x Model Anisotropic Lambda 530 39 Gauss
54. 0 OOOGE 00 l 5836E 01 0 0000E 00 4 1091E 01 0 OO00E 00 1 04426E 01 0 Q000E 00 1 10604E 00 0000ErTQU 2 f61E O1 0 0000E 00 S 4997E 02 0 OOO0E 00 1 0476E 00 0 QO00E 00 Figure 23 6 Example data of stochastic processes across polylines A DAT file using the general layout shown in Figure 23 6 can be opened and processed in IGW for statistical parameters and process visualization The first row in the file is general information about the polyline in text form The second row is also text Third row contains the numeric value for the number of realizations Fourth row is column names separated by space Fifth row is empty From sixth row onwards respective numeric values for each column are entered separated by space the values can be entered in any numeric format The first column is the realization number the second column is seepage flux and the third one 1s solute flux Once the data is imported into IGW 5 0P for each process seepage flux and solute flux the software can generate various plots shown in Figure 23 7 the process histogram PDF CDF mean realization with standard deviation coefficient of variation The software also generates tables for statistical parameters of each process data including max min mean median mode average error standard deviation skewness and kurtosis This table can be seen on the right side of each plot in Figure 23 7 285 Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux Process
55. 1 percent 13 3 7 Advanced Options Clicking the Advanced Options button opens the Advanced Options for Transport Solver window Figure 13 6 In this window the user may choose to employ the improved finite difference scheme default or the Traditional finite difference scheme for cases when the anisotropy flow direction is not aligned with the grid orientation The user can also choose to Skip Transport Model run flow model only and thereby only execute the flow model These schemes are discussed further in the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual Advanced Options for Transport Solver Diecretization scheme for dispersion terms when anisotropy flow direction is not aligned with grid onentation Traditional finite difference scheme Skip transport model Hun flow model only Cancel Figure 13 6 Advanced Solver Options for Transport 13 4 MT3D Layer This layer is currently not active in IGW Version 5 0P For details about the MT3D modeling program and its applications in IGW please see the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual 13 5 Stochastic Model Layer The Stochastic Model layer in the Solver Settings can be seen in Figure 13 7 The Select Simulation Methods area is used to set the stochastic behavior of the model By default the model is set to Single Realization meaning that the model will operate in 1 Deterministic mean mode if no data point simulations are specified through scatter points or ra
56. 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point Wau one Level Scatter Point Operations Turn Starting Head ta Prescribed Head Turn Prescribed Head to Starting Head Toggle Use as starting head Flag Copy Starting Head to Calibration Head Delete All Scatter Points in This one Figure 7 14 Scatter Point Control 72 7 6 1 6 Calibration Data In order to calibrate existing data to the results from a model the user can simply create a scatter point s in the corresponding model zone and then assign hydraulic head with Head ft by default concentration data with Concentration ppm by default and hydraulic conductivity with Conductivity ft day by default to that particular scatter point Calibration Data tab is shown in Figure 7 15 After running the model the calibration data points will show as flags of different colors in the model area Red represents maximum difference between the point value and model prediction while the blue denotes the minimum difference In between red and blue a band of rainbow colors 1s used one 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Paint Calibration Properties Properties Elevations Sinks Control Head one fe Concentration pem Conductryity Figure 7 15 Calibration Data 7 6 2 Visualization and Domain Control This interface is divided into the Zone Type ZTA Zone Color Pattern ZCA one untitled area referred to
57. 144 Up scaling downscaling options for submodels 145 Scatter Point Control for the Submodel eeessesesssse 145 Define Model Grid window 146 Advanced OpDons Ww indo W nennen a E ee 146 oubmodels Seen ti LPS a tee die duteti itt e aou 147 Hierarchical decomposition of a groundwater system from Li et al 2006 149 Example of hierarchical modeling esses 150 dtt MINIME E 150 Nested submodels seen in the working 152 Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow window 152 Objects Control Pane e odes hib Ricans 153 Default view of Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart window 154 Figure To 15 Submodel WIBQOWS iiid dava thea ott eno aea et Eee Aha e Eo E adeb tede 154 Figure 15 16 Submodel patching in the main 155 Figure 15 17 Mim Model Water IB alan Ce ni sieur geek xot x que cu gea E Re ue 156 Figure 15 18 Water balance at first hierarchical 156 Figure 15 19 Water Balance for Submodels eese 157 Figure 2XXypleal CrOSS See LIOTI dedidit he Mon Pocos o res ones ue pea ONU SURE EE UE 158 Faeure 16 2 RHP Tor d Cross Section Deum
58. 17 2 2 Editing Single Arrays Edit Clicking on the button opens the Data Table array name window as shown for the Head array in Figure 17 4 The editing tools are given on the right side in this window Switch Array Layer field allows the user to choose the array layer for editing using the arrow buttons After the desired layer number comes up in the field the user has to click on Go button to get the layer in the edit area The layer numbers in the Switch Array Layer field are based on number of computational layers in the model If a model has three geological layers each divided into three computational layers the field will show the numbers from 1 to 9 The layer numbers increase from top to bottom To change values in the cells the user will first select the cell s in the table then type the desired value for the selected cell s in the Set Value for Selected Cells field and finally click on the Set Value for Selected Cells button The value typed in the field shows up in all of the selected cell s However for the edited values to take effect the user must click on Apply Changes button in the bottom right of the window 168 For changing values in a single cell in the table the user can also double click in the cell and edit the value right there Do Linear Interpolation for Selected Cells button is not active in this window The user also can save the current array layer value t
59. 4 Sources and Sinks 7 6 1 4 1 Prescribed Head Concentration 7 6 1 4 2 Prescribed Flux 7 6 1 4 3 Head Dependent Flux 7 6 1 5 Scatter Point Control 7 6 1 6 Calibration Data 7 6 2 VISUALIZATION AND DOMAIN CONTROL 7 6 2 1 Zone Type 7 6 2 2 Zone Color Pattern 7 6 2 3 Geometrical Information 7 6 2 4 Zone Budget Check Box 7 6 2 5 Interpolation Model 7 6 2 6 Zone and Scatter Point Visibility 7 6 2 7 Domain Control T f 7 7 1 7 7 2 7 7 9 7 7 4 7 7 5 7 7 6 SCATTER POINTS DEFINING SCATTER POINTS SELECTING SCATTER POINTS ASSIGNING ATTRIBUTE VALUES TO SCATTER POINTS IMPORTING SCATTER POINTS FROM A FILE IMPORTING SCATTER POINTS FROM GIS DATA SETS STATISTICAL INTERPRETATION OF SCATTER POINT DATA 7 7 6 1 Alternate LHP and RHP 7 7 6 2 Statistical Tools in RHP CHAPTER 8 POLYLINES 8 5 5 DEFINING POLYLINES SELECTING POLYLINES REDEFINING POLYLINES MOVING POLYLINES SETTING POLYLINE ATTRIBUTES NON SPECIFIED PRESCRIBED HEAD HEAD DEPENDENT FLUX CALCULATE AND DISPLAY FLUX ACROSS THE POLYLINE THE DISPLAY OPTION AREA CHAPTER9 WELLS 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 DEFINING WELLS SELECTING WELLS MOVING WELLS SETTING WELL ATTRIBUTES RHP FOR GLOBAL ATTRIBUTES OF WELLS RHP FOR ATTRIBUTES OF INDIVIDUAL WELLS CHAPTER 10 PARTICLES 10 1 ADDING PARTICLES 10 1 1 SINGLE PARTICLE 10 1 2 PARTICLE ZONE 10 1 3 PARTICLES ALONG A POLYLINE 10 1 4 PARTICLES AROUND A WELL 10 2
60. 6 1 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 16 6 2 PARAMETER INTERPOLATION 16 6 3 QGRID STREAMLINE ORIENTATION 16 6 4 CROSS FLOW 16 7 CROSS SECTION WINDOW CHAPTER 17 GRID BASED OPERATIONS 17 1 ATTRIBUTE ARRAY LIST 17 2 SINGLE ARRAY OPERATION AREA 17 2 1 ASSIGNING ARRAYS 134 136 139 140 140 141 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 143 143 144 145 146 146 146 147 147 149 149 150 151 151 155 158 158 159 159 159 162 163 163 164 164 164 164 166 168 168 168 17 2 2 EDITING SINGLE ARRAYS 17 2 3 IMPORTING SINGLE ARRAYS 17 2 4 EXPORTING SINGLE ARRAYS 17 2 5 CREATING A TEMPORARY ARRAY 17 2 6 DELETING TEMPORARY ARRAYS 17 3 HEAD ARRAY OPERATION AREA 17 4 ARRAY CALCULATOR 17 5 DRAWDOWN MODEL 17 6 TWO ARRAY OPERATIONS TOOLS 17 6 1 COPYING VALUES FROM ONE ARRAY TO ANOTHER 17 6 2 ADDITION AND MULTIPLICATION BY A CONSTANT 17 6 3 ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF ARRAYS 17 6 4 BACKING UP AN ARRAY CHAPTER 18 STOCHASTIC MODELING 18 1 PREREQUISITES 18 2 SETTING UP A PARAMETER FOR STOCHASTIC SIMULATION 18 3 SOLVER SETTINGS 18 3 1 SELECT SIMULATION METHODS 18 3 2 RUNNING MONTE CARLO SIMULATIONS 18 4 CONDITIONAL AND UNCONDITIONAL SIMULATIONS 18 5 DISPLAY OPTIONS MONITORING 18 5 1 MAIN MODEL DISPLAY OPTIONS 18 5 2 STOCHASTIC DISPLAY OPTIONS 18 5 2 1 Observing Spatial Processes 18 5 2 2 Observing Point Processes 18 5 2 3 Observing Fluxes Across Polylines 18 6 STOCHASTIC MODELI
61. A eT CK 7 ZZ ANAS NM AS M et PN Kk A i N N MSH S IN JA ise iN 098 Aca oc MB s WE MEE NV Ck Figure 21 5 Volume Main Display Window 229 21 2 1 Graphic Display Options The buttons along the top row allow for the user to increase or decrease the viewing area in any direction x y or z Put another way this is a means of zooming in and out of the model based on one or more axis the user adjusts The Fit All button allows the entire model to fit within the working screen whereas the Redraw button resets the model inside the Working Area to its original conditions o 0O0O02O04O Q 5 Reset TX TY Y TZ 7 Fit All Redraw Option Exit gave 21 2 2 Options Selecting the Option button like the Draw Options button in 3D Surface opens a wide array of editing features to the user Additionally the user may use this button to facilitate three dimensional cross sections of their model in a number of ways 21 2 2 1 General Aspects This tab allows the user to enlarge or shrink the graph by a stated factor on any axis For instance if the user wants to see the x axis in a larger context they could increase the enlarge factor from a value of to a value of 2 5 10 etc The same holds true for the Y and Z axes Additionally options for displaying the model grid are given in this tab Figure 21 6 3D Visualization Options Annotation Mis
62. Around zj 90 f Exponential Mizell Angle Fotate Around 0 Mizell B Angle Rotate Around r 0 Nugget 10 01 Cancel Figure B I 1 Unconditional Random Field Attributes The Scale 1 and Scale 2 toggle buttons allow the user to access two simultaneous but independent scales Additional scales can be added by right clicking in the upper portion of the window and selecting Add New Scale the scale is added after the currently depressed toggle button The currently selected scale can be deleted by right clicking in the upper portion of the window and selecting Delete Current Scale The effects of each scale on the overall random field are linearly additive The scale buttons can be scrolled by using the arrows in the upper right hand corner Note that the unit of measure associated with all Lambda parameters is meters other parameters are dimensionless Clicking the OK button sets any changes in the software Clicking the Cancel button aborts any changes made and closes the window after a verification prompt The user is given a choice of four different random field generation methods in the upper left corner of the window They include 1 Spectral Algorithm 2 Sequential Gaussian Simulation 3 LU Decomposition Algorithm and 4 Simulated Annealing These are described further in the following sub sections Refer to the IGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual for more in depth mathematics for each method and model
63. C MSU structure Rive l Recharge Road 7 Typel Well _ Lake Wetland T UST Typell Well wel Watershed al Fey ed Drain F Whpa El Figure 22 2 county Based Assistant Window County Based Assistant BEEN xj wile le i f mE 64379 76 851605 69 GIS Layer Explorer county shp Mapping Layers v Point Layers MZ Palyline Layers p Polygon Layers Selected iE i Raster Layers C ounties List of Selected Counties Missaukee Wexford Name Data Base Osceola A Data Base Location coh761 gisdpf001 M apl Location Modeling Layers C MSU structure River Rechage Road TypelWell f Lake Wetland J T UST Typell Well _ Well Watershed is l ecw Drain wha X Figure 22 3 Selecting Counties After selection the name of each appears in the Selected County List in the lower left hand side of the window The user must define the location of the GIS database for each county The location of the root database is defined by the user It is necessary for the user to insert the specific folder 244 for each county as shown in Figure 22 4 The user must then define which shapefiles to import for that county either as Modeling Layers or Mapping Layers County Based Assistant wile ie wir F a l 8617373 137017 71 79 73 137017 71 GIS Layer Explorer x co
64. CDF plot Figure 20 5 or an h scatterplot Figure 20 6 Different types of data distribution plots are displayed by selecting one of the tabs near the top of the window Figure 20 3 The distribution statistics for the data set are displayed along the right hand side of each window Default length and time units for all plots are meters and days It is currently not possible to change either unit for these plots In the bottom right hand corner of each window are three graph parameter options that may be entered by the user The first option Number of Intervals applies only to the Histogram PDF and CDF plots It 1s recommended to increase the number of intervals to more accurately display the distribution of the data set as having only a few large intervals may give an erroneous depiction of the data distribution The last two options Scatterplot Lag h and Scatterplot Tolerance apply only to the h Scatterplot Increasing the values for either parameter may present a better depiction of the data distribution 212 Exploratory Data Analysis Histogram h Scalterplot Total Scatter Points Statistics Maximum Histogram Minimum Mean Median Frequency 40 Mode Variance Standard iun Skewness Coef of variation Lower Quartile 25 Upper Quartile 75 Graph Parameters Scatterplot Lag h 270 280 Scatterplot Tolerance 50
65. Classification Codes and Explanations for Cell State EXPLANATION DISPLAY IN CAT The cell is wet Wet The cell is dry temporarily inactive Dry The cell is permanently inactive No cell state has been assigned N A The display in the CAT will read Inactive if the Ibound parameter see Appendix is set to 288 A III IBOUND Parameter The Ibound parameter specifies the general activity of a cell The software may assign one of three classifications to each cell in a model They are listed in Table A III 1 Table A III 1 Classification Codes and Explanations for IBound Parameter EXPLANATION DISPLAY IN CAT The cell is permanently inactive The cell is active The cell is assigned a constant head value The display in the CAT will read Inactive if the cell state parameter see Appendix is set to 1 280 APPENDIX B RANDOM SETTINGS INTERFACES B Option of Unconditional Random Field Window The option of Unconditional Random Field window is shown in Figure B I 1 This window is the common interface for most random settings in the software Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr Scale 1 Scale Filtering Option f Spectral Algorithm Sequential Gaussian Simulation Lambda 20 fo Lambda 20 o Lambda f Decomposition Algorithm Seed 75 4 t Simulated Annealing Theoretical variance 1 Model h Anisotropic Isotropic Bel whittle Angle H atate
66. Display Options Opens the Submodel Draw Option window discussed in Section 15 3 5 Show 3D Surface Discussed in Section 21 1 6 Show 3D Volume Discussed in Section 21 2 7 Export Data Begins the process exporting data contained in the submodel 8 Discretizing Table Discussed in Section 12 4 9 Grid Based Operation Discussed in Chapter 17 10 Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags Discussed in Section 3 3 5 Functions of which details given above can also be accessed by right clicking on the submodel polygon in the Working Area Additionally the user can Copy option to copy and paste the submodel in the AE by using CTRL V Closing a submodel window simply stops its visualization and computation This is sometimes desirable as it increases Working Area visibility and saves computational power without deleting the submodel It can be restored at a later time Section 15 9 When a submodel is deleted all of its associated subordinate submodels and associated features will also be deleted Submodels must be deleted prior to Monte Carlo simulation and or when modeling multiple scenarios Otherwise the program will crash When redefining the shape of a submodel it is more convenient to do so in the Working Area as opposed to a submodel window that is limited in extent and will not allow vertices to be moved outside of its borders Therefore it
67. Experimental Variogram Theoretical Model ypes Isotropic Model Functions Parameters Variogram 2D Anisotropic Spherical Options C 3D Anisotropic Exponential Parameters psem Gaussian C Power Least squares fit Semi semi variogram Variogram Open Multiscale Window variogram model 100 model 80 70 Customize aa a Display Options Automatic Directioni Experimental Model 50 least Direction2 ji Direction3 squares fit 20 10 Automatic Ting 0x Enlarge C Manual fitting 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Details Cancel Lag Distance Meter Definition OK ja Log scale in Log scale in vertical Figure 20 13 Automatic Fitting of the Semi Variogram Model It is recommended for the user to manually fit a semi variogram model to the data This is accomplished by selecting the radio button next to Manual fitting and then selecting the Preview button to initialize the manual fitting process The first step in the process is to select the model that best fits the data distribution Figure 20 14 A through D show the curves for the Spherical Exponential Gaussian and Power semi variogram models which can be fitted to data Variogram Open Multiscale Window Variogram Spe eee 300 300 nur Enlarge wy Enlarge 0 5000 10000 15000 20000 5000 10000 15000 20000 D
68. Exploratory Data Analysis h Scatterplot Total Scatter Points Statistics h Scatterplat B48 pauls Maximum Mininnurn Mean Median Variable Head log scale Mode Vanance Standard o kewness Coet of variation Lower Quartile 255 Upper Quartile Graph Parameters Number of Intervals 10 Scatterplot Lag h 100 Scatterplot Tolerance 50 m Draw Close Window Variable Tail log scale Figure E I 1 Data Analysis The window has two main sections 1 Plot Pane PP the multi layered left hand portion of the window and 2 Statistics Pane SP the collection of fields on the right hand side of the window These panes are discussed in the following sections 30 The user should consult the IGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual and or a statistics textbook for more detailed information 303 E I E II The Plot Pane PP When the Data Analysis window is first opened the h Scatterplot layer is displayed in the PP The other available layers include 1 Histogram 2 Probability Distribution Function PDF and 3 Cumulative Distribution Function CDF These layers are discussed in the following subsections E I H The H Scatterplot Layer The H Scatterplot layer is visible in Figure E I 1 It shows a log scale scatterplot that displays every data pair falling within the Scatterplot Lag h distance see Section E II II for the variable at hand redundant points are automatic
69. Figure 22 7 Importing the Mappings Layer uie te tuto ut cete te oue 247 Figure 22 8 Opening GIS Shapefiles as Mapping Layers Polylines 247 22 9 Timportine Model Data e e 248 Figure 22 10 Figure 22 11 Figure 22 12 Figure 22 13 Figure 22 14 Figure 22 15 Figure 22 16 Figure 22 17 Figure 22 18 Figure 22 19 Figure 22 20 Figure 22 21 Figure 22 22 Figure 22 23 Figure 22 24 Figure 22 25 Figure 22 26 Figure 22 27 Figure 22 28 Figure 22 29 Figure 22 30 Figure 22 31 Figure 22 32 Figure 22 33 Figure 22 34 Figure 22 35 Figure 22 36 Figure 22 37 Figure 22 38 Figure 22 39 Figure 22 40 Figure 22 41 Figure 22 42 Figure 22 43 Figure 22 44 Figure 22 45 Figure 22 46 Figure 22 47 Figure 22 48 Figure 22 49 Figure 22 50 Figure 22 51 Figure 22 52 Figure 23 1 Figure 23 2 Figure 23 3 Figure 23 4 Figure 23 5 Opening GIS Shapefiles as Mapping Layers Wells 248 Openin the Data Tape ss 249 the Data Eod o atio dona RU evan PLUS 240 Showing the Data Table for the Entire or Selected Shapetile 250 SAPS MS Data ADS cmu niri tote dente vi 251 Selecting and Viewing Single Polygon Attributes 252 Changing the Shapefile Display eee 252 Changing the Symbol Display
70. HJ A Polygon Layers v Augusta E spanded8 shp C 6 d 9 Lakes Expanded8 manual shp c 31 s M Augusta 007 Boundary shp Lithology Layers I Layers for Mapping Point Layers Se Polyline Layers x l v 7 Roads Expanded8 shp j F oy Polygon Layers RA Raster Layers Figure 22 30 n Extracting Data to IGW 22 17 Extraction Criteria After the Data Exporter button has been selected a window showing the extraction criteria for all selected model data shapefiles will open The Extraction Criteria window appears in Figure 22 31 Extraction Criteria Point Layers Polyline Layers Fre sx WORS Extract wells with zero or unknown pumping capacity amp Treat as head dependent flux for wella with Following pumping rate GPM es Iw Streams Options W Repoted D W Drains Options Well Filter Sampling density All Available f Non specified M Free pos t Treat as prescribed head Stream Order Filter if Top elevation PN it SER EMS Treat as prescribed or head dependent flux DEM Sampling density All Available W Lakes Options V ptions Bedrock tap Bedrock top Sampling density Al Available M wetlands Options Botton of well W Recharge Iw Static water level f Starting head Sampling density AllAvailabl
71. Head Dependent Flux 089 Probability D1 MPolplines Leakance i Concentration bm 1 Plne 1003 Constant s 289 Probability 2 Leakance ftda Dil Mass water Balance 5 09 Zone 1001 Water Balance 02 Plume Mass Balance 3 pn Layer 2 Colo Eattem Vertexes 15 v Zone Visible T t all Mass w ater Balance x Area acre All Scatter Points t mec Color Visible Te Zone 3001 For Display Zone ZB Only idt MW Water Balance Domain Control Width Show Interpolation Model 02 Plume Mass Balance Figure 4 10 TPS showing different time processes Information about defining time processes is given in Section 7 6 2 4 for zone mass balances in Section 9 4 see the Well Type Area subsection for monitoring well implementation and in Section 8 5 4 for polylines All submodels created in the main model Chapter 15 also show up in the TPS area By checking the box next to a submodel will open that model in a separate window see Section 15 9 The Hierarchy Tree Layer The Hierarchy Tree layer of the AE is currently not utilized in IGW Version 5 0P 44 Chapter 5 BASEMAP The basemap feature allows the user to import a picture to use as a background image in the Working Area The following sections explain the implementation and functionality of this feature 5 1 The Model Scale and Basemap Window The Mod
72. Maps Display Sequence top to bottom Basemap Model Grid Particles Velocity w GIS Mapping Layer GIS Mapping Layer w Horizontal Scale Bar el Flume Basemap if Vertical Scale Bar Head Conductivity Conceptual Features and Texts iw Polygons W Submodel polygon W Scatter Points W wells W Tests We Palylines Seep Area Simulation Inputs and Resulta I Head E w Particles We Velocity We Cone T Iw inpet Data z Monte Carlo Simulation Results i Use model level display option v Means and V arances Show Treemap Cancel Solution Status and Number of Iterations Figure 18 8 Display Options for Monte Carlo Simulations 184 18 5 2 Stochastic Display Options Stochastic simulations in GW Version 5 0P allow user to observe statistical nature of various processes as the realizations go The user can observe mean spatial patterns of processes in the model areas The user can also observe specific processes at selected points monitoring bores and across selected linear objects polylines It is a good idea to set all the display options before starting the Monte L Carlo simulations 1 before running model However the user also pause the simulations any time and set reset the display options 18 5 2 1 Observing Spatial Processes By checking the box to the left of Means and Variances button in Display Options window in Figure 18 8 and cli
73. Model The RHP for the Model entry on the Model level is shown in Figure 4 5 The buttons associated with the icons perform the same functions as the comparable buttons on the Button Palette in the Main Window This RHP simply provides another access point 39 Main Model Import Basemap and Define Model Domain e Set Simulation Time Parameters Define Model Grid alt Change Model Solvers W Use Model Level Display Option ra L by Downecaling Upscaling Settings Senchronize Submodels with Main Model in Next Discretization Figure 4 5 RHP for General Model Options 4 1 2 3 Layer The RHP for a layer on the Layer Submodel level is shown in Figure 4 6 This screen has default parameters for the entire layer such as elevation thickness recharge etc Chapter 7 provides a detailed explanation of each of these features Layer 1 Define Default Hodel Parameter Values for This Layer Top Elevation 32 808 Specific Yield 101 m Specific Storage 3 048 Starting Head IE Thickness 31233 Recharge 10 00 x Random Random Porosity 03 Partitioning Coeff Kd ppm B Random a Random Soil Particle Density 2 65000 Retardation Factor Conductivity 154 041 Fandom Dry He wetting Criteria Kx Ky 11 Kx Kz 10 Orientation of Apply this setting to all other layers De NEIN Orientation of 0 0e0
74. NX MY CO Change DDr MS M0 DA siut Cancel Define number of computational layers Figure 12 1 Defining Model Grid The parameters displayed in the window are discussed in the following subsections Clicking the Discretize OK button closes the window and discretizes the model see Section 12 2 with the new grid settings Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes and no discretization is performed To define the grid user can choose between Change NX NY or Change DX DY by checking the desired radio button X LENGTH This field displays the conceptual real world x direction length of the Working Area see Section 3 3 5 for available units Y LENGTH This field displays the conceptual real world y direction length of the Working Area see Section 3 3 5 for available units Change NX NY When Change NX NY is selected user can directly define the number of grid cells in the X and Y directions of the model 2 Refer to Section 4 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an interactive exploration of these concepts 116 NX field displays the number of cell center nodes in the x direction The first column of nodes are placed on the left most edge of the Working Area and are evenly spaced across the Working Area in the x direction The user may enter the desired number in this field The default value entry is 40 Entering a value for NX automatically causes the NY value to update the NY
75. Regression and Interpolation Simulation The user is therefore presented with three main options for analyzing the scatter point data 84 Finally there is check box Use Log Scale in this area By checking this box the selected data will be analyzed and interpreted at log scale The box 1s uncheck by default for all parameters However for hydraulic conductivity data the box is checked by default REGRESSION Regression area in RHP of AE is shown in Figure 7 27 The user may choose from four preset regression types Linear Bilinear Quadratic and Biquadratic The user may also choose a custom regression format by selecting the More button Clicking the More button opens the Regression window pictured in Figure 7 28 W Regression t Linear Global regression Use all points f Biquadratic Bilinear Local regression Use nearest paints i Quadratic Figure 7 27 Attributes Explorer Regression Interface Regression Polwnomial Coefficient Choice Action vad adi a 2 E Gell gicil gle 2 I Hone alp 321 ael Reset atl aar Apply Selected Polynomial 2 20 1 7E O8 4 5E 090 Cancel Figure 7 28 Regression Parameters In this window the user selectively chooses the parameters by placing a check mark in the boxes associated with the desired coefficients The polynomial form is presented in the lower portion of the window Clicking the Appl
76. Relaxiatian Bicornjugate Gradient Stabilized f Conjugate Gradient Transpose Free Quasi Minimum Residual Conjugate Gradient Normal Residual Eg Generalized Minimum Residual Biconjugate Gradient t Flesible Generalized Minimum Residual t Full Orthogonalization C Direct Quasi Generalized Minmum Residual Solver Parameters Convergence Criteria Relaxation Factor 1 Maximum Iterations 4000 Precondition Index Relative Tolerance 0 1 EA Advanced Options Apply This Setting To Entire Transport Hierarchy Cancel Figure 13 4 Solver Settings for Transport 13 3 1 Modified Method of Characteristics The Modified Method of Characteristics MMOC calculates the concentration at a given node m for a given time step n 1 by employing the following algorithm 128 1 A particle at m is traced backwards to time step n to determine its previous location p 2 The concentration at p is determined by interpolation from the surrounding nodes based on time step n data 3 This concentration is adjusted for any dispersion and reaction that would occur over the time step and the resulting value is the concentration at m Refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual for further information and mathematical details The MMOC is beneficial because it requires only one particle for each cell and resets these particles for each time step so there is no need to store particle location data These result in decre
77. THE TRANSIENT SETTINGS WINDOW THE DATA POINTS WINDOW APPENDIX IGW VERSION 5 0 PLOT TYPES D I ZONE MASS BALANCE PLOTS D I 1 THE WATER BALANCE 0 1 1 THE PLUME MASS BALANCE D II WELL MONITORING PLOTS D Ill I THE TIME PROCESS FOR WELLS 0 1 0 OTHER WELL PLOTS D IV CHANGING PLOT DISPLAYS APPENDIX E THE DATA ANALYSIS WINDOW THE PLOT PANE PP THE H SCATTERPLOT LAYER THE HISTOGRAM LAYER THE PDF LAYER THE CDF LAYER I THE STATISTICS PANE SP THE STATISTICS AREA THE GRAPH PARAMETERS AREA The Graph Parameters Area T gt L mi ITI ITI ITI EZ ITI ITI ITI ITI E T L APPENDIX F SPATIAL STATISTICS PARAMETERS WINDOWS F I THE INPUT PARAMETERS WINDOW F II THE VARIOGRAM WINDOW F III THE RANDOM FIELD OPTION WINDOW REFERENCES 290 291 291 291 202 293 295 295 296 298 298 298 299 299 299 301 301 303 304 304 304 304 304 304 304 305 305 306 306 307 ___308 310 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7
78. This implies that the model has to be discretized before a new hierarchical level can be added 15 11 4 Visualizing Hierarchical Structure Hierarchical structure can be visualized in GW Version 5 0P in two ways One by selecting Submodel polygon in the Conceptual Features and Texts area of Display Options for Model 1 window This will show all submodel polygons in the working area and user can visualize the nested structure of submodels as shown Figure 15 11 This visualization allows the user to see the hierarchical structure to some extent as the submodel rectangular boundaries are seen by dot dash lines However it is difficult to see in this visualization how many submodels exist at each hierarchical level and the exact parent child relationship A better visualization of the hierarchical structure is given by the treemap view By selecting Show Treemap show Teemat in the Display Options for Model 1 window a schematic Treemap of nested submodel hierarchy opens up in a separate window as shown in Figure 15 12 151 Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 15 11 Nested submodels seen in the working area Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart DER Main Model First Hierarchical Level gt gt Second Hierarchical Level 9 Third Hierarchical Level 3 Fourth Hierarchical Level F
79. Top 01667 h 0 1667 h East 10 1667 h 10 1667 h South gt BotE Epsilon OF Cancel Fig ure 6 2 Default Options for Desaturation Re wetting This interface allows the user to specify criteria for deactivating cells when they become dry and also reactivating dry cells when appropriate The Default Desaturation Re Wetting Cell Criteria window is divided into two areas that are discussed in the following subsections 6 3 1 Making Wet Cells Dry As the name implies the user specifies the criteria for making cells dry and hence inactive in this area There are four choices 52 1 hn lt BotE Epsilon 2 Ave hn lt BotE Epsilon 3 h BotE 4 Weighted Method The first reads one head value in the surrounding cells hn is less than the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE minus epsilon Epsilon The second reads average of the head values in the surrounding cells Ave hn is less than the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE minus epsilon Epsilon The third reads the head in the cell h is less than the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE This is the default selection The fourth is an expansion of the second allowing different values for h in the weighted equation The user can specify a value for epsilon in the Epsilon field 1t must be in meters This epsilon is independent of the epsilon in the Dry to Wet area of this
80. Type 1 Pumping Well 2 Injection Well 3 None 4 Monitoring Well The types are discussed in the following subsections PUMPING WELL Selecting Pumping Well the default sets the well as one that withdraws water from the aquifer In the Flow Rate area shown in Figure 9 3 the user may select either Constant Q or Transient Q If Constant Q is selected default the well pumps constantly at the rate defined in the associated field The default value is 459 3 the negative sing indicates water is being withdrawn from the aquifer and the default unit is gallons per minute GPM available units include m sec liter sec m day and million gallons day MGD The user may change these fields as desired If the Transient button is selected the deactivated text becomes active the well is set to pump according to the default transient conditions The user may edit these transient conditions by clicking the activated Transient button and then opening the Transient Settings window This window and its associated parameters are discussed in Appendix C I Note that the default parameters for this situation are not necessarily the same as for the situation discussed in the appendix The user also now has the option to specify one well s pumping rate as a percentage of another well s discharge in the group By default None is selected for this feature thereby disabling
81. Variance 223 The Power model lets the user adjust the Nugget Slope and Exponent to achieve a statistical fit to the data In Figure 20 16 a power semi variogram model is fit to the static water level elevation data Variogram Experimental Variogram Theoretical Model Types Isotropic Model Functions Parameters Variogram 2D Anisotropic Spherical Options f C 3D Anisotropic Exponential Nugget Manuall adjust p Parameters Influence Radius 3506 16 soo j ide eoo model parameters to Number of Lags 7 Power Variance fit data Slope C Customize Exponent Select semi variogram model Variogram Open Multiscale Window that best fits data 100 30 80 70 60 Display Options Direction V Experimental Model M 40 Select Manual 20 setting option 20 10 0 Enlarge Ae 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 F Manual fitting Details Cancel Lag Distance Meter Definition OK Log scale in horizontal Log scale in vertical Automatic fitting Figure 20 16 Manual Fitting of Semi Variogram Model Before performing data interpolation it is necessary to specify the number of scatter point data that are to be included in the Kriging semi variogram model In general with a relatively small number of data points it is best to use all of the data By comparison if there are several hundred d
82. Visual Step 1 DT 2 58 AFNA 207681 Geo 1 4m gt Comp 1 4m gt 551191 75 212925 Figure 22 50 GIS Data imported to IGW Modeling Environment 22 17 8 Multiple Data Extractions Using the Same Selection Box or Polygon Once in the IGW Modeling Environment the user may find that it is necessary to extract additional data from the MIV or GWIM databases While this is not recommended it is possible to make multiple data extractions using the GIS Model Importer to invoke the same selection area as the first extraction When a second selection is made using the same box or polygon a warning appears asking the user that Some of the selected polygons are already in IGW Do you want to add all duplicate polygons Figure 22 51 The user should click No to avoid creating another duplicate zone within the model one of the polygons already exists Message 1 Some of the sebecked polygons are already in GW Do you want to add all duplicate polygons Figure 22 51 Duplicate polygon warning message If the user clicks Yes the data from the second extraction will be placed in a second zone that overlays the first zone This may or may not be desired as it can significantly increase the time needed to interpolate scatter point data or to process polyline polygon data in the IGW Modeling Environment 276 In general
83. WINDOW Selecting this allows the user to select the desired window interactively by making it active this method will capture inactive windows that are in front of the active window As capturing 279 commences the user may change the active window by clicking them in series therefore sequentially changing the active window and capturing them in the order of the clicking sequence only one window can be active at a time CAPTURE USER DEFINED AREA Selecting this allows the user to define a specific area of the screen to capture After selecting this the user subsequently clicks Click Here to Start Capture and then uses the special cursor to define a rectangular area to capture click and hold the mouse at one corner of the rectangle drag to the opposite corner release the mouse button The fields Left Top Width and Height update to show associated numerical values for the desired capture area alternatively the user may type in the desired coordinates in the field The specific portions of any windows falling within that area are captured CAPTURE INTERVAL MS FIELD This field indicates how many milliseconds should pass between captures when using the timing capture mode where the default value is 2000 see Section 23 1 2 The user may enter a desired value or may adjust it using the associated arrow buttons This field will accept values between 1 and 65535 PATH AND PREFIX This field ind
84. active Particles Horizontal Setting Number of particle columns released within this polygon 1 z Vertical Settings 2D matrix at a vertical location of 10 5 Vertical location top 0 fo Vertical location bottom 10 25 1 aquifer top Vertical density multiplier 2 0 aquifer bottom Cancel Figure 10 3 Particle Properties 18 Refer to Section 8 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for a short example of defining a particle zone 103 In the Horizontal Setting the user can specify how many particles per row will be released in the designated region of the model by entering a number in the Number of Particles Columns Released within This Polygon field The default value is 15 When 3D options is selected in Vertical Setting the user can specify Vertical location top and Vertical location bottom from the drop down options to specify where to release the particles in the three dimensional realm Vertical density multiplier allows the user to make changes in particle density in vertical direction Default multiplier is 1 Figure 10 4 shows particles added in a polygon in the second layer of a model A model cross section across the particles is also shown in the figure illustrating the particles in a 3D realm more on cross sections is given in Chapter 16 Cross section 1 570 380 Figure 10 4 Particle added in 3D realm of a model After a particle
85. adding a constant to an array HBaund Top Elevation Bottom Elevation Velocity V elacity r V elacitu z Partitioning Kd Effective Porosity Specific Storage Specific veld Longitudinal Dispersivity Transverse Dispersivity gt Two Array Operation Array Recharge H D Clear Unassigned lq Clear Vertical Dispersivity Anisotropy Factor 27 Anisotropy Factor 22 Anisotropy Orientation 7 Anisotropy Orientation 25 Hiver Stage Hiver Leak ance Hiver Bottom Drain Leakance T Drain Bottom DSTARE DSTARHYTY DSTARZZ D Star Orientation zT OStar Orientation 2 Calibration Head i Arrays Apply Figure 17 9 Two Array Operation Adding constant to an array x 17 6 3 Addition and Subtraction of Arrays For adding two arrays assign one of the arrays as Array the other as Array2 For values of constants enter A 1 1 and C O Assign the an array as Array3 which will contain the result Click apply To make sure that an operation is successfully performed assign the array in Array3 filed to the Single Array Operation area and click Edit to see if it contains the desired result For subtracting one array from the other assign the array from which the other array is to be subtracted as Array and the one being subtracted from the first as Array2 For values of constants enter A 1 B 1 and Assign the an arra
86. all of the boxes to the left of the method UNKNOWN AIR air lift BAIL bailer OTHER PLUGR plunger TSTPUM test pump It may be that the method of estimating pumping rate or measuring drawdown with a particular test method may not be as accurate as another method The methods for which the box has been checked Figure 22 39 will be extracted to IGW As with wells the user has the ability to filter scatter point data on the basis of aquifer type This is done by selecting the Scatter Points Filter button at the bottom of the Extracting Criteria window Figure 22 40 267 Extraction Criteria Point Layers Polyline Layers Freaf ax wells Extract wells with zero or unknown pumping capacity Treat as prescribed head r Treat as head dependent flux v Use 1 00 for wells with following pumping rate ric ptions iw Reported Zero or unknown Drains Options Well Filter Sampling density All Available Non specified Stream Order Filter V Freaf as scatter pomis Top elevation eee A eec Treat as prescribed or head dependent flux DEM All Available Sampling density All Available Iv Lakes Dptions Bedrock top Bottom elevation Bedrock top Sampling density Al Available Bottom of well Filter for setting criteria ee ha for determining which C Startinghead Sampling density ay avaiable Wells are selected to be Prescr
87. analysis is accomplished by highlighting a particular scatter point attribute in the Attributes Explorer and selecting the Exploratory Analysis button Figure 20 2 211 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree lt lt amp Project Main Model Layer 1 D Zones 1001 Zone 1001 BotE gt 154 Point s Cond gt 63 Point s ConstHe d gt 152 Point s gt 154 Point s Highlighted scatter Main Model gt ConstHead gt 152 pts Exploratory data Exploratory Analysis an alysi S Show Attributes Regression C Linear C Biquadratic Global regression Use all points Bilinear Local regression Use nearest points C C Quadratic Interpolation Simulation Interpolation Parameters point attribute Interpolation Method p 2 Exponent Inverse Distance I No of Nearest Points 10 Well 1002 Unconditional Simulation Well 1003 Conditional Simulation Well 1004 Ordinary C Multiscale Hierarchical C Direct inversion Conjugate gradient LU Decomposition Variogram Model fr Variogram c C Covariance Ed Figure 20 2 Exploratory Data Analysis The Exploratory Data Analysis windows are shown from Figure 20 3 through Figure 20 6 It is possible to display the scatter point data as a histogram Figure 20 3 a probability density function PDF plot Figure 20 4 a cumulative density function
88. and the user may continue to add wells as desired Along with being a modeling component a well can also be used as a visualization feature and can be used as a reference point When a well is defined in the software it becomes the active feature 9 2 Selecting Wells To select a well in the Working Area first click the Select a Well and Edit It button and then click on the desired well The well becomes red indicating that is currently Q selected If multiple wells exist at the same location or are associated with the same node then this method will only allow the user to select the first well defined To select the others or to select the first with an alternate method access them in the AE Section 4 1 1 9 3 Moving Wells To move a well in the Working Area click on Select a Well and Edit It button select the well with the cursor press and hold the CTRL key and move the well into the desired position Refer to Section 3 5 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for a step by step example of defining a well 96 If the model grid is coarse then it may be difficult to move a well to the desired position Alternately the user may change well coordinates using Attributes Explorer Well Location field When moving an existing well in the Working Area the software will automatically place the well at the location of the nearest node not necessarily where the user clicks the button Therefore changing th
89. blank as the entry acts simply as a placeholder for individual polyline entries The individual polyline entries titled Pline XXXX where XXXX 15 a software assigned number on the Feature Particle Group level are discussed in Section 8 5 4 1 2 6 Wells The RHP for the Wells entry on the Group level is utilized in Version 4 7 in which the user has various general options such as turning off all of the wells in the group applying a standard flow rate and or concentration to these and applying all values to sub node pumping wells The individual well entries titled Well XXXX where XXXX is a 42 software assigned number on the Feature Particle Group level are discussed in Section 9 4 2 Figure 4 9 shows the RHP view of the wells Tum off all pumping wells 1 Set all well display atributes together Size 5 M Well visible iw Use this color Iw Label visible Turn aff all injection wells Turm aff all monitoring wells Apply this to all sub nade pumping wells Flow Hate Constant 453 28 Head Correction Transient Factor Apply this to all sub node injection wells Flow Fate Constant 459 288 6PM Head Correction Transient Factor Concentration e Constant 0 0e0 Transient Factor Figure 4 9 RHP View for Wells 4 1 2 7 Particles Group The RHP for the ParticlesGroup entry on the Group level is blank as the entry acts simply as a pl
90. cannot be made larger by redefining it exclusively in a submodel window 148 15 11 Hierarchical Models Hierarchical modeling is a very powerful feature of GW Version 5 0P The following sections describe its conceptual aspects and implementation 15 11 1 Conceptual Under the hierarchical modeling system we model the system incrementally visualize the results on the fly and zoom into sub areas when and where we feel there is a need to We begin with modeling the entire area using a coarse grid and then make localized corrections by adding submodels or submodels in a submodel where the solution is judged to be inaccurate The submodel boundaries can be interactively located where the parent dynamics are deemed to be adequately resolved This process is often iterative and one must use judgment to determine the needed submodel extent resolution based on the parent solution behavior and local system characteristics Since the entire model hierarchy is dynamically coupled one can readily evaluate how different patch refinement schemes affect the ultimate solutions Li et al 2006 The concept of hierarchical modeling is illustrated in Figure 15 8 from Li et al 2006 The term patch used in the figure refers to a submodel level Coarse level Fine level 1 Finest scale patches Figure 15 8 Hierarchical decomposition of a groundwater system from Li et al 2006 Recursive sub d
91. density multiplier 2 0 aquifer bottom Cancel OF Figure 10 5 Particles Along a Polyline The user enters a value or accepts the default value and clicks OK to create the particle group or Cancel to abort the procedure When a polyline of particles is defined in the software it becomes the active feature The total number of desired particles is then spaced evenly over the entire polyline length When 3D matrix option is used for polyline it creates a curtain of particles in 3D realm After a particle polyline has been created the cursor is still in draw mode and the user may continue to add particle polylines as desired A particle polyline may be redefined in the same fashion as any other polyline see Section 8 3 After a particle polyline is redefined be sure to click the Initializing Particles button to completely fill the new polyline shape with particles A particle polyline may be selected in the same fashion as any other polyline see Section 8 2 10 1 4 Particles Around a Well The first step in adding particles around wells is clicking the Add Particles Around Wells button Button Palette row 4 column 4 This opens the Add Particles To Wells window see Figure 10 6 The window shows a list of wells currently in the model if no wells are present the user will not be able to add any particles using this interface The window also shows the wells which already
92. head in the aquifer L rivbot bottom elevation of the zone L L leakance T 69 The user may specify the leakance directly by selecting Constant and entering a value in the field the default entry is 5 Available units of measure include day default hour sect month and year The leakance may also be specified according to Equation 7 6 1 2 3 7 6 1 2 3 d where L leakance vertical hydraulic conductivity of the bed sediments LT d thickness of bed sediments L If a situation is defined where d is equal to zero for any nodes then the software automatically assigns a very small number to prevent Equation 7 6 1 2 3 from having a zero in the denominator This situation will yield an extremely high leakance that shows the connection between the river and the aquifer as having no resistance The zone bed sediment properties are edited by clicking the Sediment Properties button that subsequently opens the River Bottom Sediment Properties RBSP window pictured in Figure 7 13 In this window the user can enter a value in the Sediment Cond K field to set the K value The default value entry is 0 1 and default unit of measure is m day with cm sec and ft day also available River Bottom Sediment P EJ L eakance Ed Sediment cand K 0 32808 Sediment thickness d Constant EN f Hiver bat elev aquifer tap elev Cancel Figure 7 13 River Bottom Sediment Prope
93. is the region where the conceptual modeling is performed and subsequent solutions are obtained It can be displayed anywhere within the Model Screen and resized using the Zoom in and Zoom out buttons It is not restricted by the size of the model screen if it is larger than the model screen edges will appear to go behind the other software interface components i e the CAT Button Palette SATDI VCI LMA RMA etc and even off the edges of the monitor 29 3 14 Working Area Attributes Display The Working Area Attributes Display or WAAD is attached to the bottom of the Working Area The user can have up to four rows of text in WAAD as shown below Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years 2nd Row User s cammentas notes remarks etc 3rd Row User s comments etc Zrd Row Comments etc The first row appears in a boldface font with default text as shown above The default text contains information about the selected model layer Geological Computational type of flow regime steady or transient and the simulation time elapsed User can also append text before the default text However the default text cannot be removed from the first row The appended text appears in the same font as the default text By clicking once anywhere in the first row the Input Title window appears where user can add text up to 254 characters including spaces Any text added in this window is appended before the defau
94. it however the user may choose to enable this for modeling purposes such as cross well comparison and sensitivity analysis 7 Refer to Chapter 11 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example of defining monitoring well and viewing the results 99 Flow Hate f Pumping v Constant 459 28 a Transient Injection 4 a Equals to z of Gin Mane f Mone Head Correction Figure 9 3 Assigning Flow Rate The Head Correction check box in this field is used to instruct the software to calculate a head value in the well that more accurately reflects the extent of the drawdown pump up caused by the well pumping injection it is unchecked by default When checked the corrected head value will be displayed in the software but will not be used in any calculations Checking Head Correction box for one well activates it for all others in the model although other wells will not indicate that it is active in their respective Head Correction check boxes INJECTION WELL Selecting Injection Well sets the well as one that injects water into the aquifer In the Flow Rate area the user may select either Constant or Transient The discussion for the Flow Rate area 1s the same for the injection well except that the lack of a sign indicates that water is being added to the aquifer The injection well selection allows the Concentration field to become a
95. multipier 1 0 aquifer bottom Display Options Show as discrete particles Size in pixels 2 f Show as continuous pathlines Color EN Figure 10 10 RHP for Particle Wells The user may adjust the number of particles to be released around the well by entering a number in the appropriate field The user may also change the radial distance from the well around which the particles are released by entering a number in the appropriate field and clicking the Release Particles button This will update the display in the model for the next iteration The user has the option of displaying each particle at a single location at each point in time Discrete Particles or displaying the entire pathline each particle has traveled Continuous Pathline the default Vertical aspects of the particle location can be defined in the same manner using the appropriate boxes as described in Section 10 1 4 109 The user can change the number in the Draw Width field to adjust the display size of the particles default is 2 pixels The user may also click the Color button or the sample particle point box next to it to open the Color window and select a new color for the particles The default color is pink 10 3 Particle Tracking IGW Version 5 0P allows the user to perform traditional particle tracking in both forward and backward modes The implementation of particle tracking is discusse
96. multiple extractions are to be avoided for model areas where there are several hundred scatter points polylines or polygons It is best to re do the extraction selecting all appropriate data over a large area so that a single extraction will be sufficient After making the selection in the GIS Model Importer depress OK The Extraction Destination window Figure 22 52 opens This gives the user the following options 1 Add selected data to current model layer 2 Add selected data to a new model layer or 3 Delete existing data Under the first option it 1s possible to delete all data from the previous data extraction Delete all existing data or to delete part or none of the data in the active model layer Select existing data to delete area in the Extraction Destination window All shapefile types that are checked will be deleted If no shapefile types are checked no data will be deleted and the selected data will be added to the existing data Extraction Destination r Add selected data ta current model layer t Delete all existing data m Select existing data to delete All All palulinies All wells All scatter points Add selected data to new model layer t Delete existing model x Figure 22 52 Option to Delete Selected Layers in the IGW Modeling Environment After making the appropriate selections select OK to complete the exportation to the IGW Model Env
97. normally Note The particles may not necessarily return to their original locations when backward particle tracking is performed this is most pronounced when the simulations have large time steps This P Refer to Section 8 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example and additional information Chapter 14 contains further details about running the model 1 Refer to Section 8 2 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example and additional information 110 is because for both forward and backward particle tracking the velocity used for the particle movement is always taken to be the velocity at the current particle location For example if a particle moves from location A to B to C to D in 3 consecutive time steps it will be translated using the velocities at A B and C respectively But if that same particle is tracked backwards its first translation will occur using the velocity at its present location D If small enough time steps are used the particle may return to location C But it may also be the case that the particle ends up at some different location C The same goes for all subsequent time steps Therefore over many time steps the particle has a good chance of ending up at a different location Initializing Particles Clicking the Initializing Particles button returns all of the particles in the model to their original locations The particle time clock may also be reset t
98. o D a E B m D o Realizatianz Select a Parameter to Visualize i Process Curve Choice e IR Head Conc PDF Realization Mean Mean Std Mean 5td Show Stats on v Master C7 Master Slaves 7 Hetgram Variation w Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Std fw Cv Figure 18 31 CV with Master y Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 CBR Concentration Concentration Process CV Es ppm Min 7 38732 Mean 18 6249 Median 12 1174 Made 0 38418 AveEm 15 1577 Concentration af Variation 100 Std 18 1087 ppm Realizationsz Select a Parameter to Visualize fr races Process Curve Choice E Ik C Head Conc PDF Realization Mean C CDF Mean Std Mean 5td Show Stats an 7 Master MastereSlaves 7 Hstgram Variation w Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Std Iw LV Figure 18 32 CV with Master Slaves Skewness 9051 4 ___ _ 202 Chapter 19 DISPLAY OPTIONS IGW Version 5 0P provides the user with a variety of options concerning the visualization of modeling parameters and results in the Working Area This chapter details those options 19 1 Display Options Interface The display options are controlled through the Display Options for Model 1 window Figure 19 1 that can be accessed by clicking the Display Op
99. odeling well plots D IV Changing Plot Displays IGW Version 5 0P data plots may have their display characteristics changed by the user These characteristics are controlled through the 2D Chart Control Properties window see Figure D IV 1 This window is common to all of the plots however the settings are independent of each other It is accessed by right clicking in the plot area of the respective window some plots may provide additional alternate methods of accessing the window Guidance in changing the settings is available by clicking the Help button in the lower left hand corner of the window When clicking a help screen will appear that is specific to the layer in the window that is currently active 2D Chart Control Properties Lhart amp rea Flat amp rea ChartLabels View 30 Markers Axes Chart roups ChartStules Titles Legend General Border Interior Image About IsBatched iw IsDioubleBuffered Load Save Cancel Help Figure D I I 2 2D Chart Control Properties 301 302 APPENDIX E THE DATA ANALYSIS WINDOWSO This appendix describes the Data Analysis window that displays statistical information for a set of scatter point attributes Its default view 1s shown in Figure E I 1 The windows in this section show graphs and numbers that are associated with an example set of scatter point attributes and therefore will not necessarily reflect those seen by the user
100. of Nearest Points field The default values are 2 and the number of scatter points respectively KRIGING METHOD The Kriging Method is based on the assumption that points that are near each other have a certain degree of spatial correlation whereas points that are widely spread are statistically independent Kriging is a set of linear regression routines that minimize estimation variance from a predefined covariance model Refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual for more details From user can choose from the number of points to be used in kriging The user also has choices for kriging type solver prototype and variogram model There are two options in the variogram model i e User specified and Infer from data Clinking on the Edit button for user specified choice opens the Variogram Model Parameters window shown in Figure 7 29 This window allows the user to explicitly define kriging parameters Variogram Model Parameters Variogram Model Geometry Type Spherical Isotropic Anisotropic C Exponential Parameters C Gaussian Nugget f So 2 Range 328083 C Hole Gauss C Power 1 3 Linear H 3004 Customize Slope OK Cancel Figure 7 29 variogram Model Parameters Choosing Infer from Data opens the Variogram window as shown in Figure 7 30 This window provides visualization of the statistical analysis and allows the user to construct a variogram model base
101. of lowering or rising of the water table on baseflow etc Checking the box next to Head Dependent Flux Two Way defines the zone as an area of aquifer discharge recharge depending on the relative local head This area can be used to model lakes streams etc The first field in the Head Dependent Flux Two way area is where user can choose a name for the type of water body Several choices are available from a drop down menu which includes Lake Wetland Swamp Pond Stream Creek Slough Ditch Seeps and Drains Choosing the name is only arbitrary and does not have any impact on model results The chosen name can help refine the water budget and mass balance estimates please refer to Section 14 2 for details on water budget and mass balance 68 There are three sub areas within Head Dependent Flux Two Way area These are associated with river zones and each has its own area within the larger River area they are active only when the River box is checked e Stage e Bottom Elevation e Leakance Stage Area The Stage is simply the water level It can be set as a constant value by selecting Constant default and entering a value in the field the default entry is zero Available units are meter m default centimeters cm feet ft and inches inch The stage can alternately be set to transient conditions by selecting the Transient button deactivated by default Checking the box before the button activates
102. on Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Process Curve Choice Realization Mean Std Mean Mean Std Variation w Realization Std M CV Concentration Process Concentration 100 150 200 Realizations Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C Head Conc C PDF Show Stats on C EDF Master C Master Slaves Hstgram Change Probability Resolution Save Figure 18 17 Concentration Mar opem Min 0 06446 ppm Mean 1 05551 fppm Median 222222 Mode 042256 perm 052345 std 08 Skewnes os pem Kurtosis 322237 Process Curve Choice Realization Mean Mean Std Variation w Realization V Mean iv Std CV Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Process Concentration 0 50 100 150 200 Realizations Concentration Mex 484047 ppm Min 0 06446 pom Mean i 0555i ppm Median 222222 pem Mode 0 42286 ppm AveEn 0 52345 pem su 0 84398 pem Skewnes 27273 pem Kurtosis 322537 Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C Head Conc C PDF Show Stats on C CDF Master MastersSlaves Hstgram Change Probability Resolution Save Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Process Curve Choice Mean Mean Std Mean Std Variation w Realization Mean M Std CV
103. operations on that particular parameter while they are keeping the other parameters constant 176 Chapter 18 STOCHASTIC MODELING IGW offers the ability to perform stochastic modeling Stochastic modeling is a way to examine the many possibilities of heterogeneity that share the same geo statistical structure Using specified statistical parameters possible aquifer formations are randomly generated and solutions obtained for each Number of realizations generated in a stochastic modeling process 1s one of the key factors to make better estimates of probability distribution of various modeling out comes The larger the number of realizations the better the probability estimates would get Taking full advantage of computing power within a network IGW Version 5 0P gives the user the option capability to simultaneously employ all or a number of machines and or processors available in a net work This is termed as parallel computing Parallel computing features of GW Version 5 0P are discussed in detail in Section 18 7 The following sections discuss the implementation and methodology associated with IGW stochastic modeling 18 1 Prerequisites In order to perform meaningful stochastic modeling there needs to be at least one model parameter that has been defined either as 1 Arandom field associated with a zone defined in the AE or as 2 set of scatter points associated with a zone with simulation selected to d
104. point and is influenced the most between scatter points by those closest to the point being interpolated The weight function is a function of Euclidean distance and is radially symmetric about each scatter point As a result the interpolating surface 1s somewhat symmetric about each point and tends toward the mean value of the scatter points between the scatter points Shepard s Method has been used extensively because of its simplicity There are two parameters in the Deterministic Parameters area that need to be set when using the Inverse Distance interpolation method The exponent is set in the Inverse Distance Exponent field and the number of nearest scatter points to use is set in the No of Nearest Points field The default values are 2 and the number of scatter points respectively 218 20 3 2 2 Kriging Method The Kriging Method is based on the assumption that points that are near each other have a certain degree of spatial correlation however points that are widely spread are statistically independent Kriging is a set of linear regression routines that minimize estimation variance from a predefined covariance model There are two options that appear in the Spatial Statistics Parameters area when the Kriging Method is chosen Choosing the User Specified option allows the user to explicitly define kriging parameters by accessing the Input Parameters window by clicking the appropriate Edit button Choosing Infer from Data in
105. polygons Budget analysis settings Lake Assign Leakance Elevation And Size Category Size Category Based eakanceHead Depedent Lake Category Percentile tot Areata IZ day Two way One Way Lake Wetland Swamp Pond River Stream Creek Slough Ditch Seeps 10217 Bee e e r CEN T ea e E E fe Q 8 EE MEM UM con Cc 3 7 E NE MEM ME ME ME MEI E MEM NE ME MM M NE MM ME EOM M E ME MEM ME MM E NEM NE MEM ME ME E NEM NEM MEM ME ME ME NE EE NE MM ME M NEM MEM ME ME ME M b 7 100 1 9 aere Elevation Cancel Eee OF Figure 22 45 Lake Polygon Lookup Table There is additionally the option of importing a surface water bottom that is a specified distance below the stage This is done by selecting Import bottom as stage minus The user specifies this distance and the measurement units If this option is not specified a default distance to the surface water bottom is assigned It may be desirable to group lake polygons on the basis of size for analyzing regional water budgets The right hand side portion of the window titled Lake Category is useful for water budget calculations The flux into and out of the model is grouped according to these different arbitrary column head
106. respect to zones The first is the Water Balance window It displays water mass balance data and is discussed in Section D I I The second is the Plume Mass Balance window It displays contaminant mass balance data and is discussed in Section D I II D I l The Water Balance The Water Balance window is shown in its initial state in Figure D I I 1 Please refer to Section 7 6 2 4 for information on how to activate Water Balance window Model 1 Water Balance in Zone 1001 File Display Water Balance Lake Wetland Creek Swamp Pond Stream Slough Ditch Seeps Drain2 Vell FecBraitdead GHeseStora geBot Time Varnation s 2 Plot of Instantaneous C7 Cumulative Figure D I I 1 Water Balance Window at Initial State There are three display types for the plot in this window chosen at the bottom of the window 1 Time Variation x y plot 2 Instantaneous default and 3 Cumulative These plots are discussed in the following subsections On the menu bar in this window the user may access the File menu and subsequently choose Export Picture or Close Placing the cursor on Export Picture opens a cascading menu with As BMP or As JPEG Selecting either opens the Save As window in which the user may select the path and type in a filename for the picture of the window that is to be saved The software saves the file in the previously chosen format Choosing Close simply closes the window The user may also access the Display menu and
107. see Chapter 18 When the model is discretized see Chapter 12 all defined time processes appear in the TPS as shown in Figure 4 10 To view any desired time process or probability plots the user can check the box to the left of the process and the required time process probability plot appears in a separate window All monitoring processes are viewed in their own window The user can open any number of time processor windows simultaneously The user can adjust the size of TPS or LHP by dragging the horizontal bar separating TPS and LHP In Figure 4 10 the TPS area in the AE is expanded to show all processes in a given model Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree Es Main Model Zone 1001 i cz Cross secti Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point AMA eme tema Catton Da T zi 9 m i001 Prescribed Head Conc Prescribed Flux Head Dependent Flux P cone 1001 Head Dependent Flux Two way Head Dependent Flux One way Zone 1002 Plines 1001 Lake z Pline 1001 Leakance da z Pline 1002 5 Pine 1003 Stage po ft Elevation 0 0e0 fE B Wells 1001 Well 1001 C Same Top Elevation Layer 2 s P Zones 2001 n Concentration bem 7 Evapotranspiration CH 7 0 0e0 finch yea Main Model 2D Laer Bottom Elevation Depth 1 well 1001 mig Head Conc Time Process Same as Surface Elevation General
108. selecting Data tab and clicking on the Edit button will display the exact values for water balance components This is explained in more detail in Section 14 3 134 Model 1 Water Balance in Zone 1001 Figure 14 4 Time variant water balance Here only instantaneous display is shown For other display options please refer to Appendix D I I While some of the water balance components can be conceptually and mathematically evaluated in the same way e g river and stream IGW can handle them separately for zone budget depending on the name assigned to the feature Water balance components included in GW Version 5 0P are summarized in Table 14 1 135 Table 14 1 water Balance Components WATER BALANCE COMPONENTS Sub Category Boundary Condition Category Boundary Inflow outflow through the boundary of a neighbor zone Top Bottom Vertical inflow outflow between two connected layers Boundary Point Polyline Chead GHead Well River Creek Stream Drain Wetland Swamp Inflow outflow through a prescribed head boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary Inflow outflow through head dependent flux boundary
109. spreadsheets is done the same way as explained above 8 5 4 Calculate and Display Flux Across the Polyline This field shown in Figure 8 7 allows the user to estimate seepage and or solute flux across a polyline This feature is active only for multiple realizations of Monte Carlo simulations Chapter 18 Total seepage and or solute flux is estimated at the end of each realization Section 18 5 2 3 covers further details of this feature 94 Pline 1002 Non specited Prescribed Head Constant 0 0e0 EN Variable Equalta Y elevation amp g Water T able Head Dependent Flux Show total flux at a selected time in new window Apply Seepage flux Solute flus Show total flux as a function of time in new window Figure 8 7 Selecting Calculate and display flux across the polyline in the Polyline RHP IGW Version 5 0P does not show total flux as a function of time for a single realization 8 5 5 The Display Option Area In the Display Option area the user can set the width of the polyline in the Draw Width field This width is based on screen pixels The user may also change the color of the line by clicking the Color button that subsequently opens the color window The software assigns a polyline to every cell that the polyline is drawn through 99 Chapter 9 WELLS Wells are defined at discrete points in the Working Area and used to define either source si
110. the Pause Stop button All model features should be added before running the model This is because the Monte Carlo simulation is based on multiple statistical realizations of the same conceptual model and therefore no changes should be made to the model during the stochastic modeling process GW Version 5 0P protects against this by disabling most of the buttons on the Button Palette Figure 18 3 as soon as the model is set into stochastic mode If changes need to be made to the model the user will first have to return the model solver to single realization This is done by clicking the Numerical Solver Settings button to open the Solver window Figure 18 4 then selecting Single Realization Simulation and then clicking the OK button Time Step DT Bp lH d Flow Time NAM Plume Time o ge Particle Time CM Plume Step 1 2 DT Particle Step 1 2 DT Visual Step 1 DT paesi HONGI Figure 18 3 Buttons Palette during stochastic simulation mode 180 Select Modeling Methods C Monte Carlo Simulations Parallel gt OK Cancel Figure 18 4 Solver Window Getting out of Monte Carlo Simulations mode will discard all the results of the previous Monte Carlo simulation As soon as the user clicks OK in the Solver window a warning message appears to warn the user Once the model is out of Monte Carlo simulation mode changes can be made and then Monte Carlo simulatio
111. the required format 23 6 1 Monitoring Well Process File Stochastic processes at a monitoring well are discussed in detail in Section 18 5 2 2 The processes at a monitoring well may contain data for hydraulic conductivity K usually expressed as log of K or InK head and concentration A DAT file using the general layout shown in Figure 23 4 can be opened and processed in IGW for statistical parameters and process visualization The first row in the file is general information about the well in text form The second row is also text Third row contains the numeric value for the number of realizations Fourth row is column names separated by space Fifth row is empty From sixth row onwards respective numeric values for each column are entered separated by space the values can be entered in any numeric format The first column is the realization number the second column is InK the third is observed head and the fourth 1s observed concentration 283 Sample Well Process dat Notepad File Edit Format pata fram Model 1 Number af Realizations oo00009 B oOO000001 aono o000003 oo00004 OOOO005 O000006 oo0000 OO00008 oo00009 P P PRI FY lat FE 7 50QE 00 1456E 00 1260E 00 87 50E 00 1839E 00 O807E 00 S6SE O1 1202E 00 2242E 01 View Help JE JJ JJ JL AJ I D 9647E 01 9572E 01 965 7E 01 9863E 01 963 7E 01 9704 E 01 9567E 01 9738E 01 932 0E 01 x
112. the IGW file to reflect the new location of the basemap or 2 Opening the file and browsing to the location of the file when prompted the changed location will be updated in the IGW file If the user chooses to skip loading the basemap file at the prompt the original location information for the basemap in the IGW file will be preserved 49 Chapter 6 MODEL LAYER PARAMETERS There are certain software parameters that must have numerical values at all times in order to prevent software calculation errors Therefore default values exist for these parameters that are assigned whenever a new zone is created The following sections detail the parameters the default values and the process of changing them 6 1 Default Model Parameters In IGW Version 5 0P the Default Model Parameters window is not a separate entity as it was in IGW 3 The interface used to specify the values for the default parameters is now found in the AE under the Layers name It is pictured in Figure 6 1 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree Em Project Layer 1 Sa Model Define Default Model Parameter Values for This Layer Ui Specific Yield Top Elevation 32 808 Specific Storage 3 048e Random Starting Head Thickness n2 Recharge 0 DeD Random Bandem Porosity 10 3 Partitioning Coeff 1 Random m Random Soil Particle Density 2 65000 R
113. the Submodel In order to include scatter points in submodel from a bigger area the user may check the box before Using Scatter Points in a Subarea on the Scatter Point Control tab then select one of 145 the options from Subarea Definition and finally click on the tnus ke earn sett button to confirm selection 15 6 Discretizing Submodels After defining a submodel and assigning its attributes the user needs to discretize the model by clicking on the Deep Discretization button on the Button Palette When Define Model Grid window appears Figure 15 5 the user must click on the Advanced Discretization Options button Define Model Grid Main Model Setting Length EN Length f Change NE NY Change Drs D w S Define number of computational layers Figure 15 5 Define Model Grid window Discretize OF ME 40 DA 4 1240 ft Cancel This will open Advanced Options window Figure 15 6 the Selected Model area the user should choose Main and all its submodels options and click OK And then click Discretize OK in the Define Model Grid window Advanced Options Selected Model Main model only Diecretization Option f Adaptive discretization Cancel Define Min Thickness Dk Figure 15 6 Advanced Options window 15 7 Selecting a Submodel To select a submodel in the Working Area first click the Sel
114. the map will expand to the full extent of the largest shapefile coverage If any of the shapefiles have state wide extent the map will expand showing the entire extent of the state Figure 22 25 shows the location of each option button on the GIS Model Importer tool bar GIS Model Importer Point Layers Expandd shp Layers Zoom out incremental Zoom out to full extent Figure 22 25 To zoom in select the Zoom In button Holding down the left mouse button draw a rectangle around the area to be enlarged Once a user has zoomed in on a sub area of the full extent of the shapefiles there are two methods for zooming out The first 1s to select the Zoom Out button and depressing the left mouse in the center of the viewing area The viewing area scale is increased by a factor of 1 5 every time the left mouse button is depressed until the original full scale has been recovered The second method of zooming out is to select the Zoom Out to Full Extent button The original viewing scale 1s recovered in a single step 22 14 Using the Measuring Tool It is possible to measure the linear distance between two points on the map displayed in the GIS Model Importer window by using the Distance Measuring Tool that is found on the GIS Model Importer Toolbar Figure 22 26 The user should select the starting point by left clicking the m
115. the title bar visible in the lower right hand corner of the user s monitor It is a separate window so it can be moved independently from the rest of the IGW Version 5 0P interface The AE will need to be moved often as 1 it is used to define attributes for every model feature and 2 it is always displayed in front of the Main Window therefore obstructing its view To move the AE one can click and drag the window to its desired location from the bottom right corner of the viewing screen and then minimize it for easy access later on at any time As with any other window the AE can be closed but it will only remain closed until another feature is defined in the Working Area at which point it will reopen in the center of the screen If it 1s needed again prior to defining another feature simply select the Attributes Explorer button located above the Layer Selector see Figure 3 1 and Section 3 9 The AE consists of two layers The Model Explore layer is visible by default see Figure 4 1 Behind the Model Explore layer is the Hierarchy Tree layer Hierarchy Tree layer is not active in IGW Version 5 0P Only Model Explorer Layer is discussed in the following subsections In IGW 2D there is an Apply button to introduce changes Note there is not an Apply button in IGW Version 5 0P Values entered into the AE are automatically updated 8 Refer to Chapter 6 of the IGW Version 4 7 Tutorials document for an
116. to the location of a saved txt file which contains the desired values for the selected array in the specific format as shown in Figure 17 5 Using the correct file format the data from the txt file can be imported into the currently assigned array 169 5 array_tst txt Notepad kaw Grid Based Array 30 Data File Array Mame such as Cond Head MY Mz 30 E 32333333333333 3333333333333 3353333343335 3333333333333 3333333333333 3333333333333 3333333333333 3333333333335 3343333343333 353333335343335 a32333333333333 32333333333333 3333333333333 3333333343335 3333333333333 3333333333333 3333333333333 Figure 17 5 Import file format for txt file The specific things to note in the format of the txt file are given below e The first and second lines in the file are text entries containing general information e The third line is also a text entry It contains the name of the array to which this file will be assigned The name has to be exactly the same as that of the assigned array in the top field else nothing will be will be imported into the assigned array e The fourth line contains 3 text entries NX NY and NZ separated by commas These represent number of columns rows and layers in the IGW model e The fifth line contains 3 numeric entries corresponding to the text entries in the fourth line defining the array dimensions in the X Y and Z dimensions e From sixth line onwards the val
117. toolbar Figure 22 24 The hand cursor is placed on the map and the left mouse button is depressed and held down as the cursor and map are moved about the window GIS Model Importer DER ama maaa 8 ew Lx ver Explorer aN for Modelin Ua E PN Noint Layers isl WW d Expanded8 shp m La n g a yers a QD Expanded8 shp e aP 9 qpded amp manualshp Pii ithology Laye B s appin i Li M amp Polyline Layers v 47 Roads Expand 27 Polygon Layers Raster Layers a ph 850 noma og Hag Figure 22 24 Moving the Map by Using the Pan Map Button 257 22 13 Changing the Viewing Area Scale in the GIS Model Importer When shapefiles are first imported into the viewing area of the GIS Model Importer window the default setting is to expand the viewing area to include the entire extent of the shapefile As shapefiles are added the scale of the viewing area remains unchanged and must be adjusted so that the entire extent of all shapefiles is visible in the GIS Model Importer window There are three options for adjusting the viewing area scale Zoom In Zoom Out E incremental and Zoom Out to Full Extent Care should be used when selecting the Zoom Out to Full Extent button as
118. user can experiment with different boundary types to observe their impact on the calculated drawdown Flux Boundary Condition is not available in GW Version 5 0P to calculate drawdown However the user can select Recharge array from the Attributes Array List and add recharge flux at the boundaries equal to the required boundary flux to create flux boundaries Two Array Operations Tools Two Array Operation area is highlighted in Grid Bsed Operations window shown in Figure 17 2 The left half of this area contains the operational tools while the right half only shows the general formula of operation s The formula is reproduced below Arraylx A Array2x C Array3 where Arrayl Array2 and Array 3 could be any arrays selected from the Attributes Array List A and are any real numbers Default values for A 1 while B 0 and C 0 Using the above formula the Two Array Operation can be used to perform many operations From the examples given below the user can get a fair idea of how to implement a Two Array Operation The formula for the operation is simple and the interface 1s quite intuitive The user can select arrays from the Attributes Array List and assign them in the appropriate fields corresponding to Arrayl Array2 and Array3 The user can also enter the desired values of constants B and C To complete any operation user must click the 5PPlv button 17 6 1 Copying Values from one
119. user may also assign a constant leakance value to all polylines and ignore stream order The stage for the polyline is read automatically from the polyline shapefile the user has no ability to control this feature This value is derived from 30 meters DEM polygons for the area The user can assign a uniform stream bottom depth The bottom elevation 1s calculated by subtracting this stream bottom depth from the stage assigned to that location 269 Option to treat polyline as two way or one way head dependent flux boundary Assign leakance based Stream Assign Leakance And Elevation on Stream Order Leakance Stream Order Based Order Leakance m dav Two way One way water depth m mm gt 10 g C 100 C 10000 C a Assign constant leakance to all polylines gt 100000 1000000 Calculate river bottom elevation Stage automatically Constant dar e read from file Elevation Bottom surface water elevation mo OK Figure 22 42 Leakance and Stream Order Lookup Table 11111 A With the Stream Order Filter Figure 22 43 it is possible to use stream order as a criterion for extracting polylines It is possible to simply extract all polylines extract only polylines that have a stream order greater than a determined value or simply equal to a single stream order Stream Order Filte
120. value will update in proportion to the dimensions of the Working Area by making an approximately square grid cell NY field displays the number of cell center nodes in the y direction The first row of nodes are placed on the bottom most edge of the Working Area and are evenly spaced across the Working Area in the y direction Although NY field is updated with NX field but user may change it independent of the NX value A number largely different from the automatically adjusted one will make rectangular grid cells When Change NX NY is selected the values in fields DX and DY are automatically updated based on the following formulae DX field displays the x direction extent of each node centered cell in the Working Area This number is calculated as _ XLENGTH NX 1 Where XLENGTH total length of X axis of the modeling domain DX DY field displays the y direction extent of each node centered cell in the Working Area This number is calculated as _ YLENGTH NY 1 Where YLENGTH total length of Y axis of the modeling domain DY Change DX DY When Change DX DY option is selected the user can directly input the desired length of grid cells DX and DY in X and Y directions respectively The software automatically calculates the NX and NY using the above mentioned formulae Entering a value for DX automatically causes the DY value to update the DY value will update in proportion to the dimensions of the Working Area by maki
121. zn o oder einn erroe ete tb nandi det abdo bte 266 266 Specific Capacity Based Other 267 Scatter Point Extraction Filter 268 Poly line trac ion 269 Leakance and Stream Order Lookup 270 Sire amr Order Fuller eiie d news eae Depp tu quee pou mated 270 Extracine Popon copa dno cou 271 Lake Polygon Lookup o etae te er 212 Wetland Lookup Fables ioi i QUO in QUE dis 273 Poly son Et dua aua No D mM DES 213 Selecting Mapping Criteria enne 274 Put All Point Layers Into a Single Polygon Feature 275 GIS Data imported to IGW Modeling Environment 276 Duplicate polygon warning message 276 Option to Delete Selected Layers in the IGW Modeling Environment 277 Screen Capture ODLIOTS 279 Output Data bett aede etit iro tent 282 Randon ous ouod cuoi a 283 Example data of stochastic processes at a monitoring well
122. zone has been created and particle window closed the cursor turns back into draw mode and the user may continue to add particle zones as desired A particle zone may be redefined in the same fashion as any other zones using the button at Button Palette row 11 column 3 see Section 7 3 After a particle zone is redefined be sure to click the Initializing Particles button to completely fill the new zone shape with particles A particle zone may be selected in the same fashion as any other zone see Section 7 2 10 1 3 Particles Along a Polyline Polyline button Button Palette row 4 column 3 This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now draw a particle polyline same methodology as defining a polyline Section 8 1 in the Working Area The first step in defining a polyline of particles 1s clicking the Add Particles Along a After double clicking or typing the end command in the VCI to finish drawing the particle polyline the Particles window appears see Figure 10 5 This window is identical to the ones discussed in above sections with one difference The default number of particles to be released is now 30 instead of 15 104 Particles Horizontal Setting Number of particles released along this polyline 30 Vertical Settings f 2D matrix at a vertical location af 05 f 3D matris Vertical location top 10 75 Vertical location bottom 10 25 1 aquifer tap Vertical
123. 00 Realizations Seepage Flux Process 15000 20000 Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C PDF C CDF Seepage C Solute Show Stats on C Master Realization Mean Std Change Probability Resolution Save Figure 23 5 Piots from process files at monitoring wells Process Curve Choice Im 3 day m 3 day esperan Mean Std Mean Realization Seepage Flux Max Min Mean Median Mode Ave Err Std Skewness Kurtosis Espera 3 day aT ee Para psp espera Ts Mean Mean Std Mean Realization Seepage Flux Max Min Mean Median Mode Ave Err Std Skewness Kurtosis Process Curve Choice Mean Master Slaves Mean C Std Realization CV Realization n day 1 Furia pes proa pss pera espera To Mean Std lization Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux Max Seepage Flux Histogram fd Min Mean Median 3 3 3 3 Probability Mode Ave Err 200 4 00 Std Total Seepage Flux 6 00 Skewness ee 3 day cc Kurtosis Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage Solute PDF Realization Mean Mean Std Show Stats on C CDF Mean Std Mean Realization C Master MastersSlaves Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux CDF p M
124. 05303 08000006086 Hydraulic Conductivity Molecula 08000005824 Conductivity 08000000828 r 08000000843 Fandom 08000007692 i 08000006677 08000006125 Kx Kz Orient XY degree 08000005602 sa t Orient XZ Orientation of 08000000831 oro feee Pee 4 08000005446 Local Dispersion Drientation of 08000000240 ss esee po f Long 08000000845 08000000233 Trans 4 08000006384 Storage Terms Vert fF 08000005778 uc is 08000007903 Specific Yield 08000008504 Specific Storage p 08000000846 08000007553 Soil Particle Density pm 08000006130 Effective Porosity Y Scatter Point Style Coordinates v Visible Sief X ena Color Y esas Figure 7 21 RHP for Scatter Points After the scatter points have been defined in a zone the user can assign the following spatial attribute values to these points in the AE hydraulic conductivity e top elevation e bottom elevation and starting head Hydraulic conductivity value can be assigned to a point by selecting the Physical Properties tab User can check the box before Conductivity and then enter the value for hydraulic conductivity in the required field Aquifer top and bottom elevations can be assigned to the scatter points by selecting the Aquifer Elevations tab and entering the values
125. 1 552100 88 213011 72 284 95 164 99 277 673 277 368 100 PO00002 556775 11 212834 22 34 01 300 84 199 84 277 368 PO000003 554328 33 212816 9 69 7 288 95 195 95 4 551878 33 212782 07 288 04 228 04 282 245 POOOOOS 556749 212778 92 25 66 300 84 234 84 291 694 281 635 104 POOOOOG 556733 39 212715 97 299 92 238 92 286 207 POO00007 552007 06 212681 23 284 07 209 07 279 197 274 32 102 POOOOOS 556708 42 212470 37 299 92 119 92 277 673 POOOOOS 551379 36 212303 53 0 1 290 78 200 78 275 234 10 551145 99 212186 17 288 95 212 95 279 806 281 635 90 POOOO11 555983 74 212109 42 337 25 295 05 218 05 279 806 276 149 98 P000012 557075 34 212073 78 281 635 13 556291 8 212008 18 63 76 293 83 220 83 278 587 14 557043 84 211949 02 32 84 299 92 139 92 266 395 POOOOLS 555797 94 211939 95 284 07 227 07 274 93 281 635 104 POOOO16 554044 9 211919 34 282 85 219 85 278 587 274 32 99 Poooo1 555560 05 211881 95 281 03 175 03 274 93 POOOO1S8 551268 78 211468 05 15 49 292 198 279 806 276 149 105 P000019 551198 57 211377 22 295 05 224 05 280 11 Figure 1 22 A sample file for scatter points First line in the file is a text entry containing information about the file Second line has various comma separated fields The first field is a keyword Layer followed
126. 1 X sect thickness DB j42 0620 t 9 Zone 3001 wells 2001 Well 2001 v Equal to Saft Kx Kz Layer 3 Color E Color Interpolation Scheme Wells 3001 Display This Options Well 3001 Figure 16 2 RHP for a Cross Section Well 3002 QU 3D Attributes 159 NUMBER OF GRIDS ALONG X SECT NL This field indicates the number of grids along the cross section NUMBER OF VERTICAL GRID NZ This field indicates the number of nodes along the entire length of the cross section The default value entry is 28 The user may change this by entering a number in the appropriate field however at the present time this feature is inactive NZ EQUAL TO NL SQRT KX KZ This field indicates the number of nodes in the z direction to be included in the cross section By default the associated EQUAL TO NL SQRT KX KZ box is checked and the software automatically determines this number from TOPE BOTE NZ 5 16 5 1 KI Kz where TOPE top elevation of the aquifer L BOTE bottom elevation of the aquifer L conductivity along the length of the cross section LIT The user may uncheck this box and enter a desired number in the field This number is set to prevent the occurrence of ill conditioned matrix systems in the solution However when modeling very large areas the calculated NZ will be too small DZ will be too large to provide
127. 11 iw Mapping initial head fram parent v Mapping initial concentration from parent Head Tolerance 0 03280 EN Iw Accounting For plume fram outside submodel Figure 15 3 up scaling downscaling options for submodels 15 5 3 Scatter Point Control Scatter points are often used in models to interpolate spatial attributes in a model please refer to Chapter 20 Since GW Version 5 0P allows multi scale hierarchical modeling to very fine scales the number of scatter points available in smaller domains of submodels may become too small to have reliable interpolation of a certain attribute Scatter Point Control tab is shown in Figure 15 4 Using options given in the Scatter Point Control tab the user can assign scatter points outside of the submodel domain to be included in the interpolation of attributes Options include making scatter points available in an area equal n times greater than the submodel size default value of n 2 or making the sub area a circular radius with size based on either a set distance default 200m or a multiple of the submodel s X length value default 100 Madel Grid Down Upscaling Scatter Point Control i Using Scatter Points in a Subarea Subarea Definition C times submodel domain size in Length and Length circular area with a radius of E circular area with a radius of submodel Length Click this button to confirm selection Figure 15 4 scatter Point Control for
128. 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 TABLE OF FIGURES IGW Version 5 OP Splash SCre egies corio rebos odo pod ope btt 7 ME OU IMG Day Mx T 7 IGW Version 5 0 Main Window esses eene eene 8 Uant MO osea pest se esa ed oaa Prater sana ated ania scion 13 Sel ONIS WIndOW oda tm e Mb aactor S Ec edid canes 15 Probing Setting for Node Edit window eese 16 PETON crois buta dado T 17 IOW CE ud ots dedos fup bdo ato Nb 17 Parameters for Cell Attribute Viewer Checked boxes are default selection 27 Mode TE o necu 20 Probing Settings for Node Edit with dropdown choices 32 AE s eios deco on Medea 34 General view OF ETP Russo ties shana tema ee beso 35 RHP Tor Project Identitic at IOTIGmu c re ease edd reda od 39 Preferences Box for Project Screen e a e 39 RHP f r General MOde LO puns t odd eb t iei e eta 40 ISEIP TOES CDS etre tanec Uo aranea vro eg o Means 40 Multipliers for Sensitivity Analysis for Physical Properties 4 Multipliers for Sensitivity Analysis for Sources and Sinks 42 RHP View Tor W lls uiis ci e ae E EE anion anaes 43 TPS showing different time processes ccccccseecceescec
129. 197 OS0000067 30 Denn e 05000000815 06000000825 0600000583 OS000006531 OS000000361 OS000007639 OS000000555 OS000007664 02000000851 02000000890 Figure 22 14 08010919016 08010921004 08010919008 08010919015 080109324007 09011024004 09011024406 09010924006 09010920005 08010919015 00010920002 09010919010 09010919011 09010920001 08010927001 08010926003 08010925004 09010925025 Shapefile Data Table Zoom in selected feature Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barr TOWNSHIP Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Prairieville Barry Praineville Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry Barry The pathname showing the location of the shapefile the shapefile type e g point polyline etc number of records and number of fields are displayed near the top of the Data Table window The different field identifiers and field types are shown in a scroll down window in the middle of the Data Table window and all of the fields in the selected data table are shown as a horizontal scroll window at the bottom of the data table window It is also possible to search for a data table element entry using the
130. 23 Lighting Options for 3D Visualization 239 21 2 2 13 Annotation Miscs This tab allows for manipulation of the three dimensional model in terms of font style whether to display the 3D axes and the respective tick numbers for each and the background color Figure 21 24 3D Visualization Options Cropping scatter Points Show Layers Mame lv Show 3D Axis Font style tick b Font size factor ick number 5 Aral Yr tick number 5 Courier j Z tick number 3 f Times IM Show Outline Frame Background Color Color AntrAliasing may slow down rendering process ver much E Apply Cancel OF Figure 21 24 Miscellaneous Options for 3D Visualization 21 2 3 Manipulating Graphics in 3D When the new window is opened that displays the three dimensional volume model the user has several ways in which to change the view In particular they can click either above the model or below the model which will rotate the model in that respective direction The same can be done for clicking on the left and right side of the model The user may also zoom in or out by right clicking the right side of the model to zoom in or right clicking the left side of the model to zoom out Examples of simple model manipulation are shown in Figure 21 25 A through C 240 Figure 21 25 3D Volume Grid View Manipulation Windows 241 21 2 4 Saving and Exiting The user may save the
131. 3 of r length 2 3 of Y length Water table Drop on sitemap lsasurface Vector Apply Cancel OF Figure 21 8 Fence Diagram Options An example of fence diagram is shown in Figure 21 9 gt Model 1 3D Visualization ejjrerejeeess e Figure 21 9 Fence diagram 232 21 2 2 4 Cropping The second way of dissecting the model is Cropping in which the user can cut blocks off of the three dimensional volume model to view the interior workings of the simulation This can be useful in any number of ways including observation of contaminant plume migration well drawdown effects local variation within the water table and so on The options available include seven styles Figure 21 10 from a 1 8 cut of the model all the way up to a 7 8 cut of the simulation The user may also manually specify the cut size and location within this interface These cuts like the fence diagram can be applied not only to volume but also the surface water table isosurface the sitemap and the vectors of the model 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs sutacee vene rtt Cereal Atbues Fence saan Cropping m Cropping style 1 8 Customize Apply ta Volume Water table Isosurface Surface Drape on sitemap Vector Apply Cancel OK Figure 21 10 Cropping options Figure 21 11 shows a 1 8 cut of a 2 layer model with var
132. 3009 Mn 40507 Mean 0 24516 Median 0 2859 Ave 0 50279 92557 3day Skownesd 125901 Kurtosis 4 fr 7a Select a Parameter to Visualize v Process Process Curve Choice Seepage Solute C PDF J Realization Show Stats on C CDF Mean Std Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Mean Std Mean Realization C V Std Realization v Figure 23 7 Piots from process files across polylines 286 Chapter 24 CONCLUSION This user s manual was designed to give the user the ability to master all of the features and functions of IGW Version 5 0P However as IGW Version 5 0P is constantly evolving so is this manual Therefore small discrepancies or inconsistencies might be encountered as the authors attempt to keep the software and its documentation robust and complete Consult the tutorial and program help file for more information and stay alert for periodic software and documentation updates Feel free to contact the authors with any comments or concerns regarding this document or GW Version 5 0P in general If more information is desired regarding the GW Version 5 0P file format or the parameters therein please contact Dr Shu Guang Li at lishug 2 egr msu edu Thank you for taking the time to examine GW Version 5 0P We hope you find it a powerful and empowering tool 287 APPENDIX A IGW VERSION 5 0P SOFTWARE INTERNAL MARKE
133. 396 1148 1795974544 Swamp 2438 4576425122 35 74444968655 Recharge 9037 115784703 Constant Head in 719 47879945926 Constant Head out 10958 542165133 To Bottom Layer Figure 14 7 2 Chart Data Spreadsheet 138 14 4 Initializing Model Features Clocks Various aspects of the model can be initialized independently of each other Concentration plumes are initialized by clicking the Initializing Plume button The plumes return to their starting locations and concentrations Particle features are initialized by clicking the Initializing Particles button The particles return to their initial locations The clocks associated with these features are reset by clicking the Reset Flow Clock Reset Concentration Clock and Reset Particle Clock buttons located on the Button Palette at row 10 columns 1 2 and 4 Please also refer to Section 11 2 139 Chapter 15 HIERARCHICAL MODELING In IGW Version 5 0P the user can built submodels or child models with a finer grid within a main model or parent model with coarser grid A submodel is a localized model that yields greater detail over a specific region of the Working Area Submodels use the parent model solution as starting and boundary conditions The term hierarchical modeling implies that IGW Version 5 0P allows the user to keep refining the grid across multiple scales by building child models within the parent
134. 4 08000002246 08000002203 08000002265 nannnnn 235 08020924014 08020924010 08020819001 08020820002 08020927005 08020928008 08020925001 08020928034 2 927112 N a os Opening the Data Table 249 The second method is accomplished by moving the cursor over the desired shapefile in the GIS Layer Explorer and right clicking the mouse The window shown in Figure 22 13 will open It is possible to examine the data table for the entire shapefile or just the portion of the shapefile that has been selected Click the left mouse button on the desired selection option GIS Model Importer Layers for Modeling Point Layers m Refresh All i g z Polyline Layer m AF Unselected Polygon Layer Change symbol E 9 Augu er 7 oe data does not 99 Lakes j A 2 Lithology Lad Remove this layer BO d ch an g ec ol Of 718 Layers for Mapping A Y 2 Point Layers 4 Polyline Layer 3D Visualizatio v 7 Roads Expanded8 shp EIP Polygon Layers Raster Layers Right click menu and desired options Selected dataset turns red Figure 22 13 Showing the Data Table for the Entire or Selected Shapefile It is not recommended that the data table for the entire shapefile be examined as this tabl
135. 6 Figure 18 19 MPIEXEC wrapper window eese 197 Figure 18 20 Selecting Parallel Computing option in Solver window 197 Figure 18 21 Parallel Hosts and Tasks 198 Eieure 18 22 Master Process and its ioco iU eee ti eere edens 199 Figure 18 23 Master Slave Process and its Mean 200 Figure 18 24 Master Slave Process and its Mean with number of realizations on log M 200 Lisure 15 25 Head PDP with Masten eoo Cena ea be te een ehe hs 201 Figure 18 26 Head PDF with Master Slaves 201 5 27 C VOV Miste o ex vae tc ER datu edu e EHE ES ot ou eoa aote eti 202 Lieure 18 28 CV with Master Slaves axes tare rac eee oben Cher Eo Ree eo tee Mame uda t rade 202 Figure 19 1 Drawing Options for the Main Model 203 Figure 19 2 Horizontal and Vertical Scale windows eese 204 Figure 19 3 Scale parameters with some illustrative values attributes 204 FON AV wate sean baee 205 Fig re 19 5 Pattern Display Options UE De cu ei 205 Figure 19 6 for Assigning Text in Working 206 Figure 19 7 Display Options for
136. A Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree gt Main Model gt Cand 233 pts Zones 1001 e Fone 1001 Exploratory Analysis Remove Attribute Outlier Analysis KB Bot 106 Pol TEES 5 Show Attributes Export Attribute Use Log Scale StartHead gt 1 2 97 Tope gt 107 Pe Regression 3 Zone 1002 rest E Sone 1003 f Global regression Use all points t Biquadratic LO Fone 1004 linear CL NN A M ocal regression Use nearest paints Dre Ap zone 1005 Quadratic i Zone 1006 Vari 9 Zone 1007 ar ariogram Zune 1008 Iw Interpolation Simulation Model area AP Zone 1009 Interpolation Method 09 one 1010 ies Exponent Fone 1011 nverse No af Nearest Paints 1 0 C429 zone 1012 2 f Unconditional Simulation TP Zone 1013 3 at Conditional Simulation J un Simulation Methads 9 Direct inversion P Zone 1016 Multiscale AD Zone 1017 Spectral f Conjugate gradient AB Zone 1018 5 Hierarchical 5 Sequential Gaussian f LU Decomposition Varnogram Model Turing Bands 2 User specified En Sequential Indicator Lipuan Unconditional E Variogram LU Decomposition fe nfer fram data simulation f Covariance Simulated Annealing Edit Figure 18 5 Options for unconditional simulation 182 3 Random Field Options Aniso
137. Array to Another If the user wants to copy for example values from one existing array say Head array to an other existing array say Calibration Head array it can be done as follows 173 e Select the Head Array from Attributes Array List and use button to assign it as Array in the Two Array Operation area Do not change the value of A e Do not assign any array as Array2 e Select Calibration Head array from the Attributes Array List and use the button to assign it as Array3 e Click the PPlv button Done message will pop up advising the user that the operation has been completed This operation assigns values from Head array to Calibration Head array Figure 17 8 shows the Two Array Operation area for the above mentioned steps HE ound Top Elevation Bottom Elevation Partitioning F d Effective Porosity Specific Storage Specific veld Longitudinal Dispersritu Transverse Dispersivity Vertical Dispersivity Anisotropy Factor Anisotropy Factor 2 Anisotropy Onentation Anisotropy Onentation Hiver Stage Hiver Leakance Hiver Bottom Drain Leakance Drain Bottom DS TARR DSTARYY DSTARZZ OStar Orientation 2 OStar Orientation 242 Array Operation Array Unassigned lq Clear en Arrays 3 Calibration Head Clear Apply Figure 17 8 Two array operations p
138. Attributes Export Attribute 7 Use Log Scale BotE gt 154 Point s Main Model gt ConstHead Cond gt 63 Point s Regression ConstHead gt 152 Point s Linear op TopE gt 154 Pain rns Global regression Use all points 9 Zone 1002 ain Local regression Use nearest points Zone 1003 Regres sion C Quadratic d Zone 1004 anal sis 1005 Interpolation Simulation Use log scale for mn Interpolation Parameters h d li z Pline 1001 Interpolation Method y rau lic z Pline 1002 Exponent 2 m Wels 1001 Inverse Distance conductivity data Well 1001 i No of Nearest Points 10 Well 1002 Unconditional Simulation Nee iu Conditional Simulation j Ordinary C Direct inversion C Multiscale C Hierarchical Conjugate gradient C LU Decomposition Variogram Model a TRS ts rt Edi Variogram Q C Covariance Main Model z Figure 20 7 Regression Outlier Analysis The Outlier Analysis window is shown in Figure 20 8 The user selects the number of standard deviations beyond the mean to be used to define an outlier The standard deviation is measured perpendicular to the regression surface that has been fit to the data The user then selects the Detect Outliers button The Mean Standard Deviation data ID Name and data value Value are displayed
139. CHANGING THE VIEWING AREA SCALE IN THE GIS MODEL IMPORTER 258 22 14 USING THE MEASURING TOOL 258 22 15 SELECTING SHAPEFILE DATA FOR EXPORTING INTO IGW 259 22 16 EXTRACTING TO IGW 261 22 17 EXTRACTION CRITERIA 261 22 17 1 PUMPING WELLS 262 22 17 2 SCATTER POINT DATA 263 22 17 3 ESTIMATION OF HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY 264 22 17 4 POLYLINE DATA 268 22 17 5 POLYGON DATA 270 22 17 6 MAPPING CRITERIA 274 22 17 7 PLACING ALL POINTS IN A SINGLE POLYGON 274 22 17 8 MULTIPLE DATA EXTRACTIONS USING THE SAME SELECTION BOX OR POLYGON 276 22 17 9 IMPORTING GIS FILES FROM AN ANONYMOUS DATABASE 278 CHAPTER 23 FILE FEATURES 279 23 1 GRAPHICS CAPTURE 279 23 1 1 SCREEN CAPTURING 279 23 1 2 MOTION CAPTURE 280 23 1 3 SAVING DISPLAY AS A PICTURE 281 23 2 SAVING IGW MODEL FILES 281 23 3 EDITING IGW MODEL FILES 281 23 4 EXPORTING DATA 281 23 5 RANDOM SAMPLING 282 23 6 OPENING A PROCESS FILE 283 23 6 1 MONITORING WELL PROCESS FILE 283 23 6 2 POLYLINE FLUX PROCESS FILE 285 CHAPTER 24 CONCLUSION 287 APPENDIX A IGW VERSION 5 0P SOFTWARE INTERNAL MARKERS 288 A I AQUIFER TYPE PARAMETER 288 CELL STATE PARAMETER 288 A III IBOUND PARAMETER 289 APPENDIX B RANDOM SETTINGS INTERFACES 290 viii OPTION OF UNCONDITIONAL RANDOM FIELD WINDOW SPECTRAL ALGORITHM SEQUENTIAL GAUSSIAN SIMULATION 1 TURNING BANDS ALGORITHM V SIMULATED ANNEALING II RANDOM PARAMETERS WINDOW B I B I I B I I B I I B I I B APPENDIX C TRANSIENT SETTINGS C I
140. DR SHUGUANG LI AND ASSOCIATES INTERACTIVE GROUNDWATER MODELING IGW IGW VERSION 5 0P USER S MANUAL VERSITY C L LEGE Gi Dr Shuguang Li and Associates at Michigan State University MICHIGAN SIATE ABE Bed IE IGW User s Manual for Version 5 0P Copyright 2006 by Dr Shuguang Li and Associates at Michigan State University AII rights reserved Dr Shuguang Li and Associates makes no warranties either express or implied regarding the program IGW 5 0P and its fitness for any particular purpose or for the validity of the information contained in this document Authors Editors Hassan Abbas Dr Shuguang Li Justin Scheidt Special Thanks to Dr Hausheng Liao Dr Qun Liu DOCUMENT VERSION 2006 1 http www egr msu edu lishug TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF FIGURES CHAPTER1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 IGW VERSION 5 0P SOFTWARE SYNOPSIS 1 2 USER S MANUAL INTRODUCTION 1 2 1 USER S MANUAL LAYOUT 1 2 2 UsER s MANUAL ACRONYMS ABBREVIATIONS 1 2 3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CHAPTER2 GETTING STARTED 2 1 OBTAINING THE SOFTWARE 2 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE 2 3 STARTING THE SOFTWARE CHAPTER 3 MAIN WINDOW INTERFACE 3 1 MAIN WINDOW LAYOUT 3 2 TITLE BAR 3 3 MENU BAR 3 3 1 FILE MENU 3 3 2 MODELING MENU 3 3 3 GIS MENU 3 3 4 3D VISUALIZATION MENU 3 3 5 UTILITIES MENU 3 3 6 DISPLAY MENU 3 3 7 HELP MENU 3 4 BUTTON PALETTE 3 5 STE
141. Data for well xxxx OO02E 00 OO0SE 00 OO02E 00 OO01LE 00 QOOTErOD OO0SE 00 OO04E 00 OOO2ZE 00 OO0SE 00 I Lr D C E 9 p D Figure 23 4 Example data of stochastic processes at a monitoring well Once the data is imported into GW Version 5 0P for each process InK head concentration the software can generate various plots shown in Figure 23 5 the process mean standard deviation histogram PDF CDF mean realization coefficient of variation The software also generates tables for statistical parameters of each process data including max min mean median mode average error standard deviation skewness and kurtosis This table can be seen on the right side of each plot in Figure 23 5 Flux Across Polyline Total Seepage Flux 0 Seepage Flux Process Realizations Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C PDF C CDF Master Slaves d d C Hstgram 7 Std Realization CV Realization Seepage C Solute Show Stats on C Master Realization v MeanStd Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline 2 00 Total Seepage Flux Seepage Flux PDF 4 00 6 00 Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage C Solute Show Stats on C Master Master Slaves ge C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Realization Mean Std Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline Total Seepage Flux 5000 100
142. Default Attribute window Chapter 6 the default entry is 1 and the ratio is dimensionless ORIENTATION OF ANISOTROPY IN XY This parameter is the angle between the x axis and the Kx axis in the x y plane Refer to Figure 7 4 for a visual aid The default value is 0 0e0 and default entry is 0 0e0 The default unit is degrees with radians also available ORIENTATION OF ANISOTROPY IN XZ This parameter is the angle between the z axis and the Kz axis in the x z plane This value has no effect in IGW Version 5 0P calculations as the software incorporates only one layer The default value is 0 0e0 and default entry 1s 0 0e0 The default unit is degrees with radians also available 59 Figure 1 4 Orientation of Anisotropy SPECIFIC YIELD This is the storage term for unconfined aquifers Denoted S it is defined as the volume of water that an unconfined aquifer releases from storage per unit surface area of aquifer per unit decline in the water table see Figure 7 5 Unit cross sectional area Unit decline of water table Water table Figure 7 5 Parameters Defining Specific Yield The default value in layer window is 0 1 The default entry for a model polygon 1s zero and the parameter is dimensionless SPECIFIC STORAGE The specific storage S is the amount of water per unit volume of saturated aquifer material that can be stored or released based on the water and aquifer material 60 compressibility per unit c
143. File Modeling GIS 3D Visualization Utilities Display Help Each of these menu items is explained below 3 3 1 File Menu The File menu contains the following operations Create New Model Selecting this opens a new file This is the same as clicking the Create a New Model button see Section 3 4 New to Version 5 0P is the option to select opening either an entire project or a single layer More discussion on layers will be given in subsequent chapters The user should save work prior to creating a new model as the software will not prompt the user to save it Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt C Documents wile Modeling GIS 3D Visualization Utilities Display Help Create New Model Project Open Model From File Layer Save Save Model As k Import Third Party Model Open Model From File Selecting this opens an existing IGW Version 5 0P file A window titled Open appears therefore allowing the user to browse to the location of the desired file The user only has the option to open a conceptual model as the grid based model option is not yet offered The user should remember that 2D version files are not compatible with 3D versions or vice versa This function minimizes only the Main Window Other IGW Version 5 0P interfaces are not affected 9 IGW can run multiple models through different sessions simultaneously Previously saved files can be opened in separate IGW sessions at the same time
144. For this reason kriging is sometimes said to produce the best linear unbiased estimate 219 20 3 2 3 Unconditional Simulations An unconditional simulation is one in which the simulated field is not constrained to pass through the known data points honoring the covariance of the variogram only instead of the explicit data values The Unconditional Simulation procedure generates a spatially correlated random field based on sample statistical parameters This procedure will generate new values for the locations corresponding to the measured values There are six options available in the Simulation Methods area when this procedure is selected 1 Spectral Algorithm the default 2 Sequential Gaussian Simulation 3 Turning Bands 4 Sequential Indicator 5 LU Decomposition and 6 Simulated Annealing There are two options that appear in the Spatial Statistics Parameters area when the Unconditional Simulation is chosen Choosing User Specified allows the user to explicitly define simulation parameters by accessing the Random Field Options window clicking the appropriate Option button Choosing Infer from Data instructs the software to automatically determine the parameters and apply them Clicking the associated Edit button opens the Variogram window Figure 20 11 This window provides visualization of the statistical analysis and allows the user to adjust some of the automatic settings The user is referred to the variogra
145. Hydraulic Head 207 Figure 19 8 Display Options for Velocity Vectors 208 Pieure 19 9 T put Data for ood 209 Figure 20 1 Scatter Points and Attributes 211 Figure 20 2 Exploratory Data Analysis nennen 212 20 5 Hisorni Amil yS 5153 ecodes orte 215 Figure 20 4 Probability Density Function eese 213 Figure 20 5 Cumulative Density nene 214 reer TT MIDI cosa sere 214 Figure 20 7 Regression Outlier Analysis eese nennen Z5 Figure 20 8 Outlier Analysis 1 eene nennen 216 Remo wine GUIDES onte utt 216 Figure 20 10 Manual Regression Analysis esses 217 Figure 20 11 Interpolation Window with Additional Choices 220 Figure 20 12 Kriting Analysis uiii o eR ERE trat baie olen Sta Rau Ne EL Exo eu Rua diced 221 Figure 20 13 Automatic Fitting of the Semi Variogram Model 222 Figure 20 14 Manual Fitting of Semi Variogram 5 222 Figure 20 15 Illustration of Nugget Range and
146. IC MODEL LAYER CHAPTER 14 RUNNING THE MODEL 14 1 RUNNING THE MODEL 108 109 110 110 110 111 111 112 112 113 116 116 117 118 119 120 120 122 123 124 124 125 125 126 126 127 127 127 128 128 128 129 130 130 130 131 131 131 131 133 133 1V 14 2 ZONE BUDGET 14 3 2D CHART CONTROL OPTIONS 14 4 INITIALIZING MODEL FEATURES CLOCKS CHAPTER 15 HIERARCHICAL MODELING 15 1 DEFINING SUBMODELS 15 2 RHP FOR SUBMODELS IN ATTRIBUTES EXPLORER 15 3 SUBMODELS DISPLAY OPTIONS 15 4 PARENT MODEL CHILD MODEL INTERFACE 15 4 1 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 15 4 2 STARTING HEAD 15 4 3 PARAMETER INTERPOLATION 15 5 ASSIGNING ATTRIBUTES TO SUBMODELS 15 5 1 MODEL GRID 15 5 1 1 Horizontal Grid 15 5 1 2 Vertical Grid 15 5 2 UP SCALING DOWNSCALING 15 5 3 SCATTER POINT CONTROL 15 6 DISCRETIZING SUBMODELS 15 7 SELECTING A SUBMODEL 15 8 REDEFINING THE SUBMODEL AREA 15 9 VIEWING SUBMODELS IN SEPARATE WINDOWS 15 10 SUBMODEL WINDOW 15 11 HIERARCHICAL MODELS 15 11 1 CONCEPTUAL 15 11 2 SUBMODEL NAMING CONVENTION 15 11 3 ADDING SUBMODELS IN A SUBMODEL 15 11 4 VISUALIZING HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE 15 11 5 MASS BALANCE FOR SUBMODELS CHAPTER 16 CROSS SECTIONS 16 1 DEFINING CROSS SECTIONS 16 2 SELECTING CROSS SECTIONS 16 3 REDEFINING CROSS SECTIONS 16 4 SETTING CROSS SECTION ATTRIBUTES 16 5 SETTING CROSS SECTION DISPLAY OPTIONS 16 6 DETAILED CROSS SECTION INFORMATION 16
147. N SETTINGS These options allow the user to manually initialize any combination of the plume flow or particles for each realization SIMULATION TERMINATION CRITERION FIELD In this field the user may specify the total number of model realizations to be generated and solved This field is only active when the Stop at box see below is checked If 179 unspecified the software will continue to generate and solve model realizations until it 1s stopped by the user STOP AT CHECK BOX Checking this box specifies the software to terminate the Monte Carlo simulation process when the number of realizations specified in the STOP Realizations field is reached When the box is unchecked the software will E keep generating realizations until the Stop Pause Model button is pressed APPLY THESE MCS SOLVER SETTINGS TO ENTIRE MODEL HIERARCHY This feature will only work with models having multiple layers Clicking the button will allow the software to apply all settings entered for all layers in the model 18 3 2 Running Monte Carlo Simulations After selecting the desired simulation settings the user can click at the bottom of Model 1 Solver Settings window Figure 13 7 This will set the model to run in stochastic mode User can start the Monte Carlo simulations by pressing Run Model Forward button The simulations will stop when the specified number of q simulations in the Stop At box is reached and or by clicking
148. NG RESULTS 18 6 1 SINGLE REALIZATION SIMULATION 18 6 2 MONTE CARLO SIMULATION 18 7 PARALLEL COMPUTING 18 7 1 PREREQUISITES 18 7 2 STARTING A PARALLEL COMPUTING SESSION 18 7 3 STOPPING A PARALLEL COMPUTING SESSION 18 7 4 OBSERVING SIMULATION RESULTS CHAPTER 19 DISPLAY OPTIONS 19 1 DISPLAY OPTIONS INTERFACE 19 2 REFERENCE MAPS AREA 19 3 CONCEPTUAL FEATURES AND TEXTS AREA 19 3 1 19 3 2 DISPLAYING CONCEPTUAL FEATURES IN THE MODEL AREA IMPLEMENTING TEXT INTO THE WORKING AREA 19 4 SIMULATION INPUT AND RESULTS AREA 19 4 1 HEAD DISPLAY OPTIONS 19 4 2 VELOCITY DISPLAY OPTIONS 19 4 3 PARTICLE DISPLAY OPTIONS 19 4 4 CONCENTRATION DISPLAY OPTIONS 19 4 5 INPUT DATA DISPLAY OPTIONS 19 4 6 SOLUTION STATUS AND NUMBER OF ITERATIONS 168 169 170 170 171 171 172 172 173 173 174 175 175 177 177 177 178 179 180 181 184 184 185 185 188 192 195 196 196 196 196 197 199 199 203 203 204 205 205 206 206 207 208 208 208 209 209 vi 19 4 7 USE MODEL LEVEL DISPLAY 209 19 4 8 SHOW TREEMAP 209 19 5 MONTE CARLO SIMULATION RESULTS AREA 210 19 6 DISPLAY SEQUENCE TOP TO BOTTOM AREA 210 19 7 REFRESHING THE DISPLAY 210 19 8 ZOOMING IN OUT 210 CHAPTER 20 SCATTER POINT DATA PROCESSING 211 20 1 EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS 211 20 2 OUTLIER ANALYSIS 214 20 3 DATA INTERPOLATION 216 20 3 1 REGRESSION 217 20 3 2 INTERPOLATION METHODS AND SIMULATIONS 217 20 3 3 INVERSE DI
149. P ADJUSTMENT AND TIME DISPLAY INTERFACE 3 6 WORKING AREA DISPLAY TOOLS 3 7 LAYER NAVIGATOR 3 8 VERTEX COORDINATES INTERFACE 3 9 ATTRIBUTES EXPLORER BUTTON 3 10 LAYER SELECTOR 3 11 GRID BASED OPERATIONS BUTTON 3 12 CURSOR ACTIVATED TABLE CAT 3 13 WORKING AREA 3 14 WORKING AREA ATTRIBUTES DISPLAY 3 15 STATUS BAR 3 16 THE CURSOR 3 17 THE RIGHT CLICK MENU CHAPTER 4 ATTRIBUTES EXPLORER 4 1 THE MODEL EXPLORER 4 1 1 THE LEFT HAND PANE LHP 4 1 2 THE RIGHT HAND PANE RHP 4 1 2 1 Project 4 1 2 2 Main Model 4 1 2 3 Layer 4 1 2 4 Zones 4 1 2 5 Polylines 4 1 2 6 Wells 4 1 2 7 Particles Group 4 1 2 8 Cross Sections 4 1 3 TiME PROCESS SELECTOR TPS 4 2 THE HIERARCHY TREE LAYER CHAPTER 5 BASEMAP 5 1 THE MODEL SCALE AND BASEMAP WINDOW 5 2 LOADING A BASEMAP 5 2 1 VECTORIZATION OF RASTER PICTURES 5 2 2 VECTOR TYPE IMAGES 5 2 3 CHANGING WORKING AREA DIMENSIONS 5 3 LOADING MULTIPLE BASEMAP IMAGES 5 4 CLEARING THE BASEMAP CHAPTER 6 MODEL LAYER PARAMETERS 6 1 DEFAULT MODEL PARAMETERS 6 2 ATTRIBUTE PRIORITY PROTOCOL 6 3 DRY RE WETTING CRITERIA 6 3 4 MAKING WET CELLS DRY 6 3 2 MAKING DRY CELLS WET CHAPTER7 ZONES 7 1 DEFINING ZONES 7 2 SELECTING ZONES 7 3 REDEFINING ZONES 7 4 MOVING ZONES 7 5 REPLACING ZONES 7 6 SETTING ZONE ATTRIBUTES 7 6 1 ATTRIBUTE ENTRY AREA AEA 7 6 1 1 Physical Properties 7 6 1 2 Biochemical Properties 7 6 1 3 Aquifer Elevations 7 6 1
150. Plume time or Particles time Further since GW Version 5 0P has the ability to incorporate sub models Error Reference ource not found there is a feature to synchronize all clocks for every model including the main model and all of its sub models This allows the user to run every model simultaneously from the starting time Setting Time steps for Plume Particles and Display SATDI area shown in GW Version 5 0P main window Figure 3 1 provides interface to the user where he she can adjust the time steps for various parameters SADTI area is shown in Figure 11 2 The SATDI provides quick access to computational and display adjustments The time step DT 10 by default can be adjusted using the up down buttons next to the unit selection field in days 113 by default The Plume Step Particle Step and Visual Step in the bottom area of the SATDDI can be set in a similar fashion as a ratio of the DT Also within the SATDI area three time display fields These display fields show the time elapsed since the model flow began since the plume started and since the particles started The user can stop the flow simulations at any time by clicking on the Stop Pause Model button reset the time step and or particle step and or plume step and or visualization step After making these adjustments the user can resume simulation by clicking on the Run Model Forward button similarly after sto
151. ROPERTIES AREA In this area the user may choose to activate or deactivate visualization for various model features of these are active by default Clicking the button next to a feature opens the Draw window where represents the feature name in which the display can be further refined The window 1s discussed in the following subsection THE DRAW __ WINDOW An example of this window for the river feature is shown in Figure 16 5 In this window the user has the option of activating or deactivating visualization of the outline Draw Contour Line the area fill Area Filling and the title 162 Show Title for the feature at hand All three are active by default Associated with each is an area in which the user may further refine the display of these Draw River if Draw Contour Line lw Show Title Contour Line Properties Title Text Properties 1 ae Font Style Line Width 5 Pinels Line Style Solid W Area Filling T est Alignment Fill Properties Fil Color Sek 12 Fill 5tyle Solid f Bottom DK Cancel Figure 16 5 Drawing Window The height of the riverbank above river stage can be specified by entering the percentage in the appropriate field Dike is above River Stage the default value is 10 SCALE BAR The user may select whether to activate checked or deactivate unchecked the scale bars in the horizontal and v
152. RS This appendix explains certain IGW Version 5 0P internal software considerations that may be of interest to the user A Aquifer Type Parameter The aquifer type parameter specifies the aquifer status of a cell The software may assign one of nine classifications to each cell in a model They are listed in Table A I 1 Table A I 1 Classification Codes and Explanations for Aquifer Type Confined Confined or Unconfined Confined or Unconfined Confined or Unconfined transmissivity ConBnedorUntonSued not head dependent Unconfined never dry Unconfined Unconfined transmissivity not head Unconfined dependent Inactive None not currently utilized Unconfined locked Unconfined The display in the CAT will read Inactive if the cell state see Appendix is set to 1 meaning the cell is dry This will occur even if the aquifer type is 1 2 4 6 or 9 At this point in time IGW Version 4 7 assigns a code of 2 to each cell in the model The original impetus to assign separate codes to each cell stemmed from the desire for increased computational efficiency but given the processing speed of current computers this distinction no longer yields measurable efficiency increases 1 Cell State Parameter The cell state parameter specifies the hydraulic condition of a cell The software may assign one of four classifications to each cell in a model They are listed in Table A II 1 Table A II 1
153. Remove Attribute Export Attribute Select number of nearest points for Kriging Exploratory Analysis Regression ConstHead gt 152 Point s TopE gt 154 Zone 1002 9 Zone 1003 89 Zone 1004 89 Zone 1005 G Plines 1001 z Pline 1001 z Pline 1002 wels 1001 Well 1001 Well 1002 Well 1003 Well 1004 Select Kriging method BotE gt 154 Point s Cond gt 63 Points Edit semi variogram model Figure 20 12 Linear m Global regression Use all points Bilinear m Local regression Use nearest pointy C Quadratic Interpolation Simulation No Scatter Points for Kriging Kerpolation Interpolation Method Kriging Method Y Unconditional Simulation C All 200 nearest points C Within Range Within ft Conditional Simulation Kriging Type Fond oe Ordinary Direct inversion C Multiscale ZU Conjugate gradient C Hierarchical C LU Decomposition Variogram Model User specified Edit nfer from data Edit Kriging Prototype Variogram Covariance Kriging Analysis 22 The window shown in Figure 20 13 opens after the user selects the Infer from data Edit button By default the program attempts to automatically fit an exponential semi variogram model using least squares approximations The data and the least squares fit model are shown in the figure Variogram
154. SETTING PARTICLE ATTRIBUTES 10 2 1 RHP FOR A SINGLE PARTICLE 10 2 2 RHP FORA PARTICLE ZONE 102 102 102 103 104 105 106 106 107 iii 10 2 3 RHP FOR PARTICLES ALONG A POLYLINE 10 2 4 RHP FOR PARTICLES AROUND A WELL 10 3 PARTICLE TRACKING 10 3 1 FORWARD PARTICLE TRACKING 10 3 2 BACKWARD PARTICLE TRACKING 10 4 INITIALIZING PARTICLES 10 5 DELETING PARTICLES CHAPTER 11 SIMULATION TIME PARAMETERS 11 1 SIMULATION TIME PARAMETERS WINDOW 11 2 SETTING TIME STEPS FOR PLUME PARTICLES AND DISPLAY CHAPTER 12 GRID OPTIONS AND DISCRETIZING 12 1 DEFINING MODEL GRID AND DISCRETIZATION 12 2 DEFINING GEOLOGICAL AND COMPUTATIONAL LAYERS 12 2 1 ADDING GEOLOGICAL LAYERS IN THE MODEL 12 2 2 ADDING COMPUTATIONAL LAYERS IN GEOLOGICAL LAYERS 12 2 3 NAVIGATING BETWEEN MODEL LAYERS 12 3 ADVANCED DISCRETIZATION OPTIONS 12 4 SHALLOW DISCRETIZATION OF MODEL 12 5 DISPLAYING THE GRID CHAPTER 13 SOLVER ENGINE SETTINGS 13 1 FLOW LAYER 13 1 1 NUMERICAL SOLVING METHODS 13 1 2 ITERATION PARAMETERS 13 1 3 ADVANCED OPTIONS 13 2 PARTICLE TRACKING LAYER 13 2 1 TRACKING SCHEME 13 2 2 GRID SCHEME 13 2 3 PARTICLE DISPLAY OPTIONS 13 2 4 VELOCITY INTERPOLATION SCHEME 13 3 TRANSPORT LAYER 13 3 1 MODIFIED METHOD OF CHARACTERISTICS 13 3 2 MTS3D ADVECTION SOLVER 13 3 3 RANDOM WALK 13 3 4 DisPLAY MODE 13 3 5 DISPLAY OPTIONS 13 3 6 MATRIX SOLVER 13 3 7 ADVANCED OPTIONS 13 4 MT3D LAYER 13 5 STOCHAST
155. STANCE 218 20 3 3 1 Kriging Method 219 20 3 3 2 Unconditional Simulations 220 20 3 3 3 Conditional Simulation 221 20 4 VARIOGRAM MODELS 221 CHAPTER21 THREE DIMENSIONAL VISUALIZATION 226 21 1 DEMONSTRATION OF 3D SURFACES 226 21 1 1 PARAMETERS TO DISPLAY 226 21 1 2 DRAW OPTIONS 227 21 1 3 3D CHART CONTROL PROPERTIES 227 21 2 VISUALIZING MODEL AS 3D VOLUME 229 21 2 1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY OPTIONS 230 21 2 2 OPTIONS 230 21 2 2 1 General Aspects 230 21 2 2 2 Attributes 231 21 2 2 3 Fence Diagram 231 21 2 2 4 Cropping 233 21 2 2 5 Wells 235 21 2 2 6 Scatter Points 236 21 2 2 7 Volume 237 21 2 2 8 Surfaces 237 21 2 2 9 Vectors 238 21 2 2 10 Particles 238 21 2 2 11 Drape On Site Maps 239 21 2 2 12 Lights 239 21 2 2 13 Annotation Miscs 240 21 2 3 MANIPULATING GRAPHICS IN 3D 240 21 2 4 SAVING AND EXITING 242 CHAPTER 22 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM GIS INTERFACE __ 243 22 1 OPENING THE COUNTY BASED GIS IMPORTER 243 22 2 OPENING THE GIS IMPORTER 245 22 3 GIS MODEL IMPORTER ENVIRONMENT __ 246 Vil 22 4 IMPORTING GIS MAPPING SHAPEFILES __ 246 22 5 IMPORTING MODEL DATA SHAPEFILES __ 248 22 6 VIEWING THE SHAPEFILE DATA TABLE 249 22 7 VIEWING ATTRIBUTES OF A SINGLE POINT POLYLINE OR POLYGON 251 22 8 CHANGING THE APPEARANCE OF SHAPEFILES 252 22 9 ADDING A SINGLE GIS LAYER 255 22 10 REMOVING A SINGLE GIS LAYER 256 22 11 DELETING ALL GIS LAYERS 256 22 12 MOVING THE MAP WITHIN THE GIS WINDOW 257 22 13
156. Search window at the top of the Data Table window Viewing Attributes of a Single Point Polyline or Polygon It is possible to select and display the attributes for a single point polyline or polygon rather than for the entire shapefile regardless of whether the shapefile is a model data layer or mapping layer This is done by 1 Selecting the desired shapefile in the GIS Layer Explorer 2 Selecting the Identify button on the GIS Model Importer toolbar and 3 Selecting the desired single point polyline or polygon in GIS Viewing Window 251 GIS Model Importer z NHD Espanded8 shp Polygon Layers DP amp ugusta Expanded8 shp 20 Lakes Expandgd8 manual shp Lithology Layers Layers for Mapping Point Layers 4 Polyline Layers 4 Road f panded8 shp DP Polygon Lay M Raster La AN Identify button polygon Ed a E E Selected shapefile Attributes for selected lake polygon Figure 22 15 Selecting and Viewing Single Polygon Attributes The example shown in Figure 22 15 depicts the selection and viewing of the attributes for a single lake polygon The same can be accomplished for point and polyline shapefiles 22 8 Changing the Appearance of Shapefiles When shapefiles are imported using the GIS Model Importer their appearance is determine
157. TION SCHEME WINDOW Clicking the Interpolation Scheme box opens the Profile Model Solver window shown in Figure 16 3 In this window the user may specify the SOR Relaxation number 1 86 by default the Max Number of Iteration number 2000 by default and the Error number in meters 0 0001 m by default see Section 13 3 These parameters are explained in Section 13 1 1 and Section 13 1 2 SOR and Inner Iteration Matrix Solution Area subsections The profile model always uses SOR as the solver method Profile Model Solver Ed Solver Properties SOR Relaxation 1 86 Number of Iteration 2000 Error 0 0001 m Inter Black Interpolation Method f Inside Conceptual Layer Only f Bo restriction Mapping used vertical grid number LK Cancel Figure 16 3 Profile Model Solver 161 16 5 Setting Cross section Display Options Checking the box next to the Display This X Sect button activates the Options button this box will become unchecked whenever the associated cross section window is closed Clicking the button opens the Profile Model Display Options shown in Figure 16 4 It and allows the user to modify the cross section display The settings are discussed in the following subsections TOP BOUNDARY OF DISPLAY BOUNDING BOX In this area the user may choose to either specify Given Value 30 is the default entry or allow the software to auto
158. The colors for these variable transparency fill patterns are also defined by the color shown in the Fill Color box The following two figures Figure 22 18 and Figure 22 19 show the Change Symbols windows for polyline and point shapefile examples 253 symbol Display Options Fill Color Color r Circle Square Solid Line Transparent thickness in pixels Triangle Horizontal Cross TrueType Downward Diagonal Folyline Symbol f Solid line Dash line Dot line C Dash Dat line iw Visible in Iw C Dash Dot Dat line Cross Diagonal Cross Light Gray Fill Gray Fill Dark Fill Iv Show outline HE NE NE NE NE Show labels Apply Choose afield LENGTH Cancel Font Sampe dd Figure 22 18 Changing Symbol Display Polylines For the polyline example Figure 22 18 only the line type under Polyline Symbol the line weight Size and the Fill Color to define line color are active It is not possible to use the color box in the Outline feature as this option is inactive The line weight is defined in the Size box under the Fill Color selection box For the point symbol example Figure 22 19 only the symbol type the symbol size Size and the Fill Color to define fill color are active It is not possible to use the color box in the Outline feature as with the Polygon example Figure 22 17 The default outline colo
159. W Realization Mean Show Stats on CDF Mean Std Mean Std Master MastersSlaves 7 Hstaram Variation we Realization A Graphical Display Area B Statistical Parameter Area C Display Options Area Figure 18 13 Window for monitoring stochastic process at point locations monitoring wells The window in Figure 18 13 can be divided into three main areas as shown These areas are discussed below GRAPHICAL DISPLAY AREA Based on the display options selected in the Display Options area this area shows the selected process graphically The graphical representation is dynamically updated at the end of each realization Right anywhere in this area will open the 2D Char Control Properties window Figure 14 5 which is explained in Section 14 3 STATISTICAL PARAMETERS AREA For the parameter selected InK Head or Conc in the Display Options area the Statistical Parameters area displays the listed statistics for that parameter The name of the parameter is also displayed at the top of the area The statistics are updated dynamically at the end of each realization These statistical parameters in this area include max min mean median mode average error std deviation skewness and kurtosis These statistical parameters are defined in Appendix E II I except average error Avg Err and Kurtosis Ave Err is the average error or average difference between each value in a set and the mean Kurtosis is a measure
160. Well Filter Sampling density Al Available t Marrspecified eM ea x xcaffer pO Stream Order Filter if Tap elevation Polygon Layers Treat as prescribed or head dependent flus DEM l Sampling density All Available Bedrock top Lakes Options Bottom elevation Put all point layers into piore f Bedrock top single polygon prior to Wetlands Options f Bottom of well exporting to IGW Modeling Iv Static water level Environment Starting head Prescribed head Iw Recharge Treat as prescribed head Iv Hydraulic Condu Include Following as IGW Basemap Sampling density All Available id GIS modeling layers Place all points within selection polygon GIS selection polygon Scatter Point Filter Cancel Figure 22 49 Put All Point Layers Into a Single Polygon Feature Select OK to close the Extraction Criteria window The selected data and mapping features are exported to the IGW Modeling Environment Figure 22 50 215 Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untitled File Modeling GIS 3D Visualization Utilities Display Help Cell Attribute Viewer 3 a lt 2 3 ow m a E E 3 e t v c Plume Step 1 2DT Particle Step 1 2 DT
161. Window The Variogram Model portion of the window the large white area with the plot shows the current model shape with respect to the data Clicking the Parameter definition button in this area opens a window that graphically describes a number of parameters that are utilized in this window All of the parameters are fully described in the IGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual 307 Notice that in the lower left hand corner of the Variogram window the user has the option of selecting either Automatic optimization or Manual Trial and error By default Automatic optimization is selected and most parameters are determined automatically by the software Even so the user may still define whether the model is Isotropic the default or Anisotropic in the Experimental Variogram area and whether to employ a Spherical Exponential the default or Gaussian model type in the Model Functions area in the Theoretical Model area Also by default Nugget is not clicked in the Theoretical Model Parameters area The user can manually adjust the nugget value or choose to check the box and set it to be determined automatically After any of these settings have been adjusted the user should click the Preview button to update the Variogram Model display If the user selects Manual Trial and error all of the other model parameters in addit
162. Zone Budget checkbox should be selected before activating the plume mass balance Refer to Section 7 6 2 4 for further details D II Well Monitoring Plots There are two main plots that are available with respect to wells The first is the Time Process window It displays temporal head or concentration data and is discussed in Section D II I The second is the Probability window It is available when stochastic modeling is enabled and is discussed in Section Error Reference source not found D IIl I The Time Process for Wells The Time Process window is shown in its initial state in Figure D III I 1 It is opened by double clicking on a Time Process entry in the TPS An entry will only appear after a well has been set to Monitoring Head and Concentration in the Attributes Explorer Section 9 4 2 and Error Reference source not found 299 Head Iw Realization blean 5td T Concentration Mean Mean Std Figure D III I 1 Head Hydrograph at Initial State There are two display options for the plot in this window chosen at the bottom left hand corner of the window 1 Head or 2 Concentration If Head is chosen the plot area will show a Head Hydrograph curve in which the head in the well is plotted on the y axis and time is plotted on the x axis An example is shown in Figure D III I 2 If Concentration is chosen the plot area will show a Concentration Breakthrough curve in which contaminant concentration i
163. a basemap in the Working Area see Section 3 13 by opening the Model Scale and Basemap window This process is discussed further in Chapter 5 k Reset Toolbar 2 1 Clicking this button resets the cursor from any previous state such as help mode or draw mode The cursor is initialized to select new buttons or perform other functions p Create Zone Assign Properties 2 2 Clicking this button allows the user to define a zone polygon within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within the Working Area to define points that denote the outline of the zone The zone creation process and other zone implementation information is discussed further in Chapter 7 18 El Create Polyline Assign Properties 2 3 Clicking this button allows the user to define a polyline a series of line segments within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within the Working Area to define points that correspond to the line segment endpoints The polyline creation process and other polyline implementation information is discussed further in Chapter 8 Add Well 2 4 Clicking this button allows the user to define a well point within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor 1s set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within the Worki
164. a can be plotted simultaneously except CV Realization Also once CV Realization box is checked no other curve can be seen except that of the CV Realization in the Graphical Display area The plots of Mean Realization Std Realization and CV Realization are useful in determining whether or not enough of realizations have been generated to have statistically more meaningful modeling results This aspect is discussed further in Section 18 7 Figure 18 21 shows different plots for Solute flux across a polyline Please note the selection of check boxes in Display Options area and relate them to the curves on the plots Model 1 Probability at Pline 1003 Model 1 Probability at Pline 1003 Solute Flux Solute Flux Total Solute Flux Process CVv Total Solute Flux Process 18 6 Total Solute Flux Coef of Variation 0 20 40 60 80 100 Realizations 120 140 Max Min 77 3026 sus Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C Seepage Show Stats on Master Solute PDF C Master Slaves 1452 24 b day Median 295 593 6 9 Mode 288 228 b day MMC MELIA NEN FOOT Process Curve Choice V Realization V Mean Std 80 100 Realizations Select a Parameter to Visualize Process C Seepage Show Stats on Master Solute PDF C Master Slaves Eup Change Probability Resolution _ Save Figure 18 21 120 140 MV
165. aceholder for individual particle group entries These entries titled ParticlePoints ParticleLines ParticleWells and ParticleZones on the Feature Particle Group level are discussed in Section 10 2 4 1 2 8 Cross Sections RHP for cross sections are explained in Section 16 4 4 1 3 Time Process Selector TPS The bottom left portion of the AE window is called the Time Process Selector or TPS The TPS allows the user to open a separate window for any previously defined time process mass balance mass flux well head and concentration etc and view the results as the model solution proceeds If no time processes are defined the TPS appears blank in the AE window Following monitoring processes can be defined in the RHP of the AE window e Inside Zones Mass balance for water and solute s 43 e At monitoring wells Solute concentrations and heads e Across Polylines Mass fluxes for water and solute s currently only functional for stochastic realizations In case of stochastic modeling probability distributions for realizations can also be monitored for each of the above mention time processes The display can show every single realization superimposed on the mean of all previous Monte Carlo simulations The software also calculates probability distribution and other statistical parameters and the user can choose to display these in an interactive manner More of this is explained in stochastic modeling
166. ally excluded The red line shows the 1 to 1 relationship 1 1 The Histogram Layer The Histogram layer shows a histogram that displays the total number data with a specific value over the entire value range E I Ill The PDF Layer The PDF layer shows the PDF for the specific variable The PDF shows the probability of encountering a datum in the set with a value in a specific range E I IV The CDF Layer The CDF layer shows the CDF for the specific variable The CDF shows the probability of encountering a datum in the set with a value that 1s less than or equal to a given value The Statistics Pane SP The SP can be seen in Figure E I 1 The top field of the SP is labeled Total Scatter Points and lists exactly how many data scatter points are defined in the model At the bottom of the SP there are 2 buttons Draw and Close Window The Draw button allows the user to update the display of the PP graphs to reflect any changes made in the Graph Parameters area see Appendix E II I The Close Window button closes the Data Analysis window The Statistics and Graph Parameters areas are discussed in the following subsections E I I The Statistics Area There are a number of parameters listed in the Statistics area A brief definition of the parameters is presented below e MAXIMUM The greatest value encountered in the data set e MINIMUM The smallest value encountered in the data set 304 e MEAN The arithmetic mean o
167. also double click to finalize drawing a polyline 3 9 Attributes Explorer Button Clicking this button opens the Attributes Explore AE Window Attrib Expl AE is explained in detail in Chapter 4 _ Attributes Explorer 3 10 Layer Selector The Layer Selector is another user interface to navigate though model layers It also displays currently selected geological and computational layers in the top two boxes The user can type in a desired computational and or geological layer number in the fields provided at the top to switch between layers The horizontal colored bars are graphical representation of geological or conceptual layers in the model To the left of colored bars is a sliding button Each tick mark along the sliding ruler represents 4441 a computation layer The user can move to sliding button to move between the layers Also see Section 12 2 3 11 Grid Based Operations Button Clicking this button opens the Grid Based Operations window Grid Grid Based Operation Based Operations are explained in Chapter 17 3 12 Cursor Activated Table CAT Cell Attribute Viewer 3275 01 A The major portion of the right hand side of the main window is occupied by what is known as the Cursor Activated Table CAT The CAT displays the variable values in the model at any point where the cursor is located for the current time step graphic on right The left hand side lists the name of the variable
168. alue Options Maximum Value Options 8 22 005 NNNM 4 70 ANN f Given value f Given value 32 808 4 7403 oon L ancel Figure 19 7 Display Options for Hydraulic Head At the top of the window the user may choose to activate or deactivate visualization for contour color fill Zoned Color filled the contour lines Contoured Line and the legend Show Legend Note that Plot in log scale is not an active option at this time When any parameter is visualized as Zoned color filled the contour associated with the lowest value range is set to be transparent This prevents the entire basemap from being blocked out when these parameters are visualized The user may further refine the contour line display by clicking the Color button or clicking on the color patch to open the Color window and subsequently select the desired color and by setting the line thickness in pixels in the Thickness field The number of contour levels can be specified in the Contour Levels field In the Minimum Value Options and Maximum Value Options areas the user may specify the extreme values through which the data should be visualized Selecting Data Limit default setting allows the software to automatically determine the value which is displayed in the associated field Selecting Given Value allows the user to specify the value in the appropriate
169. ameters has stabilized The user can change the x axis display in the Graphical Display area Sections 18 5 2 2 and 18 5 2 3 to log scale using the 2D Chart Control Options Section 14 3 Comparison between Figure 18 27 and Figure 18 28 illustrates this point Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Process 76 8347 7 38732 ppm 18 6249 12 1174 0 38418 AveEn 15 1577 ppm Concentration 100 18 1087 Realizations Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Curve Choice ls Ik C Head Conc PDF M Realization Mean E TEE CDF Mean Std Mean Std Master Master Slaves Hstgram Variation w Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Std Figure 18 28 master Slave Process and its Mean with number of realizations on log scale Skewnesd 0 90514 Hasen 200 With larger number of realization the distribution patterns of various stochastic processes become more discernable Figure 18 29 and Figure 18 30 show the PDFs for observed heads at a monitoring well location One can see that using only one Master machine cannot create a very clear distribution pattern as compared to parallel computing operations Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 EN Head POF 0 00523 Std 0 00656 Skewness U 2750 Select a Parameter to Visualize es Process Eure IEhalce v Head C Cone POF Realization Mean Show Stats on Mean Std Mean Std Mas
170. and Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags When no feature is selected the Refresh Display Refresh Options Show 3D Volume Discretization Table Display Options Grid Based Operation and Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags entries are available Show 3D volume Selecting Refresh causes the software to update the Working Area and all windows to reflect any recent changes see Section 19 7 Discretization Table Grid Based Operation Selecting Display Options opens the Main Model Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags Draw Option window see Section 19 1 Selecting Show 3D Volume opens the model in a new window with a three dimensional editable format More information on this feature is found in Chapter 21 Selecting Discretization Table opens Discretization Table window More information on this feature is found in Section 12 4 Selecting Grid Based Operation opens this feature in which the user has several options for model manipulation More detailed explanation of this feature is found in Chapter 17 Selecting Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags allows the user to see the values of the variables in the right hand pane as the cursor is moved over them in an active model When a feature 1s selected the other entries also become available see graphic below Note Paste Delete Remove Show 3D Surface and Export Data
171. and as a function of time In the Pattern Properties area the user may set the width in the Width field the default is 4 as pixels choose the pattern type in the Pattern Choices area the default is Cross select the density of the pattern display in the Density area the default is 3 times of Grids and or select the pattern color by clicking on the sample color swatch to open the Color window in which the user subsequently selects the desired color 19 3 2 Implementing Text into the Working Area Text fields may be placed in the Working Area through use of the Add Text button User can click on the Add Text button and then click once anywhere inside the T Working Area to create a fext field at that point User can click at more than one locations to create as many text fields in the model After creating a text field nothing shows up in the Working Area however all the text fields created by mouse clicks apprear in the LHP of AE The user can add edit text by selecting a text field in the LHP see Section 4 1 1 Doing this brings up the Text RHP see Section 4 1 2 A sample of the RHP for Text 1001 1s shown in Figure 19 6 Text 1001 Font Style Figure 19 6 RHP for Assigning Text in Working Area The user may enter edit the desired text in the text box showing in the RHP Font style may be adjusted by clicking the Font Style button to open t
172. any desired randomness in the n field The default value set in the Default Attribute window see Chapter 6 is 0 3 The default entry for a model polygon 0 0e0 The porosity is dimensionless LOCAL DISPERSION Dispersivity is a measure of generalized variance in flow direction due to mechanical dispersion mixing within the soil matrix It is defined as a unit of length Selecting the box next to Local Dispersivity allows the user to specify the longitudinal Long transverse Trans and vertical Vert dispersivity values The default value and entry for each is 0 0e0 The default unit is feet ft with centimeters cm meters m and inches inch also available MACRODISPERSION Dispersion occurring at the field scale is called macrodispersion SOIL PARTICLE DENSITY The soil particle density is a measure of the density of the individual soil particles It is used along with the effective porosity to determine the bulk density p 1 n p 7 6 1 1 3 The default value entry is 2 65x 10 g m as defined in the Layer window 12 Refer to Section 13 2 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for additional information 61 7 6 1 2 Biochemical Properties This layer is where chemical properties for the zone are defined It is shown in Figure 7 6 zone 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point ue m Partitioning Kd fpem C Bam First Order Decay Decay Coef
173. arameter The functionality of this window is explained in Section 19 4 1 Move down and Move up buttons on this window are not active in IGW Version 5 0P The selected parameters are displayed in layers The sequence order of layers is the same as it appears in the window e g Mean Velocity is always displayed at the top followed by Capture Zone and so on If some representations are hidden beneath another the user can deselect the top layers to see the bottom ones After the user is finished with the selection of parameters in MCS Means amp Variances window the user can click OK and then OK again in the Display Options window for main model 186 Display Options Mean Head Zoned Color filled Show Legend i Contoured Line T Anchor East Color ANI Orientation Vertical Thickness pixels R EX Continuous Line Style Solid Contour Color Levels E Plot in log scale gt Minimum Value Options r Masimum Value Options f Data Limit Y Data Limit Given Value of Given Value a nu Ea P De ME er F ed LES ed ul lds r oF Yi Figure 18 10 Display Options for spatial parameters The user can start the model simulations after the display settings are done As soon as the first realization is complete the model d
174. as the Geometrical Information Area GIA a check box Perform Mass Balance and a button Interpolation Model Figure 7 16 These features are discussed in the following subsections one ColorPattern Tas M Zone Visible f Active Transparent acre z mactiye olor Area PUE Points For Display Zune Budget Width Domain Control Show Interpolation Model Figure 7 16 Visualization Domain Control Area 7 6 2 1 Zone Type The Zone Type offers the user 3 selections for implementing the zone in the software e Active e Inactive and e For Display 73 The default setting is Active This setting includes the zone in software model calculations Selecting Inactive sets the zone as inactive in the Working Area Its transimissivity is set to zero in software calculations Active model cells are defined based on the model boundaries Cells within that boundary are called active cells while the outer cells are inactive cells Model boundary Active model domain Cells of the Working Area that are not associated with a zone are termed Inactive Cells The software internally assigns these a transmissivity value of zero Selecting For Display sets the zone as a drawing tool only though the area encompassed by the zone retains its previous attributes 7 6 2 2 Zone Color Pattern The Zone Color Pattern area offers the user options for visualization The user can select a pattern fro
175. ased computer memory usage However the MMOC has an inherent problem known as numerical dispersion This is due the interpolation portion of the scheme 2 step in the algorithm above and this tends to cause the modeled plume to disperse faster than it would in the real world 13 3 2 MT3D Advection Solver The MT3D Advection Solver Figure 13 5 gives the user several options for particle tracking based on the groundwater modeling program MT3D a three dimensional mass transport simulation interface For further information on this program and features associated with this layer please refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual MI 3D Solver MTAL Solver Particle tracking method Particle tracking method f 1th order Euler f 1th order Euler t dth order Rounge Kutta f 4th order Rounge Kutta f Mixed f Mixed particles 20000 Sink cell particles 1 Number of planes Humber of planes 0 Particle per cell lt cone gradient i a Particle per cell it gt conc gr une 32 Conc gradient threshold 0 00001 Min particles cell 4 particles 164 Conc gradient threshold 0 00001 OF Cancel Figure 13 5 Solver 129 13 3 3 Random Walk The Random Walk transport solver method calculates the concentration for a given cell as a proportion to the number of particles present within it The following algorithm approximates the entire process 1 A number of particl
176. asemap information and start from scratch or the Cancel button to cancel the entire basemap importing process The user may change the assigned dimensions for the basemap see Section 5 2 3 The user may also click the OK button to accept the basemap configuration and end the process Clicking the OK button sets the changes in the software closes the window and updates the Working Area to show the desired basemap 5 2 2 Vector Type Images Clicking the Open button in the Open window after selecting the desired vector type file brings the user to the Model Scale and Basemap window with the desired picture in the preview pane the file specified coordinate and scale values entered and additional information concerning the file location and other attributes displayed to the left of the preview pane Model Scale and Basemap Basemap Information File name D acuments and Settings sSdministratarD esktaps1 1 21 06 Width 137277 5337 30582 Height 11703 32088352 Ratio Height width D 543432802532 791 Please register the following Real World Coordinates vojasrra2ft XLength as2nigft Y Lenath 3 83986 OF Cancel Figure 5 4 Loading a Shape File Vector Type Image The user now has a couple of options to continue They may click the Load Basemap button to combine another picture with the current one see Section 5 3 The user may click
177. at a time Figure 18 13 shows the process for concentration PDF CDF and Histogram for concentration are shown in Figure 18 15 Also note that when PDF CDF or Hstgram is selected the Process Curve Choice and Variation w Realization areas become inactive The button allows the user to save the data generated in all the realizations for InK Head and Conc The data is saved in a dat file format The format is explained in Section 23 6 1 190 Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Concentration PDF Max ppm Mean Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Concentration CDF Mas Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 1 00 2 00 300 4 00 Concentration Concentration 3 0 6 M Concentration Histogram Max E Select a Parameter to Visualize g 0 04 Mean pem C Ink Head Cone PDF 0 2 EN ELS 0 03 Show Stats on C CDF n Sb 2 Median v Master Master Sl 8 Master astertslaves Hstgram 1 00 200 3 00 4 00 E 0 02 Moda 4266 pem Concentration Change Probability Resolution Save Me o Std eee elo to Visualize 100 200 300 400 MK C Head 6 Cone e Concentration Skewness Show Stats on i Master MastersSlaves 7 Hstgram Change Probability Resolution Save Mean
178. ata points it is best to either specify the number of points to use nearest points use all points within the semi variogram range Within Range or all points within a certain radial distance Within ft It is recommended that the user experiment with variogram parameters and observe their impact on the interpolated attribute surface 224 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Tree lt lt Project Model amp Layer 1 Exploratory Analysis Remove Attribute Outlier Analysis Zones 1001 Zone 1001 Show Attributes Export Attribute 7 Use Log Scale Main Model gt T opE gt 154 pts BotE gt 154 Cond gt 63 Point s Regression ConstHead gt 152 Point s i yi TopE gt 154 Point s Global regression Use all points Biquadratic C Bilinear P Zone 1002 Local regression Use nearest points C _ More p Zone 1003 Quadratic 1 p Zone 1004 Zone 1005 d EE hab Interpolation Simulation No Scatter Points for Kriging Interpolation amp Pline 1001 Interpolation Method 1 amp Pine 1002 iacit C AI 200 nearest points Click Apply Wells 1001 Method E C Within Range Within ithin Well 1001 DNUS when done Well 1002 C Unconditional Simulation we bon Conditional Simulation Kriging Type Kriging Solver e Ordinary Direct inversion Mul
179. ation Show Stats on C CDF Mean Std C Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save m Mearilv Mean Std Mean Realization C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux Histogram Probability 8 8 2 8 8 2 00 0 00 Total Seepage Flux Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage C Solute C PDF Realization Show Stats on C CDF Mean Std Master Master Slaves Seepage Flux 40507 ada Mean 0 2451 3 Median 0 2859 3 Mode 279277 pode aes PZ area sue Skewnesd 2501 3 Kurtosis 2 5904 fn 3 day Mean Mean Std Mean Realization Std Realization CV Realization Seepage Flux CDF 2 00 0 00 Total Seepage Flux Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage Solute PDF Realization Show Stats on CDF Mean Std Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux Process CV Realizations 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 Total Seepage Flux Coef of Variation Seepage Flux Max 0 020 fr 37das Min fda Mean m 3 day Median m 37dey Mode 37da Ave Err n a dey IN Skenen Kurtosis 20 3day Mean Mean Std Mean Realization C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Seepage Flux Max 2
180. ation Model button changes the view of the LHP to show the scatter point parameters that are being interpolated and the number of points in each set The button title changes to Scatter Point Attribute when viewing the alternate LHP The functionality of scatter points is discussed in Section 7 7 7 6 2 6 Zone and Scatter Point Visibility Checking the box next to Zone Visible allows the zone displayed in the AE to be visible in the model Un checking this box will hide this layer from view In the same manner checking the box next to Scatter Points Visible allows the user specified scatter points to appear in the Working Area 7 6 2 7 Domain Control By default the model will run for the domain of every polygon drawn in the Working Area After drawing a single model zone if the user combines this with another polygon then IGW will solve the model for all of the existing polygons Figure 7 17 Figure 7 17 Examples on active model area concept 75 By default IGW assigns no flow conditions to the boundary of any polygons created in Working Area If the user assigns one or more polygons as domain control then IGW will solve the model for ONLY those polygons One can assign a domain control by e Selecting a polygon in the Attributes Explorer LHP or in the Working Area and then e Checking the Domain Control box In Figure 7 18 model is solved for two polygons which are defined as domain control 1 1004
181. att oper o ev 72 Calibration dios E 73 Visualization Domain Control Area esses do Examples on active model area 75 Figure 7 18 Assigning Domain 76 Figure 7 19 Selecting Watershed Boundary as Domain Control 76 Figure 20 Scatter Points in the Working Area eor o e ient ete er eaaet unas 78 Fisure 7 21 RHP for Scatter inis neon e E Re ook nna eee nee capu a aM etus 79 Figure 7 22 sample file for scatter 1 80 Figure 7 23 Scatter point file in spreadsheet 80 Figure 7 24 Alternate LHP and RHP for Scatter 1 82 Figure 7 25 Exploratory Data Analysis 1 84 Figure 7 26 Outlier Analysis window cccccccsesccccseseeeeeeceeeeeceseeeccaeesceeeeeeeenseneeeas 84 Figure 7 27 Attributes Explorer Regression 85 Figure 7 28 Reeres on Pardmeltets e eta Ces tanh ise eee 85 Fieure 7 29 Variograim Model Parameters 86 Figure 7 30 Variogram modeling window eese nennen 87 Figure 8 1 An Example Polyline in the Working 89 RAP fOr POL Hle een eo nee cane ease eae
182. atterplot Tolerance 50 m Draw Close Window V ariable T ail Figure 7 25 Exploratory Data Analysis window Clicking the Show Attributes button will revert the alternate LHP and RHP view to the normal view Clicking the Remove Attributes button will remove the selected attributes from all points in the zone Export Attributes button 1s not active in IGW Version 5 0P Clicking the Outlier Analysis button will open the Outlier Analysis window as shown in Figure 7 26 In this window the user can choose the number of standard deviations from mean value a given data value should be taken as outlier The user can also chose with a check box whether or not the outliers be global or based on deviation from the local trend After choosing the number of standard deviations the user can click on Detect Outliers button All the detected outliers will show in the widow at the left In order to remove the detected outliers from the scatter point data set click the Remove Outliers button Outlier Analysis Mean 278 14 Outlier Identification Method Standard Deviation 4 62 ali Std Dev Index Name X Y fs 1 POOO005 556748 99 212778 92 2 000006 556733 38 212715 97 p 3 000014 557043 85 211943 02 4 000023 557435 96 211085 85 Detrend Remove Outliers Cancel NM OK Figure 7 26 Outlier Analysis window has five buttons and a check box for They are titled
183. ayers 4 dM P watershed_AugCk shp 1 Raster Layers E wetlands Expandeda8 shp cJ My Documents 9 My Computer a File name Network Files of type Shapefiles shp cel Imported road i Open as eadeni Open Roads 2 polyline d 4E shapefile 1 n ao n iar shapefile t LOS H c i Sp Mapping layer of A 71 d E roads imported A LLLI from the roads T i polyline shapefile i E Figure 22 8 Opening GIS Shapefiles as Mapping Layers Polylines 247 22 5 Importing Model Data Shapefiles In order to import the GIS model data layers the Import Model Data Layer button on the GIS Model Importer toolbar Figure 22 9 is selected GIS Model Importer OB A E 2 GIS Layer Explorer Fa for Modeling Point Layers Polyline Layers MM NHD_Expanded8 shp Polygon Layers MP Lakes Expanded8 manual shr 9 aAugusta E spanded8 shp Lithology Layers for Mapping Point Layers Expanded8 shp Polyline Layers 1 Roads Expanded8 shp Polygon Layers Raster Layers Import Model Data Layer Figure 22 9 importing Model Data Layer The GIS model data layer shapefile to be imported is selected and opened in a second window using the left mouse Figure 22 10 The imported shapefile appears within the GIS Importer Window and also appears automatically within the appropr
184. be changed to head dependent specified flux or a prescribed head boundary The lookup table for setting leakance values for the surface area of a lake is shown in Figure 22 45 The rationale for subdividing lake polygons on the basis of size is that relatively small surface water bodies may be perched above the regional water table and the bottom sediments may have a low hydraulic conductivity relative to much larger lakes At this level the user may specify the leakance value for all lake polygons on the basis of the area of the polygon or treat them all the same As always at any time during the modeling process the user may change the value for any lake polygon independent of all other lake polygons in the model The table is formatted so the user may divide the lake polygons on the basis of either relative area percentile or actual area For relative size 10 represents the polygons whose area exceeds 10 271 or less of all of the lake polygons in the model these are the smallest polygons Conversely 100 represents the polygons with the largest area The leakance values for these different percentiles are placed in the middle column The user has the option of specifying a different leakance value for each percentile or area or using the same value for all polygon sizes The user also has the option of using different head dependent flux equations Two Way or One Way for different size of polygons or using the same equation for all
185. by the layer name in the model such as Layer 1 The next entry is a keyword Zone followed by the zone name such as Sample zone The next entry is a keyword Attribute followed by the numeric entry for the maximum number of attributes that will be attached to a point in the zone The third line contains a list of keywords Based on the keyword in this line IGW will assign the corresponding attributes to the scatter points The key words in the file stand for Well Scatter point name or ID text entry X X coordinate m of point location Y Y coordinate m of point location Cond Hydraulic conductivity value m day at the point TopE Aquifer top elevation m at the point BotE Aquifer bottom elevation m at the point ConstHead Starting head value m at the point CalibHead Calibration head value m at the point CalibConc Calibration concentration value ppm at the point Please note the units associated with each of the above keywords The values in the file must be in these units Key words are part of IGW code therefore the user cannot change them A miss spelled keyword will cause problem in reading file by IGW From fourth line onwards the data should be entered corresponding to the keywords in third line Data for Well X and Y is mandatory for every point Other entries are optional For more clarity the csv file shown in a text editor in Figure 7 22 is also shown in a spreadsheet vie
186. c ap General Attributes Cropping Seatter Paints Enlarge Factor Show Grid as Wireframe A Als 1 C Dont show grid Y Axis i C Show grid for inside part Z Axis 0 f Show grid for outside cut away part f Show all inside outside Reverse Display Domain Surface Smooth Figure 21 6 visualization Options 230 21 2 2 2 Attributes This tab offers several options for the three dimensional volume model In particular the user can choose to show or hide the conductivity head and or concentration attributes along with dry areas This option is also given to map the model to an isosurface Minimum and maximum value options are given for the model if the user wishes to place boundaries on the limits of their simulation Several style feature options are also given in this tab Figure 21 7 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs Drape on Site Volume Surfaces Vectors Particles M ap iw Show attribute Available Attributes Min Value Option Max Value Option Data limit Data limit Head 5 68455 m day 522 395 m day v Concentration IESUS Given value Iw Show dry area der des Percent of Max Percent of 00 MN MN Mapped to isasurface Style fe r Show as flooded color f Show as contour Reverse display color lw Plot in Log scale 56167 gen Show legend a Apply filtering show as isosurace Customized v Boundary defag E
187. cable to this section RECHARGE CONCENTRATION Checking the box next to this feature allows a stated level of contamination to be injected into the model at a given layer This feature can be used to simulate contaminant transport in flow regimes within a model 67 7 6 1 4 3 Head Dependent Flux This layer is where the water body and contamination characteristics for the zone are defined Figure 7 12 This layer has the following four areas Head Dependent Flux Two Way Head Dependent Flux One Way Evapotranspiration General Head Dependent Flux Each of these areas 1s explained below Zone 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point Prescribed Head Cone Prescribed Flux Head D ependent Flux Two way Head Dependent Flux One way on Lake Leakance fida Stage f Elevation 0 0e0 EN Transient e Same as Top Elevation E Concentration pom Evapotranspiration D MaxET nch ves Bottom Elevation Depth jJ Constant 38 425 EN SUE f Same as Surface Elevation General Head Dependent Flus Leakance ja Concentration pem Constant 5 lee Sediment Properties Source Head EM Figure 7 12 Head Dependent Flux HEAD DEPENDENT FLUX TWO WAY AREA Two way flux allows for water to infiltrate into and or escape from the system accounting for such processes as baseflow fluxes between the aquifer and a water body and effects
188. can be changed if the box is checked The default unit of measure 1s feet ft with meters m centimeters cm and inches in also available 7 6 1 4 2 Prescribed Flux This layer 1s where the water body and contamination characteristics for the zone are defined Figure 7 11 one 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point E Frescribed Head Cone Head Dependent Flux Recharge inch pea E Recharge Concentration E Figure 7 11 Prescribed Flux RECHARGE Checking the box next to Recharge defines the zone as one having a constant level of recharge The user can subsequently enter the desired value in the appropriate field default entry is 0 0e0 and select the desired unit m day is default cm day cm year ft year and inch year are also available RANDOM BUTTON Checking the box next to Random allows the user to assign arbitrary random values for a given parameter in their model The user can apply this feature only to recharge in the Prescribed Flux region TRANSIENT BUTTON Checking the box next to the Transient button sets the zone as one having a transient level of recharge The user may edit the transient recharge settings by clicking the activated Transient button and therefore opening the Transient Settings window Please refer to Appendix C I for a discussion of this window Note that the default values discussed in the appendix are different than those appli
189. cessed form of the USGS 100K NHD river shapefiles These contain the stream order estimated river stage from 30m DEM estimated hydraulic gradient from 30m DEM and USGS baseflow estimates that were derived as part of the GWIM project The user may select the Options lookup table for Streams or Drains Figure 22 41 to vary the riverbed or drain leakance on the basis of stream order This will determine how the stream or drain segments are to be modeled river bottom and drain bottom elevation Figure 22 42 At this level the user may specify the leakance value for all stream segments on the basis of stream order number At any time during the modeling process the modeler may change the value for any stream segment independent of all other stream segments in the model The larger the stream order number the farther downstream the polyline A user may make the assumption that the 268 width of the stream is greater and the streambed leakance should be greater It is also possible to determine how the exchange of water between the polyline and the adjoining aquifer is calculated The user may treat each stream segment by order as a river two way or drain one way but not both The difference is that specifying the polyline as a river allows water to move back and forth between the polyline and the aquifer With a drain specification water may only move from the aquifer to the polyline i e a drain can obviously not be a
190. cessed by clicking the button in IGW main window or choosing Grid Based Operation from the Utilities menu or by right clicking anywhere in the working area and selecting Grid Based Operations from the popup menu Grid Based Operation Single Array Operation Two Array Operation See Conductivity Concentration Array Ble 1 AxArrayi Clear i Array 11915 Effective Porosity A BxArray2 Specific Storage Clear Delete Specific Yield Head Array Operation Longitudinal Dispersivity Transverse Dispersivity Copy to Calibration Head Vertical Dispersivity Anisotropy Factor E Make Prescribed Head Anisotropy Factor 2 C __Meke Prescribed Head Anisotropy Orientation lt 0 0e0 Superimpose Theis Anisotropy Orientation lt Drawdown River Stage ll River Leakance River Bottom Drain Leakance Array3 ll s DSTARYY _Clear_ DSTARZZ Array Calculator DStar Orientation v Apply Create Drawdown Model Apply to inactive cells Cancel OK O Single Array Operation area P Head Array Operation area Q Array Calculator and Create Drawdown Model buttons R Attributes Array List S Two Array Operation area Figure 17 2 Grid Based Operation Window 167 17 1 Attribute Array List In the middle of the Grid Based Operation window the attribute arrays of the model are listed These attrib
191. ciated presentations Downloading verification papers Obtaining software documentation Downloading the software Providing feedback Accessing the IGW Forum Contacting Dr Li and his associates and Acknowledgements and team members Chapter 2 GETTING STARTED This brief chapter outlines the recommended steps to obtain and begin using IGW Version 5 0 2 1 Obtaining the Software As mentioned in Section 1 3 the software can be obtained from the IGW homepage The specific link for IGW Version 5 0P 1s http www egr msu edu igw At this point the three dimensional Version 5 0P is not available on the web Notice that the files have the zip extension This is because the files are in zipped format to reduce the downloading size and protect the file integrity during transmission Windows ME and above have built in zip capability and will have no problem extracting the program files embedded However users of other versions will need decompression software that supports zip files It is recommended to use the version 8 1 or higher of the WinZip archive utility A fully functional evaluation version is available on the Internet at http www winzip com downauto cgi winzip8 exe For more information concerning downloading installing or using WinZip please consult the WinZip homepage at http www winzip com If any trouble is encountered attempting to obtain the software please use the links on
192. ciated with the selected well lowest on the list Gn the window becomes the active feature Adding particles around wells and then performing backward particle tracking 1s a very useful way to delineate well capture zones 10 2 Setting Particle Attributes Particle feature attributes are set in the AE see Section 4 1 2 under the heading Particle Groups After accessing the AE the first step is to expand if it 15 not already the desired particle feature subgroup under the ParticlesGroup placeholder in the LHP see Section 4 1 1 There are four subgroups one for each type of particle feature The RHP see Section 4 1 2 is the same for each entry within these subgroups and these are discussed in the following subsections While for advection linear average groundwater velocity changing the number of particles does not affect the simulation results if the user assigns dispersion to the groundwater model then it is recommended to increase the number of particles in order to capture the variability of groundwater velocity It is also recommended to use smaller time steps in order to get more representative results The user can ONLY delete all of the particles after discretizing the model using ER Delete All Particles button 10 2 1 RHP for a Single Particle A sample of the RHP for a single particle is shown in Figure 10 7 The user has the option of displaying the particle at a single location at each point in time Sh
193. cking at the button opens the MCS Means amp Variances window as shown in Figure 18 9 The specific parameters that are available in this window are set in part based on the selections made in the Select Model Parameters area on the Stochastic Model layer on the Solver Engine window see Chapter 13 A check mark indicates that visualization is activated for that specific parameter The user may select or deselect these as desired By default Mean Velocity Capture Zone GIS Mapping Layers Mean Concentration and Mean Head are active 185 MCS Means amp Variances Drawing Position EY Draw in Mew Window M aster Global Master Machine Global v Mean Velocity Capture one Undelectall W GIS Mapping Layers v Mean Concentration Head v Mean Conductivity v Concentration Vanance Head Vanance Variance Vx Valance Lancel Vu Varance Ve Valance Figure 18 9 Visualizing Variance and Other Model Parameters Results In the Drawing Position area the user currently may only choose to display these parameters in a new window Draw in New Window the default By single clicking on any of the parameters in the MCS Means amp Variances window the parameter will be highlighted Clicking on the Edit button to the left will open the Display Options window for that parameter as shown in Figure 18 10 This window allows the user to select the display configuration for the selected p
194. cking on aa button allows the user to define random distribution properties of source concentration for both instantaneous and continous sources This buttons opens the Concentration Distribution Model window Figure 7 10 where user can define the Gaussian properties of the source The default setting in this window is Constant Concentration Distribution Model C Gaussian 1 SigmavYO 1 Orientation 10 0 0 dearee 0 0 0e0 Yo 0 0e0 TO 0 0e0 OK Cancel Figure 7 10 Concentration Distribution Model window A concentration plume will appear in the zone after the model is discretized see Chapter 12 The solver settings for contaminant plumes are presented in Section 13 3 Other Contaminant Soil button is not active in IGW Version 5 0P STARTING HEAD P Refer to Section 14 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example of defining a zone as a concentration source 66 Checking this box allows the user to edit the initial head value that the software will use in its solution calculations If the box is not checked either here or in the Layer window then the software will assign the starting head to be 1 Constant head equal to the specified head of the feature where a prescribed head feature 1s defined or 2 The top elevation of the aquifer where no prescribed head feature is defined The default entry in the field is 32 808 this value becomes active and
195. clocks Every time the model is run the solution is based on the current settings In other words the present state of the model velocity vectors heads etc is the initial condition for the next solution 133 14 2 Zone Budget In order to activate the Zone Budget option for a zone defined by a polygon in the model the user should select that zone in AE and check the Zone Budget box located in the bottom of RHP Figure 14 1 Any existing polygon can be used for zone budget or user can create polygons in models exclusively for zone budget Any number of zones can be selected for zone budget The software would separately show zone budget for each of these Vertexes 2104 Area acre iw Zune Budget 6 Only Show Attributes Figure 14 1 Zone Budget Activation IGW Version 5 0P calculates zone budget for the entire Geological Layer in which the polygon for zone budget is selected As soon as the zone budget box is checked for a zone in the model a hierarchical structure of model zones appears in TPS refer to Section 4 1 3 for TPS for all zones selected for zone budget Under every zone there are two items viz Water Balance and Plume Mass Balance In order to display the Water Balance or Plume Mass Balance for any selected zone the user has to check the box es before the desired item s in the TPS as shown in Figure 14 2 The software will display each selected item in a separate win
196. created in their model for future use In order to import export scatter points wells in IGW the most common format is CSV Comma Separated Value This file format is used to exchange data between different applications and can be edited using a text spreadsheet editor e g Microsoft Excel File structure for importing exporting scatter points in CSV format is given at Table 4 1 and Table 4 2 The user is free to import export as many attributes as they want or that IGW allows for scatter points 36 Table 4 1 Import Export Structure for Scatter Points Scatter Points Data file GeneratedbyiGw S T Lye tone Zone 1001 _fattributes 4 Were xT Y Cnm Tope 692 0230089 370 0657805 s048 Scatter point 1002 eas2mss93 3626644737 1524 asm Scatter point 1003 624 1776150 275 0822368 18288 3 6576 Scwterpomti004 331 8256579 21336 3 9624 Entries in the spreadsheet must match exactly with the desired zone in the model For example if attempting to read a scatter point file into Zone 1001 in the model the field in the scatter point file must read Zone 1001 If these are not consistent the software will either 1 Display a warning message indicating there is an inconsistency if there is no zone with the specified title or 2 Read the scatter points into the incorrect zone if there is a zone with the specified title B
197. crementally in order to introduce latest change s in the model parameters Section 12 1 By right clicking any where in the Working Area the Right Click Menu pops up Section 3 17 Selecting Discretization Table from this menu opens the Discretization Table window as shown in Figure 12 11 The window shows separately for every layer in the model any attribute which has been modified since the model was last discretized The checked boxes before the modified parameters are already selected when the window is opened The user can deselect any of the modified parameters in this window Shallow discretization will apply only to the parameters selected in this window Discretization Table Select a conceptual layer Layer 1 vw Perform polygon size reordering Parameters to be discretized W Replace starting head by top elevation Aquifer Elevation v Aquifer Botton Elevation Aquifer Thickness Conductivity W Detect cell drying and rewetting Constant Head Starting Head Polyline Head Instantaneous Concentration Constant Concentration Specific Storage Specific Yield select All Longitudinal Dispersrvity Transverse Dispersrvity Unselect All Vertical Dispersrvity Effective Porosity Cancel Recharge OF i Discretize dependent parameters i Apply selection to all conceptual layers W Edge of polygon treated as part of polygon m PESE Discretize Figure 12 11 Disc
198. ctive Here the user can specify a contaminant amount if desired in ppm by default Also the user has the ability to allow one well s contaminant level to equal a percentage of another well in the group in the same manner as the operation found in Flow Rate NONE Selecting None sets the well to be displayed in the Working Area but not affect any model calculations or be considered in any way in the model solution MONITORING WELL Monitoring Well area is shown in Figure 9 4 Selecting Monitoring Well the area heading text becomes active sets the well as one that can monitor heads concentrations probabilities and correlations There are two types of monitoring available for a well 1 Monitoring Head and Concentration and 2 Monitoring Probability Distribution Monitoring well We Monitoring Head and Concentration Monitoring Probability Distribution Figure 9 4 Defining a Monitoring Well 100 Both may be selected simultaneously but Monitoring Probability Distribution is useful only in Monte Carlo simulations see Section 18 5 2 2 Clicking the Options button next to Monitoring Head and Concentration opens the Input Head Concentration Data window It is discussed in the following subsection THE INPUT HEAD CONCENTRATION DATA WINDOW The window is shown in Figure 9 5 This window allows the user to enter calibration data head data on the Head Data layer and concentration
199. ctive visual and real time sub scale modeling using a telescopic approach e Interactive visual and real time stochastic Monte Carlo simulations The user friendly software system dramatically simplifies the process of groundwater modeling and provides virtually instant analysis with visual solution representation The software provides an effective tool for 1 Groundwater professionals site planners managers and regulators to conduct site investigation and experiment in real time with sampling strategies management options and remedial schemes 2 Researchers to study field scale physical and chemical groundwater processes in heterogeneous soils and 3 Academics to teach groundwater flow transport site investigation and remediation using vivid interactive and real time simulations 1 2 User s Manual Introduction This manual is intended to give in depth information concerning IGW Version 5 0P including its interface and implementation It is assumed that the reader has a basic knowledge of the Microsoft Windows Operating System For more detailed information concerning technical content of the model 1 e mathematics and theory please consult the GW Version 4 7 Reference Manual The GW Version 5 0P Tutorials offer step by step instructions for implementing some of the procedures methods presented in this document 1 2 1 User s Manual Layout This manual is organized according to the lo
200. d then the user may select Constant Value and enter a value in the field Zero is default value default units are meters m with feet ft centimeters cm and inches inch also available Or select Same as Starting Head 65 to set the constant head value to the same as that entered in the Starting Head field see the Starting Head subsection If the Transient button is selected then the user may activate the default transient settings for the constant head Clicking the activated Transient button allows the user to edit the settings by opening the Transient Settings window Please refer to Appendix C I for a discussion of this window If None is chosen default then there is no constant head setting for the zone SOURCE CONCENTRATION AREA In the Source Concentration area the user can select one of two options to define the zone as a contaminant area Checking the box next to Instantaneous Concentration defines the model zone as having an instantaneous concentration with the desired concentration entered in the associated field default is 0 0e0 and available units of ppm default ppb g m and kg m Checking the box next to Continuous defines the zone as having a constant concentration with the desired concentration entered in the associated field default 0 0e0 and available units of ppm default ppb g m and kg m These two are mutually exclusive therefore only one can be selected for a single zone Cli
201. d by default settings within the program All point shapefiles are imported as solid squares polylines as solid lines and polygon shapefiles as solid polygons Both points and polygons have a default black outline The default colors for each shapefile have been pre determined It is possible for the user to change the color and appearance for all shapefiles This is done by positioning the cursor over the shapefile name in the GIS Layer Explorer on the left side of the GIS Model Importer window and right clicking the mouse A window opens as shown Figure 22 16 Scroll down and select the Change symbol option GIS Model Importer cm mms mm m E 1 Layers for Modeling v Point Layers All wells Expanded8 shp 2 Change symbol 4 Polyline Layers 247 NHD_Expanded shp option 1n the Polygon Layers ay augusta Expanded8 shp Arg Th om right click menu HP f Mih Lithology Layers Refresh All z Layers for Mapping Show data table gt 222 Point Layers Polyline Layers v 7 Roads Espanded8 Polygon Layers Raster Layers After selecting the Change symbol option the following window opens with all shapefile graphic options Figure 22 17 symbol Display Options Fill Color Polygon Symbol Color Circle f Solid in pixels f Triangle Horizontal Cross Vertica
202. d by lines showing their interrelationships at various levels When the model is running this window exhibits a dynamic display At any given time a set of parent child nodes and the line joining 152 them change color with an arrow displayed along the line The color indicates which parent child model is being currently assessed by the software The direction of arrow along the line indicates which way the information is flowing 1 e whether the upscaling operation is in progress or the downscaling Another dynamic display in this window is the iteration history which is continuously updated in the bottom left area of the window A Tree Map Objects Control panel is located in the bottom right corner of the window Figure 15 13 shows the panel in detail Line Option Color E width 1 start Ids of Child EIE stop Ids of Parent 11 Adhere to Modes if SubModels ie Mass Balance Size TE ut Error Bars Patching Main Model w in CalorMap Save teratian Clear Close History Figure 15 13 Tree Map Objects Control Panel The Line Option area allows the user to choose the color and width of the lines connecting the nodes The same color is applied to the nodes too Below this area are at and __ F buttons When the model is running the user can use these buttons to start stop hierarchical simulations at any time The Adhare to Nodes area allows user to sho
203. d in the following subsections Refer to the IGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual for information concerning the mathematics When particles are near wells for example when backward particle tracking is implemented after particles have been added around wells it is best to use small time steps because velocity gradients are high Sharp gradients and large time steps can yield erroneous particle tracking results The time step can be adjusted interactively while the model is running by using the SATDI see Section 3 5 10 3 1 Forward Particle Tracking Particle tracking is performed whenever the model is run by clicking the Forward L button located at Button Palette row 9 column 4 see Chapter 14 and where at least one particle feature is present in the model Notice that with particles present the model solution continuously updates at regular intervals The simulation may be stopped at any time by clicking the Stop button STI 10 3 2 Backward Particle Tracking Back ward particle tracking is performed whenever the Backward Particle Tracking button is clicked the button is only active if particles are present in the model The model solution continuously updates at regular intervals with the particles moving in the opposite direction of the velocity vectors When backward particle tracking is occurring any plume migration calculations are suspended Transient flow calculations proceed
204. d on scatter point data The user can choose between automatic and manual settings for building the variogram model When in manual mode the user can choose influence radius number of lags mathematical function for variogram model and related parameters of the function The display area continuously updates the shape of variogram data and fitted model whenever user makes any change in the available options When 86 satisfied with the variogram model the user can click the OK button and the final model will be applied in kriging interpolation This window provides visualization of the statistical analysis and allows the user to tweak some of the automatic settings Variogram Experimental Variogram Theoretical Model Types Isotropic Model Functions Parameters Variogram 2D Anisotropic Spherical Options 3D Anisotropic Exponential Nugget First Direction Parameters ie Influence Radius 3506 16 Gaussian Range Number of Lags 59 C Power Variance Slope Customize Exponent Variogram Open Multiscale Window 90 80 70 Display Options 60 Direction V Experimental jw Model 50 Direction n 40 Direction3 s 30 Preview Automatic fitting Enlarge Manual fitting 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Daisds Cancel Lag Distance Meter OK jo Log scale in horizontal Log scale in vertical Figure 7 30 Variogram modeling window For Simulation the
205. d when particles and concentration plumes are visible in the cross section windows Closing a cross section window simply turns off its visualization and computation This is sometimes desirable as it increases Working Area visibility and decreases necessary computational power without deleting the submodel It can be restored at a later time as opposed to having to redefine it and reset its attributes by checking the box next to the Visualizing Cross section button in the associated RHP of a cross section see Section 16 4 165 Chapter 17 GRID BASED OPERATIONS Before performing any Grid Based Operations in GW Version 5 0P please bear in mind some of the important basics of numerical modeling explained below When the user discretizes a model all the conceptual features in the model are mapped on to the grid nodes The geometry of the grid is defined by the user in the process of model discretization Chapter 12 The model grid in GW Version 5 0P is a 3D object with rows columns and layers An array is a set of values for a certain parameter in the model such that every value in the set corresponds to a particular grid node in the model Figure 17 1 shows the visualization of a 3D grid for a model A 3D array can be visualized with a number certain parameter value sitting on every node of the 3D grid
206. data on the Concentration Data layer to construct a graph against which data from the model can be compared The user can either manually enter the head concentration data in the table or import from a file using the Import from File button Input Head Concentration Data Head Data Concentration D ata Time days Head m EM o D E a n zm Time i days 1 Figure 9 5 inputtor Head Concentration Data Data is entered manually by clicking the appropriate field and entering the respective number Additional points can be added by pressing enter on the keyboard when the cursor is in the data cell A datum can be deleted by pressing the space bar when the cursor is in one of its data cells and subsequently confirming the desire to delete it Clicking the Redraw button updates the plot area to show the data points Clicking the OK button closes the window Clicking the Import from File button first displays a warning this operation will overwrite the existing head and concentration data in tables Do you want to continue Clicking the Yes button will bring the Open window from where the user can browse to the required file location and upload data into the table IGW Version 5 0P supports input data files in csv format 101 Chapter 10 PARTICLES Various types of particle features can be added to a model to trace flow paths for flow visualization contamina
207. dding text in the Working Area The cursor appears as a crosshair when it is positioned in the Working Area e Select mode This mode is used when selecting features in the Working Area The cursor appears with a question mark next to it when positioned in the Working Area e Node edit mode To modify a feature polygon or polyline select the feature and then right click on the feature A menu pops up Select Edit Node on the menu All existing nodes on the feature turn into solid black boxes A blue cross hair similar to a sign in the middle of every two consecutive nodes is revealed which also serves as a node The cursor appears with a question mark next to it when in the Working Area but when the cursor is brought closer to either the black box or the sign its shape turns to Holding the left mouse button the node can be dragged to the new desired location If a vertex is moved so that it lies directly between two other vertices the software will automatically eliminate that vertex as it is redundant and no longer necessary See the sections on redefining features Section 7 3 for zones and Section 8 3 for polylines for more information Using the Set Probe Sensitivity for Node Edit option from the Utilities menu Section 3 3 5 the user can delineate a region around the node within which the cursor changes shape and dragging the mouse for editing becomes enabled Clicking this option in Utilities menu ope
208. del 1 1 2 1 1 No submodels cori tions C Time Vanalion wy Plt Instantaneous C Time Vasalion ep Plot Instantaneous i 100003 pr L COEM Model 1 1 2 1 1 Curert EwotHead 1 9421E 04 5 1 41 19 Kel lt nfe gt 5 722 New Heads 6 7204E 01 Model 1 2 1 Cureet EwotHead 8 9347 04 341925 Je 1 1 gt Old Head 53154E 01 New Heads 5 3065E 01 11 gt Model 2 2 2 1 Cusrert EmotHead 1 6570 03 atle11 Je 1 Kel mde Did Head 1 9193 00 New Heads 1 8210E 00 Model 1 2 m Ide of P Current EmotHead 7 0954E 04 137 Je 1 Kel me Old Head 60723 01 New Head 0652 01 C Time Vatiation ey Plot Instantaneous stop eren Model1 1 2 1 1 1 Adhere to Nodes Current EmotHead 4 7904E 04 at 1 43 J 1 Ke 1 e OldHeade 6 4794E 01 New Head 647455 01 odel1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Ciment EmorHeade 32310604 ot 33 Ja 1 Ke 1 gt OldHeade 7 9750 01 New Heads 7 9727 01 Model 1 Curent EmorHead 8 1471E 03 31433 J 17 Kel lt sajss 8 6BD4E 01 New Heads 7613E 01 done Figure 15 19 Water Balance for Submodels 157 Chapter 16 CROSS SECTIONS A cross section is a localized model that gives more detail along a specific cross section of the Working Area Cross sections use the parent model solution as starting and boundary conditions A typical cross section from GW Version 5 0P is shown in Figure 16 1 Cross sections show conceptual features in the model such as we
209. dow DIS Main Model rs Laver 1 m Cial Mass water Balance Zone 1001 v water Balance 2 2 Plume Mass Balance g2 Layer 2 z Cial Mazs Water Balance DM Zone 2001 T9 water Balance Plume Mass Balance Figure 14 2 Selection for Demonstrating Water Plume Mass Balance in TPS The zone budget gives the water balance of a selected model zone in terms of inflow and outflow RELATIVE to groundwater It is demonstrated with a graph of where the horizontal axis represents the features contributing to the model and the vertical axis represents the water flux with a unit of m day The zone budget is layer based The last component of the zone budget in a multi layered model indicates how much flux is being exchanged from the selected zone within a layer to the other model layers which are immediately on top and bottom of this layer values on the flux axis define the inflow from existing modeling features to groundwater and values on the flux axis define the outflow from groundwater to existing modeling features IGW Version 5 0P can generate graphs for cumulative end of simulation Figure 14 3 as well as transient water balance for different components in the model Figure 14 4 To see the exact values of water balance components in Figure 14 3 the user can right click anywhere inside the chart and a 2D Chart Control Properties window will up In this window clicking on the ChartGroups tab then
210. ds Expanded8 shp v149 Polygon Layers Raster Layers Check export boxes i nol feng ve ln m Figure 22 27 Rectangular Data Selector Function All checked model layer shapefile data that fall within the selection area will be highlighted Figure 22 27 Model layer data do not have to fall entirely within the selection box to be exported In Figure 22 28 there are several point shapefiles that are bisected by the selection box Any model data layer shapefile point polyline or polygon that is intersected by the selection box will be exported All mapping layer shapefiles that fall within the selection box are not highlighted however the shapefile line work is exported to the IGW Modeling Environment 259 GIS Model Importer es eel EE Gis Laver Explorer E Layers for Modeling Point Layers Expandedg shp Polyline Layers v 7 NHD_Expanded3 fip HP Polygon Layers AP AugustaEsparf J8 shp 9 Lakes_Expa B manual shp Fhe MA Lithology Layers Layers for Mapping Point Layers Polyline Layers Road HP Polygon Raster Layg Only data that are checked can be selected DEK All mapping and model data within rectangle are selected to be exported to IGW Selecting Data to be Expor
211. dy state Flow Simulate drying and rewetting Discretization scheme when anisotropy is not aligned with grid onentation f Traditional finite difference improved finite difference Cancel Figure 13 2 Advanced Solver Options 13 2 Particle Tracking Layer This layer allows the user to manipulate the tracking and grid schemes of the particle display how to present the particles and the type of velocity interpolation scheme to use The layer 1s shown in Figure 13 3 126 Model 1 Solver Settings Tracking Scheme Grid Scheme f First order Euler t Deformed Grid Rectangular t Faurth order Hunge F utta f Deformed Grid Polygon Show Particles in Velocity Interpolation Scheme Computational Layer m f TrHinear f Conceptual Layer C Inverse Distance Exponent I2 Whole Model Apply This Setting To Entire Flow Model Hierarchy OF Cancel Figure 13 3 Solver Settings for Particle Tracking 13 2 1 Tracking Scheme The user has two options for the tracking scheme 1 First order Euler the default and 2 Fourth Order Runge Kutta Explanations for these methods can be found in the IGW 4 7 Reference Manual 13 2 2 Grid Scheme Two options are available to change the grid scheme 1 Deformed Grid Rectangular and 2 Deformed Grid Polygon default 13 2 3 Particle Display Options Three options are available to the user in terms of particle presentation Displaying these in the
212. e C Treat as prescribed head fe Prescnbed head Non specitied Iw Hydraulic Conductivity Polygon Size Filter et else ela eet Include Following as IGW Sampling density All Available GIS modeling layers Place all points within selection polygon GIS selection polygon Scatter Paint Filter Cancel Figure 22 31 Extraction Criteria Window The purpose of the options in the Extraction Criteria window is to provide a final processing or filtering of the raw data found in each model data shapefile 261 22 17 1 Pumping Wells The example shown in Figure 22 32 is for exporting a point shapefile as a pumping well The option to Treat as wells must be selected If the user chooses not to assign a uniform pumping rate the pumping rate that is found in the well point shapefile will be used i By default any wells without an assigned pumping rate are not exported to IGW To over ride the default settings the user must select the Extract wells with zero or unknown pumping capacity option By selecting this option all wells found in the selected shapefile will be imported Those with zero or unknown pumping rates will be assigned a pumping rate equal to Zero The user also has the option of assigning a uniform pumping rate to all wells or simply using the estimated pumping rate that is found in the model data shapefile Assigning a uniform pumping rate will over
213. e 12 9 that gives the user options to change these values based on percentage values of either the conceptual or computational model being used Some of the active model cells may become dry if groundwater head goes below the bottom elevation of the aquifer This is typical especially with unconfined aquifers since the groundwater flow equation is nonlinear and so convergence problems may occur IGW lets the user to define the minimum thickness of the aquifer in Define Min Thickness window see Figure 12 9 so they can prevent those particular cells from going dry Define Min Thickness Minimun Layer Thickness Allowed Conceptual layer 5 of it s mas thickness Computational layer of it s max thickness OF Cancel Figure 12 9 Assigning Minimum Aquifer Thickness Clicking the Copy to Multiple Machines button opens the Parallel Hosts and Tasks window shown in Figure 12 10 Detail functionality of this window is explained in parallel computing features of IGW Version 5 0P Please refer to Section 18 7 for more details on parallel computing Parallel Hosts and Tasks Child Machine Option HostName Number of Process Total Number of Realization multiscale1 e multiscale2 e multiscale3 e multiscale4 e multiscale5 e multiscale6 e multiscale multiscale8 e multiscale3 e stochastic e jupiter e Howard e Auto Data Collec
214. e 15 1 Figure 15 2 Figure 15 3 Figure 15 4 Figure 15 5 Figure 15 6 Figure 15 7 Figure 15 8 Figure 15 9 Figure 15 10 Figure 15 11 Figure 15 12 Figure 15 13 Figure 15 14 Parallel Hosts and Tasks window eese 121 Diseretization DableWHHdOW aun sbetde seca ke Sex aX LEE DATO de Rak oa 1227 The Solver Engine with Flow layer 1516 124 Advanced Solver ODLDODS e er Roa ED tube iad 126 Solver Settings for Particle 127 Solver Settings Tor Transport uu uere eR ln 128 MIDD SON toast ludo fus Mate 129 Advanced Solver Options for Transport ccccceccccseseceeeeecseseeeeneeeees 131 Stochastic Model Setting Saisonen be Ede Ehe ette doe denis 132 ACL ALON o neces eda Eso be o toad veg tad tot esu OR 134 Item Selection for Demonstrating Water Plume Mass Balance in TPS 134 Mater Dalai e ues e DU onan RO aac 135 Tm Variant Water balance soie order ito os esae tsm av for ate Pee fas 135 2D Chart Control Properties Wind OW icr ra neo roues 136 2D Chart Data Control Properties Chart Groups tab with Data sub tab 138 2DChart a Scotis 138 5 bmodelParameltefs eu slt ees Nau 141 Vertical Discretization window for submodel sse
215. e 3 5 Each of these operations is explained below Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untitled File Modeling SIS 3D Visualization Utilities Display Help about Tip of The Day r ane Visit Us on The Web T 3 5 Menu About Selecting this opens the Credits window see Figure 3 6 It is very similar to the splash screen that appears when the software is started The Credits window lists the full software title the names of the developers and the home institution of current software development the Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering at Michigan State University There is also a System Info button that opens the Windows System Information console window or other appropriate interface depending on Windows version and an OK button used to close the About window The IGW website may be opened by clicking on the web address INTERACTIVE GROUND WATER 4 GIS enabled Computational Steering Environment for Integrated Determinitic Stochastic and Multiscale Modeling New Paradigm for Real Time Simulation Visualization Analysis and Presentation Laboratory of Excellence for Realtime Computing and Multiscale Modeling Copyright 1997 2006 at Michigan State University http www egr msu edu iqw System Info Figure 3 6 iGw Credits Visit Us on The Web Selecting this opens the computers brow
216. e 5 1 Definition of Real World Coordinate Parameters mE a VALUES 7 X0 The x direction coordinate value of the uremoh ind displayed Working Area origin YO The y direction coordinate value of the arme such displayed Working Area origin mS The distance represented by the x mene direction extent of the basemap image MD The distance represented by the y uade direction extent of the basemap image The user simply selects the desired unit then enters the value in the appropriate field These values can be defined even if no basemap picture is to be imported the values simply associate with the Working Area as a whole However if a basemap is to be used these numbers should only be set after the Load Basemap procedure has been completed see Section 5 2 Any changes will take effect once the OK button is clicked to close the Model Scale and Basemap window Loading a Basemap Clicking the Define Model Domain Import Basemap button opens the Model Scale and Basemap window shown in Figure 5 2 Clicking the Load Basemap button open the Open window The user selects the type of file to open surfs to its location and clicks the Open button This opens the basemap in the Vectorization of Raster Pictures window Figure 5 3 with the basemap visible in a preview pane The map is vectorized as explained in Section 5 2 1 and imported into the model Model Sca
217. e 7 3 The individual parameters are discussed in the following subsections HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY Also referred to as the Coefficient of Permeability the hydraulic conductivity K is a measure of groundwater s ability to move through porous media It has dimensions of L T Checking the box next to Conductivity allows the user to specify the conductivity value in the appropriate field The user may check the box next to the deactivated Random button to activate the random K distribution with default settings Clicking the Random button opens the Option of Unconditional Random Field window Appendix B L therefore allowing the user to change the random distribution settings The default conductivity value is 164 041 ft day set in the Default Attribute window Chapter 6 The default entry is 0 0e0 The default unit is m day with cm sec and ft day also available KX KY The K K value quantifies the isotropic character of the aquifer material in the form of a ratio This ratio relates the conductivity in the x direction to the conductivity in the y direction The default value is 1 set in the Default Attribute window Chapter 6 the default entry is 1 and the ratio is dimensionless KX KZ The value quantifies the isotropic character of the aquifer material in the form of aratio This ratio relates the conductivity in the x direction to the conductivity in the z direction The default value is 10 set in the
218. e Section Kx Conductivity 6 1 and Section 6 2 The x direction transmissivity of the aquifer material It is equal to Kx Thick The ratio of the x direction conductivity to the y direction conductivity or the z direction Kx Kz Factors conductivity See Section 7 6 1 1 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 The angle between the x axis and the Kx axis in the x y plane It is equivalent to Orientation Orientation of AnisF in XY See Section 7 6 1 1 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 Storage m T A This is equal to Specific Storage Thick Specific Yield See Section 7 6 1 1 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 Pons diner See Local Dispersivity in Section 7 6 1 1 Dispersivity DispT See Local Dispersivity in Section 7 6 1 1 Dispersivity DispV See Local Dispersivity in Section 7 6 1 1 Dispersivity Partitioning Coefficient Red Retardation This is equal to 1 Bulk Density Effective Porosity Partitioning Coefficient See Factor Soil Particle Density in Section 7 6 1 1 for an explanation of Bulk Density Head Hydraulic Head This is the hydraulic head in the aquifer Velocity in X br y Vx ae Groundwater velocity in X direction Direction Velocity in Y Direction 5 a See Partitioning Kd in Section 7 6 1 2 lt lt N Groundwater velocity in Y direction Velocity in Y Groundwater velocity in Z direction Direction Plume C Conc This is the concentration of c
219. e Section 3 13 instead of clicking the mouse at the desired location This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and allows for more precise development of submodel features As soon as a submodel polygon is created in the Working Area it becomes the active feature If the user opens the AE it will already have the submodel selected in LHP The corresponding RHP for submodel will also appear in the AE The user can define the submodel area as a polygon however GW Version 5 0P will always create a rectangular zone for a submodel The software automatically snaps the polygon s vertices to the nearest nodes in the parent model to form the rectangular region The finer grid size in the submodel is defined by specified fractions of the grid size of the main model Therefore if the grid size in main model is modified the submodel grid is also modified 140 The original polygon drawn by the user for the submodel is not retained by the software If the grid size is changed in the main model at a later stage the vertices of the rectangular submodel will be snapped to the new grid in the main model rather than those of the original polygon The following sections explain the attributes of a submodel 15 2 RHP for Submodels in Attributes Explorer The submodel polygon drawn by the user becomes accessible in the LHP of AE When sub model is selected in the LHP the sub model RHP appears as sho
220. e also adjustable in the SATDI see Section 3 5 At the top of the window the user selects either Steady State or Transient State depending upon the model conditions to be simulated The other parameters in the window are discussed in the following subsections Clicking the OK button sets any changes into the software while clicking the Cancel button closes the Simulation Time Parameters window discarding changes after a verification prompt from the software Refer to Chapter 16 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for additional information about adjusting settings in this window 112 SIMULATION LENGTH Here the user specifies the desired length of the simulation in the field The default value entry is 360 days with default unit as day hour second sec month and year also available This value is only functional when the Stop when simulation length is reached box near the bottom of the window is checked see the Stop when simulation length is reached section SIMULATION TIME STEP This value indicates the current model time step The default value entry is 10 with the default unit as day hour second sec month and year also available The user may adjust the time step by entering a desired value in the appropriate field VISUALIZATION STEP The Visualization Step determines how often the software redraws the Working Area and other windows A value of 1 default i
221. e default view of the Input Parameters window C Power When the window is opened the software supplies the initial values in the fields based upon an automatic variogram analysis In the Variogram Model area the user has the option of Spherical Exponential the default Gaussian Power Hole Exp and Hole Gauss Power employs all but the Sill parameter The rest employ only the top three parameters In the Geometry Type area the user may specify whether to use an Isotropic the default or Anisotropic model form If Anisotropic 1s selected the window updates to show an extra range field and an angle field The modified window is shown in Figure F I 2 In the Parameters area the user may adjust the settings for Nugget Sill Range or Rangel if anisotropic Power and Slope and Range2 and Angle if anisotropic These settings may be adjusted by entering specific numbers in the fields or by using the slide bars that appear between the field and the field name Parameters not available for a specific model will be displayed in gray text and not be accessible The parameter definitions are discussed in the LGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual The variogram analysis is shown the Variogram window see Appendix F II 306 Input Parameters V aringram Model Geometry Type C Spherical s
222. e grid size will affect the location of that well as it must stay associated with nodes It is recommended to make the grid resolution finer in order to move a well closer to its respective real world coordinates 9 4 Setting Well Attributes Well attributes are set in the AE see Section 9 4 1 RHP for Global Attributes of Wells Clicking on Wells at Group Level refer to Figure 4 2 in LHP opens the global RHP for a wells group as shown in Figure 9 1 The user can change and or assign global parameters to the wells group in this RHP Turn off all pumping wells Set all well display atributes together fw Well visible iw Use this color Label visible BEES Tum off all injection wells Turn off all monitoring wells Apply this to all sub node pumping wells Flow Hate Constant 453 28 Head Comection f Transient Factor Apply this to all sub nade injection wells Flow Hate Constant 459 288 6PM Head Correction Transient Factor Concentration e Constant 0 0e0 Transient C Factar Figure 9 1 wels Attributes in the AE TURN OFF WELLS The top left area of the RHP gives various turn off options for the wells group The options include Turn off all pumping wells Turn off all injection wells and Turn off all monitoring wells The user may select as many of these options at once as they desire for modeling I Refer
223. e in meters by default The user can also choose from feet miles and kilometers The unit of scale is displayed with the first label on the horizontal scale bar Clicking the OK button sets the changes and closes the window Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes and closes the window 19 3 Conceptual Features and Texts Area In this area the user may choose to activate or deactivate visualization of conceptual features and text 19 3 1 Displaying Conceptual Features in the Model Area Conceptual features in the Model Area are presented by Polygons Scatter Points Wells Polylines Submodel polygons and Seep Area polygons User can check or uncheck the box to display or hide any feature Hiding any conceptual feature in the display options will not affect the model results The user can also add annotations in the working area and choose to display or hide the annotated text using the Texts check box All conceptual features are displayed by default except Seep Area Clicking the options button next to Seep Area opens the Pattern Display Option window as shown in Figure 19 5 Pattern Display Option Patten Properties width 4 pixels Color J Pattern Choices Density 108 1 time of Grids x B t 2 times of Grids fe C wee T J times of Grids Star Cancel Figure 19 5 Pattern Display Options 205 The seep area visualization can be used to delineate a seepage area such as a wetl
224. e is typically quite large A warning is displayed informing the user as to the total number of lines in the data table Figure 22 14 shows an example of a partially displayed data table for a point shapefile containing wells Please note that number of records in the data table in are only 829 for the selected wells However the total number of wells in this example file are 2222 as can be seen in the data table shown in Figure 22 12 250 22 7 Data Table Shapetile EDacuments and SetlingesHassan D ocumentssGLPF sGIS Filessal5 Shape type String String COUNTY String TOWN SHIP String TOWN RANGE String SECTION Double OWNER MAME String WELL_ADDR String WELL DEPTH Double WELL String WELLID IMPORT ID COUNTY 838 Puint 599 Point 600 Point 02 Point 605 Point 608 Paint 614 Puint B16 Point 22 Point B23 Paint B25 Paint B26 Point Puint Puint B30 Point 631 Paint 634 Point 538 Point Paint Puint 643 Point B45 Point 543 Point 650 Paint 655 Puint BEA Puint Bb Point 583 Point 696 Point Point Puint Humber af records Paint 829 Number of fields per record 153 02000000625 02000000851 DD P5 OS000005446 06000000815 06000000822 02000000845 09000001296 OS000006384 OS000007 300 Dens s DD 905 OS000008504 OS000000546 DEDOS OS000000820 OS000006334 OS000000826 OS000007553 OS000006
225. e of the automatic settings Refer to the IGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual for mathematical details CONDITIONAL SIMULATION The Conditional Simulation procedure generates a spatially correlated random field based on sample statistical parameters This procedure is similar to the Unconditional Simulation method except the values for the locations corresponding to the measured values are held equal to those values when the field is generated There are two options available in the Simulation Methods area when this procedure 1s selected 1 Spectral Algorithm the default and 2 Sequential Gaussian Simulation Appendices B I I B I II and B I III discuss these methods some of the writing in the referenced appendices is not directly applicable as the appendices were written with respect to the Option of Unconditional Random Field window simply disregard those portions There are two options that appear in the Spatial Statistics Parameters area when Conditional Simulation is chosen Choosing User Specified allows the user to explicitly define simulation parameters by accessing the Random Field Options window see Appendix clicking the appropriate Option button Choosing Infer from Data instructs the software to automatically determine the parameters and apply them Clicking the associated Edit button opens the Variogram window see Appendix This window provides visualization of the statistical analysis and allows the us
226. e only pertain to the example file in Figure 7 22 A complete list of attribute keywords used in IGW is given in Table 7 1 To import scatter points from a file into a zone right click on the zone in the LHP of AE and click on Import Scatter Points from the drop down menu The Open window appears Browse to the file location select the file containing scatter point information and click Open The scatter points appear in the zone right away with all the attributes assigned from the information in the file The user can select a point and see its assigned attributes in the RHP of AE Table 7 1 Attribute Keywords px coordinate py coordinate zcoorimae top elevation TopE bottom elevation BotE starting head starthead 7 6 1 4 1 Prescribed Head Area 7 6 1 6 Calibration Data Layer 7 6 1 6 Calibration Data Layer 7 6 1 6 Calibration Data Layer surface 7 6 1 4 1 Source Concentration Area 7 6 1 4 1 Source Concentration Area poro 7 6 1 4 2 Const Rech and Transient Rech Button displ dispt drnelev drnleak rvbedelev rivstage rivleak prescribed head consthead calibration data head calibhead calibration data concentration calibconc calibration conductivity calibcond surface elevation instantaneous concentration instconc constant concentration constconc effective porosity recharge rech dispersivity longitudi
227. e operations shown in Figure 3 2 Each of these operations is explained below Set Screen Capture Data Sampling Set Global Units Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untitled File Modeling GIS 3D Visualization SEES Display Help Set Screen Capture Data Sampling Set Global Units Cell Attribute viewer Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags Set Probe Sensitivity For Mode Edit Open a process File arid Based Operation j Figure 3 2 utilities Menu Selecting this brings up the Automatic Capture Window See Section 23 1 1 for a detailed discussion of the window and its functionality Selecting this brings up two options Random Sampling and Sampling at Calibhead Random Sampling opens the Data Random Sampling window Figure 23 3 and allows the user to take a random sample of the data from the Working Area This selection is available only after the model has been discretized See Chapter 12 Also see Section 23 5 for more information Sampling at Calibhead compares samples at well locations and models the data as samples versus the predicted head This feature will allow the user to see if the samples have been over predicted or under predicted based on the results Selecting this feature allows the user to set the unit types on any of the variables needed in the model Table 3 1 and Figure 3 3 To change the unit of a parameter simply click the mouse to cycle through the available units
228. e segment endpoint in the VCI see Section 3 13 instead of clicking the mouse at the desired location This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and allows for a more precise development of cross section features When a cross section is defined in the software it becomes the active feature Refer to Chapter 13 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for examples of defining and viewing a profile model 158 After a cross section has been created the cursor is still in draw mode and the user may continue to add cross section s as desired Cross sections are independent of model layers The user can draw cross section in any model layer and it will show in all model layers in the Working Area 16 2 Selecting Cross Sections To select a cross section in the Working Area first click the Select Cross section button and then click the cursor on the desired cross section cross section becomes highlighted in red therefore indicating that is currently selected Alternately the desired cross section may be selected in the AE see Section 4 1 1 16 3 Redefining Cross Sections A cross section that has been defined in the software can be redefined by placing the cursor in Node Edit mode see Section 3 16 The user may change the shape of the polyline in either the Working Area or any submodel windows by 1 moving the existing vertices and or 2 creating new
229. ect Submodel Area button and then click the cursor inside the desired submodel The submodel becomes outlined in red indicating that is currently selected Alternately the desired submodel may be selected in the AE see Section 4 1 1 15 8 Redefining the Submodel Area A submodel that has been defined in the software can be redefined by placing the cursor in Node Edit mode see Section 3 16 The user may change the shape of the submodel in the Working Area by either moving the existing vertices and or creating new vertices 146 To move an existing vertex click and hold the mouse above the black square that corresponds to the desired vertex drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button To create a new vertex click and hold the mouse above the blue crosshair symbol one exists between each vertex nearest to the desired location of the new vertex Drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button These steps may be repeated as many times as necessary until the desired submodel shape is achieved The original polygon drawn by the user for the submodel is not retained by the software After discretization the submodel area is converted into a rectangle The nodes of the new rectangular area can again be edited by the user in the similar manner as described above 15 9 Viewing Submodels in Separate Windows After defining a submodel in the work
230. ed in the Attribute Explore AE window see Section Error Reference source not ound More detail found in Section 9 2 Add Single Particle 4 1 Clicking this button allows the user to add a single particle in the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within the Working Area to define a point that corresponds to the desired location of the particle Particle implementation is discussed further in Chapter 10 Add Particles Inside Polygon 4 2 Clicking this button allows the user to add a group of particles in the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor 15 set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply define a zone that outlines the desired location of the particles within the Working Area Once the zone is defined the Particles window appears prompting the user to enter the number of particle columns desired Once the number is entered either click to create the particle zone or Cancel to abort Particle implementation is discussed further in Chapter 10 Add Particles Along Polyline 4 3 Clicking this button allows the user to add a polyline a series of line segments of particles in the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply define a polyline that indicates the desired location of the particles within the Working Area Once the polyline i
231. ee Chapter 12 before attempting to solve or else an error message will appear 4L Reset Flow Clock 10 1 Clicking this button resets the Flow Time display in the Step Adjustment and Time Display Interface see Section 3 5 and the flow component of the elapsed time displayed in the Working Area Attribute Display see Section 3 13 o Reset Concentration Clock 10 2 A Clicking this button resets the Plume Time display in the Step Adjustment and Time Display Interface see Section 3 5 and the plume component of the elapsed time displayed in the Working Area Attribute Display see Section 3 13 23 Initialize Plume 10 3 Clicking this button returns all concentration plumes to their original locations and resets the concentration values for all cells in the model Reset Particle Clock 10 4 Clicking this button resets the Particle Time display in the Step Adjustment and Time Display Interface see Section 3 5 and the particle component of the elapsed time displayed in the Working Area Attribute Display see Section 3 13 Add Text 11 1 Clicking this button allows the user to add a text field in the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click at a point in the Working Area to designate a text field The clicked point corresponds to the upper left hand corner of the text field Also the
232. eeeceesceeeeseeeeeeeeees 44 Model Scale and Basemap window 45 Model Scale and Basemap Window ccccccccsescccseecceeseeeensecseseeaeneeeaenes 46 Mectorzattonofr Raster Pictures ote a oboe ease ia ees 47 Loading a Shape File Vector Type 48 Detault Model N 50 Default Options for Desaturation Re wetting eese 22 An Example Zone in the Working 56 Zone with nodal points denoted as blue 6 57 RHP 4 eae salamat 58 Orientation or ATISOUODY eel dale 60 Parameters Defining Specific Yield 60 biochemical PrOpetti6S e ut ando tue an ic 62 RHP for Aquifer Type Elevations 64 Elevation Overlapping S Clee soon bono eoi tae dent dette 64 Prescribed Head Concentration ccccccccsescccesecceeecceeececeeseeseseeaenseesenes 65 Concentration Distribution Model window eese 66 PRESET IDG o Ball 67 H ad Dependent 2 68 Rivet Botton Sediment Properties verre nem ot e 70 Caller PO mit CONTO sisse bora des
233. een Interval 4nd Aquifer Thickness OK Figure 22 37 Modified Theis Method Specific Capacity Based K Transmissivity Calculation Methods 2 3 225Tt Q T 1og eis Solution 2 el rs Drawdown amp Bradbuy and m Tt Rothschild Az s _ s r s 25 Q Modified Theis T 2000 Drawdown Filter by Test Method Flags UNKNOWN v AIR iw BAIL iw OTHER iw PLUGA TSTPUM Well efficiency factor Drawdown Filter Michgan A Razack and Huntley Remove wells if drawdown lt 1 Select one of the Michgan B Mace A la empirical models C Michgen C C Customize p 2 f Confined C Lnconfined wd ecu Q 0 57 Drawdown Conductivity Calculation K T B Cancel Q 10 B Screen Interval gt 500 GPM Aquifer Thickness Otherwise B Linear Interpolation Between Screen Interval And Aquifer Thickness OK Figure 22 38 Empirical Model At the bottom left corner of Figure 22 39 there is an option to define the efficiency of the well This Well efficiency factor only applies to the specific capacity data and the methods based on the Theis non equilibrium model Theis Bradbury and Rothschild and Modified Theis The 266 reported drawdown is multiplied by the Well efficiency factor A Well efficiency factor of 1 represents a 100 efficient well Likewise a value of 0 6 represents a well that has 60 efficiency M
234. efer to Section 15 11 2 for submodel naming convention will appear when the model is discretized Section 15 6 The windows will cascade from the upper left hand corner of the window corresponding to the submodel that appears above it in the LHP Section 4 1 1 of the AE The location of the initial window will be in the upper left hand corner of the monitor The spacing of existing open windows and the required sizes of the newly opened windows may affect the initial display location of the newly opened windows 147 Model features zones polylines wells etc can be drawn in a submodel window The increased detail of the submodel window allows for more accurate rendering and placement of smaller features The effects on the main model will be the same as if the feature was drawn in the Working Area Right clicking the mouse in a submodel window opens a menu from which the user may select any of the following options Please also see The Right Click Menw in Section 3 17 1 Copy copies the submodel The user can paste the copied submodel in the AE by using CTRL V 2 Node Edit the specific submodel must first be active sets the cursor node edit mode Section 3 16 and subsequently allows the user to redefine the shape of the submodel same as redefining a zone Section 7 3 3 Refresh Selecting this is the same as clicking the Refresh button on the Button Palette Section 3 4 4
235. efile is displayed Figure 22 12 EERO e maea E Layers for Modeling E Point Layers SNAG yells ExXpanc Bg olyline Layers 4 Polyline Lay 4 NHD_Expanded8 shp Polygon Layers v1 Augusta E panded8 shp P 29 Lakes Expanded8 manualshp 2 D Lithology Layers ayers for Mapping x 918 Layers for Mappi oint Layers M Point Lay 3 M amp Polyline Layers 71 4 Roads Espanded8 shp Ho P Polygon Layers d MB Raster Layers Mis Raster Lay Figure 22 11 GIS Model Importer Layers for Modeling Point Layers AllWells_Expanded8 shp 4 Polyline Layers 4 Exspanded8 s 9 Polygon Layers Table ug d PE Show Data Opening the Data Table Lithology Layers ps Layers for Mapping Point Layers B 4 Polyline Layers v 47 Roads vC Polygon Layers Raster Layers Data table shown for selected layer Figure 22 12 Shapefile L2 d C Documents and Settings Hassan Abbas My Documents GLPFAGIS Files GIS j Shape type Number of records Search Point 2222 Zoom in selected feature Number of fields per record 159 String String String String String Double String String Double String 08000002200 08000002196 08000001823 08000001825 08000006613 08000002238 08000006696 0800000768
236. efine the random field When scatter points are used to define a random field the user has the option to perform conditional or unconditional simulations please see Section 18 4 A greater number of parameters can be associated with scatter points as many as can be defined for a zone Scatter point implementation is discussed in Section 7 7 and Chapter 20 When either of the aforementioned settings is implemented for a parameter the software will be able to generate any number of statistically equivalent random field formations for each This is the basis for single realization and Monte Carlo stochastic modeling 18 2 Setting up a Parameter for Stochastic Simulation Currently random fields can only be specified for hydraulic conductivity Random fields for effective porosity the partition coefficient and recharge will be developed in later versions of IGW These are discussed in the appropriate subsections of Section 7 6 1 Follow these steps to setup a parameter as random field e Select the zone within which there exists a random field 1 e hydraulic conductivity e Open Physcial Properties tab in the AE window e Check the Conductivity box and enter the mean value for conductivity in the placeholder 177 2 Attributes Explorer lal 2 Explorer Hierarchy Tree re fone 1001 Z 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point Tar 1001 Properties Elevations Sinks Co
237. el Scale and Basemap window is the interface used to select a basemap file and set its associated real world characteristics scale origin coordinates etc It is pictured in Figure 5 1 Model Scale and Basemap Load Basemap Please register the following Real World Coordinates 0 00 0 t vooon KLength 3280 83 t Ylengh 4eng2 t OF Cancel Figure 5 1 Model Scale and Basemap window This window can be accessed by clicking the Set Basemap and Register a Basemap button on the Button Palette row 1 column 4 or by clicking the Import Basemap and Define Model Domain button that appears in the Main Model layer of the AE The white rectangular box displays a preview of the Working Area The red coordinates indicate the location of the X0 YO point that can be defined by the user These coordinates only appear prior to a basemap being loaded and for a preview in which the origins of both the basemap physical origin and Working Area coincide even if the origin coordinates of the Working Area are modified Refer to Section 3 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for a step by step example of importing a basemap 45 The section delineated by the Please Register the Following Real World Coordinates heading 1s used to enter the origin coordinates as referred to above and to set the X and Y scale of the picture Table 5 1 defines these four variables Tabl
238. el is referred to as Layers This is where the user will find all computational layers of their model These first three levels are common to all models and will appear as features 1s defined in the Working Area once the model is created The associated RHP configurations are discussed in Section 4 1 2 E 5 Project Main Model Layer 1 ones 1001 P one 1001 ore Plines 1001 z Pline 1001 wells 1001 well 1001 Well 1002 ParticlesGroup 1001 fe Particle ones 1001 HF Particlezane 1001 Scatter Point Particle Feature Level Feature Particle Group Level Group Level Layers Level Model Level Project Level Figure 4 2 General view of LHP 35 Three more hierarchical levels that appear as certain features can be added to the model The fourth level is called Group features of a certain type are grouped together under placeholders titled Zones Plines Wells etc The associated interface for these groups is blank The fifth level is called Feature Particle Group Individual features are listed at this level along with group placeholders for the individual particle feature types The feature RHPs are each discussed in the chapter dealing with that respective feature The RHPs associated with the particle feature groups are blank The sixth level is called Scatter Point Particle Feature Scatter points are listed under the z
239. elloss Sw CQ 2 327 2 75 Drawdown Filter by Test Method Flags UNKNOWN 1 AIR BAIL OTHER iw PLUGA TSTPUM Well efficiency factor 1 Drawdown Filter Michgan_A C Razack and Huntley Remove wells if drawdown lt Michgan_B C C Michgan_C Customize p Confined C Unconfined Q 0 57 Drawdown Empirical Model 7 25 Conductivity Calculation K T B Cancel Q lt 10 B Screen Interval O gt 500 B Aquifer Thickness Otherwise B Linear Interpolation Between Screen Interval And Aquifer Thickness OK Figure 22 36 Iteration Settings for Theis and Bradbury Methods In the upper right portion of this window Figure 22 36 there is a section labeled Iteration Settings These setting apply only to the Theis and Bradbury Rothschild methods The user can specify values for the different parameters in either equation or use the default values for these parameters The program calculates the transmissivity value using these initial parameter values and the specific capacity data The Modified Theis method Figure 22 37 is a commonly used simplified variation of the Theis method By assuming default values for all of the parameters in the Theis equation it can be shown that the value for the specific capacity multiplier of a confined aquifer is approximately equal to 2000 and 1500 for an unconfined aquifer Selecting the Confined or Unconfined radi
240. ells In certain areas there may be wells that extract groundwater from either the glacial drift aquifers Drift or the underlying bedrock aquifer Rock The Well Filter option button is shown in Figure 22 32 and is selected using the left mouse button The Well Filter window is shown in Figure 22 33 The Aquifer Code selection options shown in the upper left part of the window 262 allows the user to select wells that are open to either the Drift or Rock if present aquifer or both In some cases the aquifer was designated Unknown in the shapefile Filter Setting Aquifer Code Well Construction Date RF Drit D ear range fe All W Bed Rock R Define i Unknown LI From to Well Types Month range Public supply well al Select wells within C Define month range for seasonal data Select wells within date range for temporal data Select wells on basis of aquifer code Select wells on Industrial well basis of well Irrigation well From to type v Residential well iv Other wells Screen Location Specify wells on i Al basis of dep th to Elevation of Screen T oo Kk top and bottom of oP well Depth to Screen Bottom EN Figure 22 33 Well Filter Each well has a designated use that falls into one of five categories Public supply Industrial Irrigation Residential and Other The user may choose wells on the ba
241. en view styles may be different from each other depending on the Windows version in which they were created It is important to note that the IGW 3D versions recently Version 5 0P and the associated documents are undergoing constant revision Check the website see Section 1 3 often for updates 1 2 2 User s Manual Acronyms Abbreviations There are a large number of acronyms used throughout this text The acronyms their meanings and the section in which they are first discussed are presented in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 User s Manual Acronyms ACRONYM ABBREV DEFINITION REFERENCE gt Attribute Explore AE window E Attribute Entry Area Section 7 6 ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Section 20 3 Section 3 3 1 Cursor Activated Table Figure 3 1 BM CA dpi Section 1 2 3 A P T DT DXF F W A B Section 3 5 Drawing Exchange Format Section 5 2 FAQ Frequently Asked Questions Section 2 3 GIA General Information Area Section 7 6 2 GI IG IW Interactive Groundwater Modeling Chapter 1 JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group Section 3 3 1 Left hand Pane Section 4 1 1 Graphics Interchange Format Section 5 2 Left Message Area Section 3 13 Megabyte Section 1 2 3 i N A Not Applicable Section 3 12 Appendix E Random Access Memory Section 1 2 3 RBSP River Bottom Sediment Properties Section 7 6 1 4 2 Section 2 3 MMOC Modified Method of Characte
242. enough details HORIZONTAL GRID SPACING DL This field indicates the computational real world extent of each cell along the length of the cross section It is determined by _ LENGTH NL DL 16 5 2 where LENGTH entire length of the cross section L VERTICAL GRID SPACING DZ This field indicates the computational real world extent of each cell in the z direction It is determined by _ BOTE 16 5 3 NZ DZ 160 X SECT THICKNESS DB This field indicates the display extent of the thickness looking through the cross section The value is centered about the cross section The user may change the displayed thickness of the cross section by entering a number in the appropriate field VERTICAL EXAGGERATION This field indicates the vertical exaggeration of the cross section display By default the associated box Equal to sqrt Kx Kz is checked and the software automatically enters the AnisF number 4 Kx Kz in the box The user may uncheck the box and enter a desired number in the appropriate field The AnisF number ensures that the velocity vectors and head contours will be orthogonal for homogenous anisotropic media COLOH AREA The color area shows a preview of the cross section color There is also a button the user may click to open the Color window and change it The user may also click in the sample color outline area to open the Color window INTERPOLA
243. er Engine with Flow layer visible The solver window has five main layers Flow Particle Tracking Transport MT3D and Stochastic Model The first three settings form the general mathematical solution MT3D allows a transfer into an entirely different groundwater model and Stochastic Model deals with setting the software to perform stochastic modeling These layers and associated parameters are discussed in the following sections 13 1 Flow Layer The Flow layer is visible in Figure 13 1 It has three main areas that are discussed in the following subsections The solvers are all iterative in nature as IGW uses the finite difference solution scheme these methods compute the head for a cell based upon the heads of the surrounding cells See the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual for more information concerning the general finite difference solution schemes 124 13 1 1 Numerical Solving Methods MATRIX SOLVER This region has 12 possible solving methods for the model Algebraic Multigrid Transpose Free Quasi Minimum Residual Successive Over Relaxation SOR Generalized Minimum Residual Conjugate Gradient Flexible Generalized Minimum Residual Conjugate Gradient Normal eq Direct Quasi Generalized Min Residual Biconjugate Gradient Full Orthogonalization Biconjugate Gradient with Partial Pivoting Biconjugate Gradient Stabilized SOLVER PARAMETERS The user has the option to adjust the Damping Parameter default set to 1 or
244. er to Visualize Process Seepage Solute BOR Realizatid S e Master Slaves 9 7 aster Hstgram Std Reali Change Probability Resolution Save 5000 00 Total Solute Flux Select a Parameter to Visualize Process eepage Solute PDF iw Realization Show Stats on ac CDF Mean Std Master Master Slaves Change Probability Resolution Save Select a Parameter to Visualize Process 9 2222 IUE C PDF jw Realization Mean Mean Std 2 90 C CDF Mean Std Mean Realization Master MastersSlaves i Change Probability Resolution Figure 18 20 PDF CDF and Histogram for concentration process The button allows the user to save the data generated in all the realizations for Seepage and Solute The data is saved in a dat file format The format is explained in Section 23 6 2 194 Process Curve Choice area allows the user to plot the stochastic process It also allows to plot the dynamic display of mean value of a parameter at the end of last realization along with the bounds around the mean at plus and minus of one standard deviation In the Graphical Display area these choices can be plotted simultaneously The Mean Realization Std Realization and CV Realization represent variation of mean standard deviation and coefficient of variation respectively at end of each realization All curves in Process Curve Choice are
245. er to tweak some of the automatic settings Refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual for mathematical details 88 Chapter 8 POLYLINES A polyline is basically a series of line segments Polylines are used to define source sink areas or flux monitoring boundaries in the Working Area Polylines are typically used for thin features that may not receive full model representation due to the grid size if defined as a zone The following sections describe the implementation and functionality of polyline features 8 1 Defining Polylines The first step in defining a polyline is clicking the Create a New Polyline and Assign Property button located at row 2 column 3 This puts the cursor in drawing mode The user may now define a polyline in the Working Area by simply clicking the mouse at points along the desired series of line segments Figure 8 1 shows a polyline in the Working Area First the user selects a beginning point at one end of the desired polyline and clicks the mouse The user moves the mouse cursor to another point along the desired polyline A line will extend from the initial point to the current location of the cursor indicating the proposed segment of the polyline The user should adjust the location of the mouse cursor to make the proposed edge coincide with the user s desired edge Once this 1s done clicking the mouse sets the point Next the user should then move the mouse cursor to anothe
246. erarchy Tree lt lt I Project Main Model a g Cross sections Cross section 1 Physical Properties Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point Properties Elevations Sinks Control Hydraulic Conductivity Molecular Diffusion Conductivity Calibration Data Plines 1001 amp Pline 1001 z Pline 1002 Layer 2 Orient 5 4 Zones 2001 Orientali M Orient 2 rientation of Zone 3001 Fern Wells 2001 Local Dispersion Orientation of Aia 2001 B EN Zones 3001 2 Trans e Zone 3002 torage Terms Vert 0 Wells 3001 eee L o Well 3001 Specific Yield Well 3002 Specific Storage m 9 3D Attributes 9 3DAttr 1 Soil Particle Density pma Effective Porosity pence Layer 1 Li Mass Water Balance 19 Zone 1001 o RM UE mp oO Area Vv pides Points JE Plume Mass Balance C For Display Img Zone Budget ZB Only H B Layer2 Domain Control iat Show Interpolation Model A Layer tabs Model Explorer and Hierarchy Tree B Left Hand Pane LHP C Time Processor Selector TPS D Right Hand Pane RHP Figure 4 1 attributes Explorer AE The AE opens when the software starts but 1s located out of the way with only a portion of
247. ere are not enough data to perform a certain analysis the software will prompt the user in a separate window with a message indicating the specific problem The more detailed settings are discussed further in the following subsections THE TOP AREA Clicking the Exploratory Analysis button will open the Exploratory Data Analysis window as shown in Figure 7 25 The window has a table on the right side and 4 tabs on the left The table on the right shows descriptive statistics of the selected data The four tabs to the left include Histogram PDF CDF and h Scatter plot Below the table there are two sliding bars to set parameters for h scatter Clicking on any of these tabs will show a graph of the required statistic The lag distance and tolerance for the h scatter plot can be set using the sliding bars given at the bottom right corner of the window Whenever lag distance or tolerance is altered the user should click the Draw button to update the scatter plot Similarly number of intervals for histogram CDF and PDF can be set in the bottom right area of this window 83 Exploratory Data Analysis Total Scatter Points Statistics h Scatterplot pairs Maximum Minimum M Variable Head n 300 Median Mode Vanance Standard deviation Skewness Coef of variation Lower Quartile 25 Upper Quartile Graph Parameters Number of Intervals 1 0 Scatterplot Lag h 11 m Sc
248. ere is no difference in software interface or function to distinguish the modes from each other and that the specialized stochastic displays discussed in Section 18 5 are not applicable to this mode MONTE CARLO SIMULATIONS The Monte Carlo mode is an extension of the single realization mode If this method is selected the software sequentially generates any number of model realizations that are statistically equivalent Based on these multiple realizations the user may examine a variety of parameters related to the entire set such as probabilities mean values and correlations of solution parameters through the advanced stochastic modeling display options discussed in Section 18 5 Clicking the Options button opposite to Monte Carlo Simulations in Model 1 Solver Settings window Figure 13 7 opens the Monte Carlo Simulation Settings window Figure 18 2 Monte Carlo Simulation Settings Initialization Settings nitialize flow for each realization Iw Initialize plume for each realization Initialize particles for each realization Simulation Termination Criterion lw Stop at 1 000 realizations Apply These MCS Solver Settings To Entire Model Hierarchy Cancel LK Figure 18 2 Monte Carlo Simulation Window Clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes in the software Clicking Cancel closes the window and ignores any changes Other options in this window are discussed as follows INITIALIZATIO
249. ertical directions The attributes of the scale bars may be set by clicking the button the appears to the right of Show Scale Bar in Horizontal Direction or Show Scale Bar in Vertical Direction as desired Clicking the button opens the Horizontal Scale Option or Vertical Scale Option respectively These windows are the same as those discussed in Section 19 1 Show Conceptual Model and Labels Area subsection Horizontal Scale Option and Vertical Scale Option subsections DISPLAY MARGINS FIELD The Top Space 15 by default as percentage and Bottom Space 10 by default as percentage fields allow the user to specify the amount of white space that should appear at the top of the window and the bottom of the window respectively These numbers should be entered as a percentage of the width of the window VERTICAL EXAGGERATION BAR This function allows the user to exaggerate the vertical distance in the model for better overall clarity Default value is v10 which is the square root of default anisotropy K K 16 6 Detailed Cross Section Information The following subsections briefly describe some details about IGW Version 5 0P cross sections that may be of interest to the user 16 6 1 Boundary Conditions In IGW Version 5 0P cross sections use constant head values as the boundary conditions at the terminal ends of the profile For confined aquifer the top and bo
250. es are placed in the model and each is assigned the same mass this is done implicitly by the software based on the number of particles released and the user specified concentration 2 Each particle is tracked using conventional techniques Any dispersivity retardation and reaction effects are incorporated 3 The concentration in each cell is determined based on the number particles present within it The Random Walk method is beneficial because it eliminates all numerical dispersion conserves mass and is computationally efficient However it 1s problematic in that 1 A continuous concentration plume is represented by a finite number of discrete particles therefore the number of particles used influences the results 2 It becomes less effective as dispersion effects increase and 3 Numerical difficulties arise in the presence of irregularly discretized space or stagnation zones created by sources sinks Refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual for further information and mathematical detail RANDOM WALK AREA In this area the user may view and specify a number of parameters associated with the random walk solver method These are listed below Number of Particles for Max Concentration This field indicates the number of particles that correspond to the maximum concentration in the model 500 is the default value Maximum Number of Particles Allowed In this field the user defines the maximum number of particles al
251. esolution button opens the Subdivisions between Min Max window as shown in Figure 18 19 This window allows the user to choose the resolution or number of bars for the PDF CDF and Histogram displays for the selected stochastic process in the Graphical Display area Subdivisions between Min Max Resolution Ink Seepage Flux Solute Flux Cancel Figure 18 19 Probability resolution for PDF CDF and Histograms for various parameters In the middle of the Display Options area the user can choose to display the Process the PDF the CDF or the Histogram Only one of these displays can be selected at a time Figure 18 18 shows the process for concentration PDF CDF and Histogram for concentration are shown in Figure 18 20 Also note that when PDF CDF or Hstgram is selected the Process Curve Choice and Variation w Realization areas become inactive Model 1 Probability at Pline 1003 Solute Flux Max Ib day Min 773926 brda Mean 45224 bday Model 1 Probability at Pline 1003 Solute Flux PDF Probability Solute Flux du Model 1 Probability at Pline 1003 Solute Flux CDF 5000 00 Total Solute Flux Solute Flux Solute Flux PDF Mex b day Mn 730 Mean 145224 Median 295 622 Mode 288228 Ave Err 344 168 5000 00 22 3 fb day Total Solute Flux Skewnes 202497 Kurtosis 5 64013 Probability Select a Paramet
252. etails Lag Distance Feet m Lag Distance Feet Definition _ Definition Log scale in horizontal Log scale in vertical Log scale in horizontal Log scale in vertical A Spherical B Exponential Variogram Open Multiscale Window Variogram Open Multiscale Window 300 300 Enlarge Enlarge 5000 10000 15000 20000 DES 5000 10000 15000 20000 DE Lag Distance Feet X Lag Distance Feet Definition Definition _Definiion Log scale in horizontal Log scale in vertical Defriin Log scale in horizontal Log scale in vertical C Gaussian D Power Figure 20 14 Manual Fitting of Semi Variogram Models 222 It is necessary to select the Preview button after changing model selection to re initialize the manual fitting process The parameters Nugget Range and Variance are illustrated in Figure 20 15 which is a semi variogram fit to log K data These parameters apply to the first three semi variogram models Spherical Exponential and Gaussian An experimental variogram is a plot showing the variance of data attributes in relation to the separation distance between the locations of the measured attributes The experimental variogram is calculated from a spatial data by averaging one half the differences squared of the z values over all pairs of observations using the specified separation distance h that is represented mathematically as h
253. etardation Factor Conductivity 164 041 Fanon Dry Ae wetting Criteria Kx Ky 1 Kx Kz 10 Orientation of Apply this setting to all other layers ELTE Orientation of 0 0e0 degree a Figure 6 1 Default Model Parameters The user simply specifies the desired values and units for the parameters of interest The software will apply the new default values to all subsequently created zones but only after the Apply this setting to all other layers button is selected The individual fields and nested button functions are described in the following section The parameters and buttons displayed in the Default Attribute window are addressed in this section Table 6 1 lists the parameters their basic definitions functions the default values and references to other parts of this document where they are explained in greater detail 50 6 2 Table 6 1 Default Values for Attributes Explorer Parameters DEFAULT DEFAULT REFERENCE 7 6 1 3 7 6 1 3 dimensionless 7 6 1 7 6 1 1 7 Software Starting Head Initial head in aquifer 10 7 6 1 1 Effective porosity of aquifer material dimensionless 7 6 1 1 Clicking this button activates random Random effective porosity field parameters containing several options Clicking this button opens the Random Option ae Parameters window Recharge into the aquifer 00e0 Checking this activates random recharge ME NN field EHE Clicking th
254. f the values in the data set e MEDIAN A value that divides the data set such that an equal number of data have values greater than and less than it e MODE The most frequently occurring value in the data set e VARIANCE This is the average squared difference of the observed values from their mean e STANDARD DEVIATION The square root of the variance e SKEWNESS It is the average cubed distance between the data values and their mean It is a parameter used to quantify the shape of the value distribution e COEFFICIENT OF VARIATION This is another parameter used to quantify the shape of the value distribution It 1s defined as the standard deviation divided by the mean e LOWER QUARTILE 25 Similar to the median except this is the value range that divides the data set such that 34 of the data have values greater than it while 4 of the data have values less than it e UPPER QUARTILE 75 This is the value range that divides the data set such that 1 4 of the data have values greater than it while 4 of the data have values less than it 11 1 The Graph Parameters Area In the Graph Parameters area the user may adjust settings that affect the plot and statistical analysis of the data They are briefly described in the following subsections NUMBER OF INTERVALS This value sets the number of intervals that the data is grouped into when displayed in the PDF CDF and Histogram This number will also slightly affect the value of t
255. far more stable than in just 300 realizations 199 Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Process 18 6243 Median fi2iirafpem Concentration SET 5 57 pem 18 1087 Skewnesd 0 90514 Realizations Select a Parameter to Visualize fe Peec Process Curve Choice le Ink C Head Conc PDF M Realization Mean EET CDF Mean Std Mean Std 7 Master Master Slaves Hstgram Variation w Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Iv Mean Std Figure 18 27 Master Slave Process and its Mean For more meaningful stochastic results it is always a good idea to have a larger number of realizations The decreasing fluctuation in Mean as the number of realizations increase is a good indication of whether or not enough of realizations have been generated Depending on the number of machines and processors available in a network the speed of generation realizations could be order of magnitude faster than would be possible on a single machine The example above just illustrates the point The user can take advantage of those machines in the system which are faster with more number of processor by allocating them more jobs This way the computing power in the network can be optimized When the number of realizations is large the graphical representation of Master Slave results can become too cluttered and it may become difficult to observe whether or not the fluctuation in Mean or other par
256. ficient Half Life awe Figure 7 6 Biochemical Properties RETARDATION FACTOR Retardation factor is a dimensionless parameter characterizing the retarding effect of adsorption on solute transport Mathematically the retardation factor R 1s defined by Equation 7 6 1 1 1 K d R 1 p 7 6 1 1 1 where K Partition coefficiet L M p bulk density ML 0 volumetric water content 1 Checking the box next to Retardation Factor allows the user to specify the R value By default R 1 Partition coefficient is explained in detail under the next heading Since R is related to partition coefficient K through Equation 7 6 1 1 1 the user can enter the value for either of the two parameters and the other one would adjust automatically PARTITIONING Kd The partition or distribution coefficient Kd describes a substance s affinity for sorbing to solid particles It relates the amount of solute i e water sorbed on the soil to the amount of chemical that is dissolved in the water and is defined by Equation 7 6 1 1 2 C K 7 6 1 1 2 C where concentration of substance sorbed to aquifer media mole C concentration of substance dissolved in aquifer water mole L 62 For organic contaminants it 1s also defined as the product of the organic carbon content foc and the organic carbon water partition coefficient Koo Checking the box next to Partitioning Kd allows the
257. field Selecting Percent of Max allows the user to specify in the appropriate field a percentage either as a decimal or percentage depending on the unit selected to determine the value based on the maximum value determined by the software The user must UNCHECK the Use Model Level Display Option if choosing Given Value or Percent of Max to implement these values in the model display If this box is left CHECKED which is the default setting the display will still use Data Limit option Please see Section 19 4 7 207 19 4 2 Velocity Display Options The Velocity Draw Option window is shown in Figure 19 8 Velocity Draw Option Uptions show Vector Every 1 Grids in Honzontal Direction Show Vector Every 1 Grids in Vertical Direction Vector Length pisels 30 Use Color Ramp Equal Vector Length LIF Lancel Figure 19 8 Display Options for Velocity Vectors Near the top of the window the user may change the spacing of the displayed velocity vectors based on the grid by adjusting the values for the horizontal and vertical directions The default values for each are 1 The user may specify the length in pixels of the vector associated with the highest velocity in the model by entering a value in the Max Vector Length pixels field The default value is 30 Checking the Use Color Ramp box instructs the software to display the velocity vectors as a continuum
258. for a step by step example of starting the software 6 INTERACTIVE GROUND WATER GIS enabled Computational Steering Environment for Integrated Determinitic Stochastic and Multiscale Modeling New Paradigm for Real Time Simulation Visualization Analysis and Presentation Laboratory of Excellence for Realtime Computing and Multiscale Modeling Copyright 1997 2006 at Michigan State University http www egr msu edu igw System Info Figure 2 1 IGW Version 5 0P Splash Screen Tip of the Day Xj Did you know Select a polygon then press lt Alt gt L ta add additional layers Frequently Asked Questions Step by Step Tutorial Online Help Iw Show tips on startup Figure 2 2 Tip of the Day Chapter 3 MAIN WINDOW INTERFACE One of the primary features of IGW Version 5 0P is that it is very intuitive helping the user to grasp the functionality of the software and the interface due to its logical layout Therefore the ideal place to begin a discussion of the software implementation is with the interface Sd Main Window Layout IGW Version 5 0P main window shown in Figure 3 1 is divided into 14 parts A through N to facilitate its functionality and explanation of items buttons zones etc The subsequent sections explain each of these 13 parts of the main window Interactive Groundwater 5 0P dw Untitled Modeling GIS 20 Visualization Display Help Total time
259. g IGW Model Files The user may save the current IGW Version 5 0P file by selecting Save Model to File on the File menu This opens the Save As window in which the user defines the desired path and types the desired file name Clicking the Save button closes the Save As window and opens the Message window with the text Do you want a description explaining the parameters in the IGW file Clicking the Yes button saves the file with extra explanation text as comments in the file Clicking the No button saves the file without the extra comments Clicking the Cancel button in the Save As window closes the window and aborts the file saving process IGW Version 5 0P files are saved with the extension igw and are in American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII text format 23 3 Editing IGW Model Files Advanced users may wish to edit GW Version 5 0P files using a text editing program such as Windows Notepad This may be useful in instances where batch file processing is desired to reduce redundancy and save time This feature may also be necessary in such instances as changing the location of the basemap IGW Version 5 0P files may be saved with extra parameters explaining comments to assist in manual file editing see Section 23 2 23 4 Exporting Data Head and concentration data may be stored by selecting Export Model Results for the current comp
260. g the desired value in the Treat value in inactive area as field Clicking OK creates the data file Clicking Cancel aborts the data exporting process after verification in a separate window The resulting 1gd file is an ASCII text formatted document with the first column being the x coordinate the second column the y coordinate and additional columns for each data set selected in the Output Data to File window top to bottom indicates the order of the columns in the text file The exporting data process only saves data at the indicated time of the simulation 23 5 Random Sampling The user may conduct a random sampling of the Working Area by selecting Random Sampling from the Utilities menu Section 3 3 5 This opens the Data Random Sampling window as shown in Figure 23 3 The user should first select a zone in the Working Area and then select Random Sampling from the Utilities menu The Total Nodes in Current Zone number indicates the total number of nodes available in the currently selected zone 282 Data Random Sampling Total nodes in current zone 1200 Number of random locations to sample 20 Seed 12345 Selected Variables w Hydraulic conductivity Nugget effect Head Top elevation n 0 0e0 W In Log scale File name IC temp ScatterPoints csv E Save Figure 23 3 Random Sampling The user may specify the number of points to be sa
261. ge of the head values in the surrounding cells Ave hn is greater than or equal to the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE plus epsilon Epsilon The second reads one head value in the surrounding cells hn is greater than or equal to the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE plus epsilon Epsilon This is the default selection The third reads the head in the cell h is less than the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE The fourth is again an expansion of the second allowing different values for h in the weighted equation 93 The user can specify a value for epsilon in the Epsilon field it must be in meters This epsilon is independent of the epsilon in the Wet to Dry area of this window The default value is 0 2 meters The user can also specify what value the head should take when re wetting occurs Again there are two options 1 h WETFCT Ave hn BotE BotE 2 h WETFCT THRESH BotE The first reads the head in the cell h equals the wetting factor WETFCT times the average of the differences of the surrounding cell head values and the bottom elevation of the aquifer Ave hn BotE all plus the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE This is the default selection The second reads the head 1n the cell h equals the wetting factor WETFCT times the threshold value THRESH all plus the bottom elevation of the aquifer BotE The wetting factor can be specified in
262. gical order the user would employ the features of the software interface if building a model from scratch For example Chapter 3 describes the main interface and the functions of the buttons These descriptions then direct the user to later chapters of the document that deal with each representative topic On the other hand the document is not exclusively sequential Each chapter is written to stand alone and any information necessary to understand the chapter is cross referenced Therefore the easiest way to learn a particular aspect of the software is to 1 Use the Table of Contents to find the appropriate chapter or sections 2 Read the appropriate selection and 3 Reference the indicated chapters sections documents to fill in the blanks Throughout the manual there are numerous INFO i texts that give important information to enhance the IGW experience Throughout the manual there are RECOMMENDATIONS that give an alternative way to run a particular feature or perform a procedure in IGW in order to make its functionality easier and more effective Boxed WARNING texts are used to warn the users about groundwater modeling aspects and operational use of IGW that may require more careful attention and evaluation during the operation Light gray text indicates features of the software that have not yet been implemented but may be incorporated in the later versions of its interface Throughout the manual some of the scre
263. h real time dynamic visualization of model simulations the user can decrease the time step when the plume particles are in a critical location usually with very high head gradients e g very close to a pumping well and keep the time step larger when the gradients are flatter d It is recommended to use smaller time steps for transport modeling since concentration in groundwater usually changes at a faster rate than hydraulic head changes 114 IGW Version 5 0P also provides the user a choice for visualization time step Since much of the software computational time may be spent refreshing the Working Area see Section 3 13 display adjusting the Visual Step to a higher number instructing the software to update the display less often may speed up the solution process 115 Chapter 12 GRID OPTIONS AND DISCRETIZING The following sections describe the IGW Version 5 0P functionality related to adjusting the nodal grid and discretizing the model features onto it 12 1 Defining Model Grid and Discretization interface for defining model grids within the model This window may be accessed by clicking the Deep Discretization button on the Button Palette or by clicking the Define Model Grid button on the Main Model entry in the AE The Define Model Grid deep discretization window see Figure 12 1 is the main eer Define Model Grid Model Setting Advanced 1 Length EN f Change
264. hange in head S has dimensions of L gt and is defined mathematically as S y a n p 7 6 1 1 2 where y density of water ML a compressibility of aquifer skeleton LT7M p effective porosity 1 Ne compressibility of water LT M 4 6x10 m N Selecting the box next to Specific Storage allows the user to specify a value The default value in the layer window is 3 048e 6 I ft The default entry for a model polygon is zero The available units of measure are 1 m 1 cm 1 ft and l inch EFFECTIVE POROSITY The effective porosity ye is the ratio of the actual pore space within the aquifer materials in which water can travel in x y and z directions The value of effective porosity becomes extremely important when modeling contaminant transport As clay material has a high porosity or ability to store water the effective porosity is orders of magnitude lower since the water is essentially trapped within the pore space unable to migrate The volumetric relationship of effective porosity is the ratio of the volume of voids to the total volume of material The default random ye distribution is activated by clicking the box next to the deactivated Random button Clicking the random button allows the user to change the settings for the random n distribution by opening the Random Parameters window see Appendix Selecting the box next to Effective Porosity allows the user to specify the n value and specify
265. hapefiles that contain line work that are used for display purposes only or shapefiles that contain hydrogeological attributes to be used for groundwater modeling or WHPA delineation studies The former are referred to as GIS mapping layers the latter as GIS model data layers In the GIS Layer Explorer these layers or shapefiles are grouped as Layers for Modeling or Layers for Mapping The Preview window at the bottom left of GIS Model Importer window displays the full extent of the imported GIS files Within the viewing area the user can use zoom in zoom out EJ and pan buttons to navigate through the GIS data files Please also see Sections 22 12 and 22 13 The GIS Layer Explorer may be turned on or off by selecting the Open Close Layer Explorer button Figure 22 6 22 4 Importing GIS Mapping Shapefiles GIS mapping layers are imported by selecting the Import Mapping Layer button on the GIS Model Importer toolbar Figure 22 7 246 GIS Model Importer IB mm E xr GIS Layer Explorer Layers for Modeling v Point Layers v 7 Polyline Layers MP Polygon Layers ME Lithology Layers 1s Layers for Mapping v Point Layers v 7 Polyline Layers Polygon Layers Raster Layers Import Mapping Layer Figure 22 7 Importing the Mapping Layer The GIS mapping layer shapefile to be imported is selected and opened in a second window The imported shapefile appears as a graphic within
266. he Font window This window is similar to the one in Figure 19 4 After adding the text click anywhere outside the text box and the text will appear in the Working Area Once a text is visible in the Working Area it may be selected by clicking the Select Text button and then clicking the cursor on the text Using the Text check uncheck box in the Conceptual Features and Text area user can choose to display or hide the text in the working area By default this box is checked 19 4 Simulation Input and Results Area In this area the user may choose to activate or deactivate visualization for Head Velocity Concentration Particles and Input Data five are active by default Clicking the lt button next to Head Velocity or Concentration opens up a separate window Display Option Head Velocity Display Option and Display Option Concentration respectively for further refinement of the display of these features These interfaces are discussed in the following subsections 206 19 4 1 Head Display Options The Draw Option Head window is shown in Figure 19 7 Model 1 Display Options Head Zoned Color filled Show Legend Iw Contoured Line Anchor E ast Color Color AM Orientation Vertical Thickness 1 pixels Type Continuous Line Style Solid Contour Color Levels 30 Minimum V
267. he Median Mode and Quartile values discussed above This is due to the fact that these values are calculated based upon the groupings of the data SCATTERPLOT LAG H This distance sets the range at which the data correlation analysis should occur The default value is 100 m This implies that the correlation analysis will be done for all pairs that are 100 m apart The tolerance is set at the value divided by 2 or in the default case 50 m Instead of only analyzing the pairs that are exactly the lag distance apart which realistically will be very few the analysis is performed for all pairs that lie within the lag distance plus the tolerance and the lag distance minus the tolerance in the default case between 150 and 50 m 11 1 The Graph Parameters Area 305 APPENDIX F SPATIAL STATISTICS PARAMETERS WINDOWS This appendix discusses the interface windows that are encountered when defining scatter point kriging or simulation settings Input Parameters Window The Input Parameters window is used to manually define the spatial statistics when kriging is being implemented An example of the default view of the window is shown in Figure F I 1 Input Parameters X V arnagram Model Geometry Type C Spherical sotropic C Anisotropic Parameters Nugget Sill C Gaussian Range Hole Exp Power fo Hole Gauss SOPE IDX A OF Cancel Figure F I 1 An example of th
268. he smallest integer that will yield at least 10 whole steps in the display Origin the default value is 0 0e0 the default unit 1s feet ft Factor default 1s 2 the factor indicates how often the distance should be displayed on the bar 2 instructs the software to display the distance at every other step The value associated with the origin is never displayed Color default is black and white choosing a different color will only change the black part on the scale bar Contour Color default is grey and Contour Width the default is 1 by entering numbers in the appropriate field These parameters are visually explained in Figure 19 3 Color Contour Color color of scale marker shown with red lines Contour Width width of red lines Step Width 5 km Thickness of scale bar 30 10 LL Figure 19 3 Scale parameters with some illustrative values attributes Origin 204 Clicking on Font Style this button opens Font window Figure 19 4 This window pertains to the font of the labels on the scale bar giving user the options to select font parameters Font style Bold Orr Size Bold Italic Cancel Tr Tennessee Heavy SF Tr Tennessee Light SF Tm Tennessee SF Effects Sample Strikeout Underline SBU Color BE Script Western This screen font The closest matching printer font will be used for printing Figure 19 4 Font Window Display Units ar
269. he water table as river head is useful when modeling cross sections of unconfined aquifers directly in the Working Area 8 5 3 Head Dependent Flux This field shown in Figure 8 5 allows the user to designate the polyline as either a 1 way or 2 way head dependent flux in the same manner that zones are designated in the AE Head Dependent Flus Figure 8 5 Head Dependent Flux area The user can specify the type of flux they prefer river or drain Using button opens the window as shown in Figure 8 6 for editing polyline coordinates and attributes The user can choose whether or not the recharge flux be added to the head dependent flux cells in the model by checking the box before Allow to Apply Rech 93 Edit Polyline Attributes Riv Stet 43 275633369286 426 264984411722 149 800269355221 601 031959407964 357 023975296609 615 179762145755 357 023975296609 617 67643321713 395 306266354055 636 817578097671 Change fi Save to Excel Do Linear Interpolation Cancel Figure 8 6 Editing Polyline Attributes for head dependent flux Notice that all the buttons one the right hand side are same as in Figure 8 4 They also function the same way as explained for Prescribed Head However you can see there are more columns in the table of values Units for all these values are given in the column headers The user cannot change the units Changing interpolating or saving the values to Excel
270. hen a feature entry is highlighted in LHP clicking on it a second time 1 e clicking on it again will allow the user to edit its name If entries in the LHP do not fit within the allocated space a scroll bar will appear at the bottom of the LHP to allow the user to pan over m the extent of the LHP The expansion button next to the layer tabs may also be used to enlarge the view of LHP 4 1 2 The Right hand Pane RHP The contents and appearance of RHP is dependent on what is selected in the LHP The RHP is where attributes are entered for the selected features of the model This section describes some RHPs corresponding to some model features and provides reference to RHPs related to other features 4 1 2 1 Project The RHP for the Project entry on the Project level is shown in Figure 4 3 The user may enter project identification data such as the name manager team etc to be stored in the file The user may also select the Preferences box and then define the directory path for either the project files or GIS files used in the model as shown in Figure 4 4 38 Project M ame Manager Team Location Description Preferences Figure 4 3 RHP for Project Identification Preferences Define Directory Path Project Files T GIS files m Add parameter descriptors when saving IG file Cancel OF Figure 4 4 Preferences Box for Project Screen 4 1 2 2 Main
271. herical Hole Exponential or Hole Gaussian Available fields are LambdaX LambdaY Seed Theoretical Variance Angle Rotation angle around coordinates and Nugget The default values can be observed by switching between Scale 1 and Scale 2 For all subsequent scales the default lambda values increase by an order of magnitude f Spectral Algorithm C Sequential Gaussian Simulation Lambdas 20 r Lambda ERN Lambda f LU Decomposition Algorithm Seed 756674 Theoretical variance EE Anisotropic Angle Hotate Around lt C Gaussian Spherical glel Angle Rotate Around Exponential Hole Exponential ngle Fiotate NO Hole Gaussian Angle Fotate Around RN Nugget 10 01 Cancel Figure B I IV I Simulated Annealing Options 292 B ll Random Parameters Window The Random Parameters window is shown in Figure 1 Random Parameters Independent of Ln Option C Correlated with Positive correlation Negative correlation Vanation 0 020 White noise 0 020 EE Figure B II 1 Random Parameters In the Random Parameters window the user may make two distnctions as to the relation to In K 1 Independent of LnK 2 Correlated with LnK Independent of LnK is the default selection This selection sets the target parameter as being completely independent of the conductivity If no further action is taken the default
272. iable conductivity in the upper layer and constant in the lower one gt Model 1 3D Visualization Figure 21 11 1 8 Cropped Model 233 Cropping can also be customized by selecting Customize Clicking options button will after Customize is selected opens the Customize Cropping window as shown in Figure 21 12 This window lets the user draw different shapes from the menu and select the layer in which the shape is to be applied Customize Cropping Reset Erase PETE PETE TTT TTT TTT EEE ERE ELE ARERR 551515 478283152 NM HHHH 213228 77277165 PTT TTT TT TTT TT 249 674400351281 EE Select layer 1 H From 1102 BREEBE DHBEEEHBEREBBEREN qu BERHBH PTT TTT TT TT TT TT TT fey 1 1111 coor Co P oip Apply to current C Apply to selected BEEN POT Brush size Small 1x1 POT BHEBHER Medium 3 3 POT C Large 5 x 5 E BENE Bana Figure 21 12 Customize Cropping window The user can experiment with options in this window to learn the effects which can be created in 3D visualization An example of customized cropping is shown in Figure 21 13 gt Model 1 3D Visualization
273. ian Spherical Lambda 530 38 C Exponential Hole Exponential seed 2542835 bombing model Variance 02 44 Mean Angle Clockwise Nugget 0 1 Cancel Figure F III 2 The Random Field Options Window Sequential Gaussian Simulation Variation gt Random Field Options BE xl Turning Band Variagram Model Spherical Exponential Lambda 530 38 Seed 2542835 Variance 102 44 Nugget 01 Block average f Mo C ves Figure F III 3 The Random Field Options Window Turning Bands Algorithm Variation 309 REFERENCES 310
274. iate position in the GIS Layer Explorer shown on the left side of the GIS Importer Window as a Point Layer Polyline Layer Polygon Layer or Lithologic Layer under Layers for Modeling Figure 22 10 The example shown in Figure 22 10 depicts the process of importing a point file containing wells as a model data layer GIS Model Importer See Layers for Modeling v Point Layers Expanded8 shp Look in O GIS files Vol 4 6 Fe 8 All Wells Expanded8 shp Mi Lithology La 8 A4ugusta Expandeds shp bd Layers for Mapping _ 8 Lakes Expanded8 manual shp Point Layers 1 E NHD_Expandeds shp M amp Polyline La SL e Rchg Expanded8 shp 8 Roads_Expanded8 shp 9 watershed AugCk shp Open well S 8 Wetlands Expanded8 shp shapefile Imp ort e d dit File name All els Expandec 8 sh My Network Files of type Shapefiles shp Y Open as read only wells shapefile Figure 22 10 Opening GIS Shapefiles as Mapping Layers Wells 248 22 6 Viewing the Shapef ile Data Table The data attributes associated with any of the imported shapefiles may be examined by displaying the data table for that shapefile This is done one of two ways The first method is to select a shapefile in the GIS Layer Explorer and selecting the Show Data Table button on the GIS Model Importer toolbar Figure 22 11 A data table for the entire selected shap
275. ibed head extracted Hydraulic Conductivity Specific Capacity Based C Litholoay Based g as IGW Basemap Sampling density Al Available Place all points within selection polygon modeling layers GIS selection polygon Cancel DK Figure 22 40 Scatter Point Extraction Filter Button Scatter Point Filter The Filter Setting window for the scatter points is the same as the window for the Well Filter Figure 22 33 22 17 4 Polyline Data Rivers streams and drains are specified in the MIV database as polyline shape files The user has the option of importing polylines as a prescribed head boundary Treat as prescribed head a head dependent river or drain Treat as head dependent flux or as an unspecified boundary Non specified Figure 22 41 If the user imports the polyline as a prescribed head a head value is assigned to the prescribed head boundary taken from an average of the Digital Elevation Model DEM values for the beginning and end of the polyline If no DEM values exist a prescribed head value of zero 1s assigned Within the IGW Modeling Environment the user may assign a site specific value that is more representative of stage elevation within that river or drain to these prescribed head polylines Polyline shapefiles that are imported as rivers or drains are assigned values for stage depth to stream or drain bottom riverbed or drain leakance These are obtained from a post pro
276. ic water level elevation Static water level Hydraulic Conductivity estimated from the WELLOGIC data Specific Capacity Based or from the GWIM project Lithology Based as scatter points to be exported into IGW The option box must be selected for each data type using the left mouse button in order to export these data Data type not selected will not be exported 263 With all scatter point data it is possible to specify the sampling density of data that will be extracted For many areas it is advisable to select All Available data points However in areas where there are large numbers of data points it may not be feasible to extract all data points In these areas it would be advisable to sample fewer data Other than exporting all data it is possible to select one out of every two three four five six ten fifteen twenty fifty and or a hundred data points The Static water level data has two export options These relate to the manner in which these data will be used within the IGW Modeling Environment If Starting head is selected the data represent the initial guess for hydraulic head for the model These values are not stored and will be changed during subsequent model simulations If Prescribed head is selected the data are imported as a prescribed head surface for the model These values are not changed during subsequent model simulations Extraction Criteria Point Layers M Jee ox WONS i Extract wells w
277. icates the desired path and file prefix to be used when saving the capture images The user may type the desired path in the box or may surf to it using the button the default is c temp The default prefix 15 cap START BUTTON This button begins the capture timer set in the ms field Capture will occur only if the External Calling Capture button is activated beforehand STOP BUTTON This button stops the capture timer after it is started using the Begin button as described above also see Section 23 1 2 RESET IMAGE COUNTER This button resets the image counter The counter starts with the number 0001 and counts up This number is added to the prefix as the file name for a particular image Resetting the counter will cause the software to overwrite preexisting files unless the path or prefix has been changed PREVIEW AREA This is the gray rectangle near the bottom left hand corner of the window It displays a preview of the last image captured 23 1 2 Motion Capture There are two ways to capture pictures using the settings in the Automatic Capture window The first is activated by clicking the Timing Capture button When this is selected the software will capture an image at every interval specified in the ms field in the Automatic Capture window This continues until the No Capture button is clicked The second is activated by clicking the External Calling Capture
278. ictures This chapter describes these options 23 1 Graphics Capture Capturing graphical output is very useful for subsequent use in papers and presentations The following subsections describe the options available to capture IGW Version 5 0P screens and output as images 23 1 1 Screen Capturing The Screen Capture Options window is the main interface for setting up screen capture functions It can be accessed by clicking the Set Capture Option button or by cas selecting Screen Capture from the Utility menu at row 12 column 4 of the button palette It is pictured in Figure 23 1 Screen Capture Options Capture Window by Caption Capture Actree Window W Capture Computational Area Capture User Defined Area Left Top width Height Define Storage Path and File Prefis Path and pretix 5 Preview Capture Interval 2000 a ms Start Reset Image Counter Figure 23 1 Screen Capture Options The user has various options for capturing the entire screen or portions thereof These are discussed in the following subsections Once the desired option has been defined clicking the OK button sets the desired function in the software CAPTURE WINDOW BY CAPTION Selecting this allows the user to enter the name of the window for capturing in the Caption field When capturing commences this window alone will be captured CAPTURE ACTIVE
279. ifth Hierarchical Level gt gt Sixth Hierarchical Level gt Seventh Hierarchical Level __ gt Current ErrorHead 8 3530E 04 atl 1 18 K 1 lt gt OldHead 5 9991E 01 New Head 6 0075E 01 Model 1 1 2 1 Current ErrorHead 5 3375E 04 atl 1 J 33 1 lt l gt Old Head 4 1152E 01 New Head 4 1206E 01 Model 1 2 2 2 1 Current ErrorHead 5 4830E 03 atl 41 1 1 lt l gt OldHead 1 2219E 00 New Head 1 2274 00 Model 1 1 2 1 1 Current ErrorHead 2 9048E 04 atl 1 J 49 K 1 lt gt OldHead 5 1567E 01 New Head 5 1596E 01 Model 1 1 2 1 1 1 Current ErrorHead 255 K 1 l OldHead 7 0845E 01 New Head 7 0861 01 1 Line Option Color IE Width pxl start Idx of Child stop Idx of Parent Adhere to Nodes SubModels Mass Balance Enor Bars Patching Main Model inContou M inColorMap Save Iteration Clear Close History Current ErrorHead 1 1630E 04 atl 1 47 K 1 lt gt Old Head 9 3536 01 New Head 3 3548E 01 Model 1 Current ErorHead 9 8513E 03 atl 28 J 5 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0224E 00 New Head 1 0322E 00 in Upscaling Forward done Upscaling Run done Iteration history display area Treemap objects control panel Figure 15 12 Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow window Parent and child models are represented by nodes at their respective levels connecte
280. in Mean Median Mode Ave 200 400 Std Total Seepage Flux 6 00 Skewness ydaj Kurtosis Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage C Solute C PDF Minden i ees Pi Mean Std Mean Realization Master MastersSlaves 9 7777 C Hstgram Std Realization CV Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Flux Across Polyline Seepage Flux Process CV ea ea ax m 3 day Min Mean Median Mode m 3 day Ave Err Total Seepage FluxiCoef of Variation Std 5000 10000 Realizations 15000 20000 Skewness y Kurtosis 3 38 Process Curve Choice Realization Mean Mean Std Show Stats on Mean Std Mean Realization C Master MastersSlaves Hstgram StdRealzation 7 EVI am Change Probability Resolution Select a Parameter to Visualize Process Seepage C Solute C PDF lizatiort 284 23 6 2 Polyline Flux Process File Stochastic process at polyline includes total solute flux and total seepage flux across a polyline for a number of realizations Data file in DAT format on these processes can be imported to IGW The required layout of the data file is shown in Figure 23 6 Sample Polyline Process dat Notepad ig EE File Edit Format wiew Help Data from Model 1 Probability at Pline yyyy Number of Realizations 9 9081E O1 0000ErT U 4 5149E 01 0 OO00E 00 S 856 7E O1 0000ErT U 1 7939E 00
281. in the required fields To assign starting head the user can select Sources and Sinks tab then Prescribed Head Conc sub tab In the Prescribed Head Conc sub tab check the box before Prescribed Head then check the radio button before Const and enter the value in the field The user can also assign following calibration values to the scatter points e head e concentration and To assign the above calibration values to the scatter points the user can select Calibration Data tab The user can check the required boxes and enter values in the fields 7 7 4 Importing Scatter Points from a file If there is large number of scatter points in a zone it may become tedious to individually define every point and assign its attributes as explained in Section 7 7 1 and Section 7 7 3 The scatter point information location coordinates as well as attributes for any number of scatter points can be arranged in a csv comma separated value file and directly imported into a zone selected in the model The text file has to be of a specific format as explained below A text editor window in Figure 7 22 shows a csv file for entering scatter points in a zone Its format is explained as follows 79 ScatterPoints007i csv Notepad File Edit Format View Help peed Points sample Data file a Layer 1 Zone zone 1001 Attributes 8 T X Y Cond Tope Bote ConstHead CalibHead calibconc 500000
282. in the workspace 215 Outlier Analysis 296 51 Standard Deviation 38 Index Mame Es Y Mean and 4 39000000053 55326791 20769691 267 Number of 39000000052 553247 26 20761475 265 79 standard 39000000051 553171 08 20755913 267 92 standard deviation 39000000059 55393795 20670782 264 87 m deviations 39000000061 55309331 206415 48 267 92 SSOOO00005 55413203 20 209 66 267 92 39000000071 552650 93 230640233 agen Detect Outliers Figure 20 8 Outlier Analysis Window If the user selects the Remove Outliers button the message window shown in Figure 20 9 opens The user should click Yes to remove the outliers Removal of outliers results only in the deletion of that particular scatter point attribute from the dataset All other values for other attributes at that data location are not removed Finally the user should click the OK button to complete the outlier analysis gt Outlier Analysis MeanzzBb 51 Outlier Identification Method standard D eviation 7 38 re 2 Std Dev Index Mame A Y Value 239000000053 553267 91 207536591 257 39000000052 553247 26 20761476 265 79 239000000051 553771 08 20755313 257 32 39000000059 39000000061 8 239000000097 3900000001 Detect Outliers 1 1 J Dn you wank to remove outliers Remove Outliers Remove Cancel Outliers Figure 20 9 Removing Outliers The user sh
283. indow or moving the window to the side of the monitor screen under the GIS Module Selecting Import Model from GIS Importer Figure 22 5 opens the GIS Model Importer window Figure 22 6 Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt C Do Fie Modeling Mek 3D visualization Utilities Disp Open GIS Importer Figure 22 5 Opening GIS Model Importer 245 22 3 GIS Model Importer Environment The GIS Model Importer environment is shown in Figure 22 5 There are three main areas in this window The toolbar is at the top of the window and the various buttons are used to import visualize and export attributes from the shapefiles to the IGW Modeling Environment Most of the buttons on this toolbar are inactive until shapefile layers have been imported The listing of the different shapefile layers on the left side of the GIS Model Importer window is referred to as the GIS Layer Explorer The window on the right side of the GIS Model Importer window is referred to as the GIS Viewing Window GIS Model Importer Sele Te 8 2 Layers for Modeling Point Layers v 7 Polyline Layers M Polygon Layers Open Close Lithology Layers Layer Layers for Mapping Point Layers Explorer Toolbar v 7 Polyline Layers M Polygon Layers Raster Layers GIS Layer Explorer Preview Area GIS Viewing Area Figure 22 6 GIS Model Importer Environment Within the GIS Model Importer the user has the ability to import s
284. ing area the user can assess AE and see that all submodel can be seen in TPS please refer to Section 4 1 3 for TPS window as well If the box next to a submodel is checked that model will appear as a separate window on the screen By default these boxes are already checked Every submodel created by the user appears in a separate window as soon as the model is discretized TPS with submodels are shown in Figure 15 7 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree E B5 Project 2 s Vertical Grid i at oe 0 Vertical Extent B Zones 1001 ue 1 Boundary Layer 2 Bs ta a EE Bottom Boundary Layer 3 Ge 1001 Y Length hu Layer 2 P Zores 2001 DX Computational Layers Zone 3001 Bs 2001 ns T wet 2001 xiz wv tz Zores 3001 C DXA C DYA 2 DY 2 fine ae s DX 3 s Dv 3 Well 3002 C Dx C DYA Bg hi Model 1 1 C DX 5 C DY 5 2 6 Cross sections et Cross section 1 Pancake B Model 1 1 1 q Display This Model Options 2 Cross sections d Fi IL Use Model Level Display Option Submodel Solvers 2 DH Model 1 1 1 71 ES Model 1 1 1 window Select the check boxes in this area to display submodels in a separate window amp Figure 15 7 submodels seen in TPS 15 10 Submodel Window For each submodel defined a separate window titled Model X X where X X is a software assigned number please r
285. ings when displaying water balance information These groupings have the sole purpose to help with tracking overall water budgets for different area based groupings of lake polygons No matter what name is assigned to a lake polygon it will not have any impact on the modeling calculations The same procedures are used if polygons representing rivers are imported The same windows as displayed for the lake polygons will open for these river polygons Selecting the Options button opposite the Wetlands polygon layer in Figure 22 44 will open the window shown in Figure 22 46 There are five categories that generally describe the frequency of flooding of wetlands listed under Description The user has the option of specifying the leakance rate and the head dependent equation that will be solved for that wetland category As always any of these settings may be changed for individual polygons within IGW 212 Wetland Assign Leakance Elevation Leakance Head Dependent Two Way One Way Permanently Flooded 10 005 C Seasonally Flooded 10 01 fe Intermittentlu Flooded 10 05 2 fo Description Leakance 1 Saturated 1071 Temporarily Exposed 1 Constant 10 003 Elevation Iw Import bottom as stage minus 1 EN Figure 22 46 Wetland Lookup Table With the Polygon Size Filter it is possible to use size of the polygon area as a criterion for extracting additional polygons The user can extract all polygons ex
286. interactive exploration of the AE 34 4 1 The Model Explorer The Model Explorer is where model features are selected and attributes defined It is divided into three main portions viz Left Hand Pane LHP Right Hand Pane RHP and Time Processor Selector TPS These three portions are highlighted in Figure 4 1 LHP displays a hierarchical representation of the model features for easy selection RHP shows the present attributes for the feature selected in the LHP and allows for changing them TPS shows all processes in the model which are time dependent eg water budget concentrations etc Each of these are discussed in more details in the following sections 4 1 1 The Left hand Pane LHP Notice the hierarchy of model features They can be selected by simply clicking on the desired feature When a feature is selected the RHP changes accordingly Each entry group has a box next to it with either a or indicating that the group can be expanded to show either individual features subgroups within it or collapsed to hide them The first hierarchical level is called Project Here the user may enter information concerning the overall project The second hierarchical level is called Main Model The associated interface simply provides alternate access to some of the more commonly used buttons from the Button Palette The submodel and cross section groups also appear at this level The third hierarchical lev
287. ion 5 0P Tutorials document for examples of utilizing this interface 205 The settings associated with Periodic fluctuation with exponential decay and Random fluctuation areas are discussed in Table C I I Table C I I Fields Associated With Periodic and Random Fluctuations DEFAULT DEFAULT OTHER GROUP ATTRIBUTE DEFINITION VALUE AVAILABLE ub UNITS Period Phase ee difference Periodic fluctuation with Decay constant exponential decay Amplitude Recycle Period Correlation scale Random fluctuation Recycle Period The amount of time it takes for the periodic fluctuation to repeat The amount of time the start of the periodic cycle is offset from day 0 A value quantifying how quickly the periodic fluctuation attenuates The greatest amount fluctuation experienced in the periodic cycle The amount of time it takes for the periodic fluctuation to reset independent of period The segment of time that each random point should correlated with The amount of time it takes for the random fluctuation to reset hour sec month year hour sec month year hour 1 sec month 1 year cm ft inch hour sec month year hour sec month year hour sec month year Clicking the Redraw button updates the visualization of the trend and fluctuations in the preview pane the lower half of the Transient Settings window changes made and closes the window The Data Points Window
288. ion allows the user to add multiple layers at once in the model Add new layer s How many new layers will be added Figure 12 2 new layer s window The desired number of new layers in the model are added below the existing layers by default However before adding the layers in the model Set Layers Position window pops up as shown in Figure 12 3 Using the up and down arrows user can adjust the location of the new layer s between the existing layers Set Layers Position Cancel Figure 12 3 Set Layers Position window By clicking OK in Set Layers Position window a message window pops up Figure 12 4 Bl Interactive Groundwater 5 0P 1 Insert the new layer s here will cause any submodels derived From this model to be changed are you sure to do this Figure 12 4 Message window 118 By clicking Yes in the message window the software adds the decided number of layers in the model at the selected positions 12 2 2 Adding Computational Layers in Geological Layers The user can also create multiple computational layers by clicking on Define Number of Computational Layers button in Define Model Grid window Figure 12 1 Clicking the Define number of computational layers button brings up the Vertical Discretization window Here the user can click on the desired geological layer and create multiple vertical computational layers in it Also same number of computational layers ca
289. ion area is shown in Figure 17 2 Its functions are performed only and automatically with the existing Head array User does not need to assign or select the Head array prior to performing these functions Clicking on Copy to Calibration Head button assigns the values in the Head array to the Calibration Head array Copy to Calibration Head Clicking on Make Prescribed Head button assigns Head array values as prescribed head in the model This option is used when the stress on the hydraulic head is not changed during the analysis Make Prescribed Head 171 Selecting this feature allows the user to simulate drawdown in the model 1 e in a well using the Theis Equation Information about this function can be found in the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual Supermpase hes Drawdowr 17 4 Array Calculator Clicking on the Array Calculator button opens an Array Calculator interface as shown in Figure 17 6 Array Calculator This interface is not fully functional in JGW Version 5 0P The operations buttons shown on this interface will become functional in later versions of JGW Array Calculator Fick Array rH EIER RN Save As Array View Graph Er 11118153 n3 BEBE A qe uj ME i Figure 17 6 Array Calculator Interface not functional in IGW Version 5 0 17 5 Drawdown Model In many groundwater modeli
290. ion to those previous are available to be adjusted This includes those in the Parameters area within the Experimental Variogram area Influence of radius and Number of lags and Principal Angle Bandwidth and Angle Tolerance when anisotropic is selected and those in the Parameters area within the Theoretical Model area Nugget Range and Variance Note that when anisotropic 1s selected this area will display additional fields for the second direction values for these settings adjustable along with the average of the two directions not adjustable The Plot Options area provides for control of the display in the Variogram Model area The user may choose to deactivate uncheck or activate check the display of the data Experiment data direction 1 and the model Model direction1 as desired If anisotropic is selected the user may also adjust the display for the second direction Experiment data direction 2 and Model direction 2 and the average Model with average variance and nugget The Large Graph button can be clicked to open a separate larger window with these plots displayed in it Clicking the OK button sets the changes in the software and closes the window Clicking the Cancel button closes the window and discards the changes The Random Field Option Window The Random Field Option
291. ironment If the user decides to perform a second extraction it 1s important to uncheck all data types previously exported to IGW Otherwise a second set of the same data will be exported to IGW Duplicate data may create problems in the conceptual model 21 The user may find that it is more efficient in terms of data processing time to simply delete all data from the previous extraction and perform a new extraction that includes the previously extracted data and new data This will depend on the size of the area and the number of data involved The more data involved the more likely that it will be more efficient to delete all previously extracted data and perform a new extraction 22 17 9 Importing GIS Files From an Anonymous Database In order to transfer GIS data to IGW modeling environment IGW needs two different types of GIS files 1 Shape file shp and 2 Database file dbf The IGW GIS Interface has been designed to recognize the GIS files from Statewide Groundwater Database for Michigan In order to import a GIS file from another database the user should match the database structure of IGW GIS protocol If the user has a readily available database for a groundwater system other than that of Michigan then they can simply use that database after making slight modifications to the spreadsheet file 278 Chapter 23 FILE FEATURES IGW Version 5 0P offers the user many options for saving files data and p
292. is button allows the user the select a zone within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to select mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within a zone in the Working Area to select it This 1s alternatively referred to as making the zone active When a feature is selected it appears outlined in red in the Working Area and highlighted in the Attribute Explore AE window This process is described further in Section 7 2 Select Edit Polyline 3 3 Clicking this button allows the user the select a polyline within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to select mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click on a polyline in the Working Area to select it This is alternatively referred to as making the polyline active When a feature is selected it appears outlined in red in the Working Area and highlighted in the Attribute Explore AE window see Section Error Reference source not ound This process is described further in Section 8 2 19 Q Select Edit Well 3 4 Clicking this button allows the user the select a well within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to select mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click on a well in the Working Area to select it This is alternatively referred to as making the well active When a feature is selected it appears outlined in red in the Working Area and highlight
293. is button opens the Option of NN Option Unconditional Random Field Attr window 164041 Conductivity of the aquifer material 164 041 Checking this activates random MESS conductivity field Clicking this button opens the Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr window ee d dimensionless 7 6 1 1 dimensionless 7 6 1 1 Kx Ky X VS y direction isotropy ratio X vs Z direction isotropy ratio Orientation of anisotropy in the x y plane 0 0e0 degrees 7 6 1 1 Kx Ky lips Orientation of anisotropy in x z plane 7 6 1 1 Partitioning Coeff Partition coefficient of the aquifer 10e 10 7 6 1 1 Kd material Randon Checking this activates random partitioning coefficient field Clicking this button opens the Random Option ME Parameters window Soil Par cle The soil particle density of the aquifer 2 65e46 7 6 1 1 Density material 1 00088 None Des Rawat Clicking this button opens the Default eT Desaturation Re wetting Cell Criteria Criteria window if unchecked the default value is zero not explicitly definable in IGW it is a function of Kd and the bulk density ignore the 1 00000 in the field see subsection with parameter name within the listed section see Starting Head in Section 7 6 1 1 for information details of default starting head values 0 3 1 10 N 2 Attribute Priority Protocol IGW will assign zone at
294. is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within the Working Area to define points that correspond to the desired cross section line segment endpoints The cross section creation process and other implementation information is discussed further in Chapter 16 This process is discussed further in Section 16 2 Deep Discretization 7 1 Clicking this button allows the user to adjust the nodal grid by opening the Define Model Grid window More information concerning the nodal grid 1s available in Chapter 12 Shallow Discretization 7 2 Clicking this button applies the changes made in a conceptual model onto the numerical model also referred to as discretizing the changes More information concerning model discretization is presented in Chapter 12 Create Submodel 7 3 Clicking this button allows the user to define a submodel polygon within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click within the Working Area to define points that denote the outline of the desired submodel Use of this button is discussed in Section 15 1 The submodel creation process and other implementation information is discussed further in Chapter 15 Select Edit Submodel 7 4 Clicking this button allows the user to select a submodel within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to select mode see Section 3 16 and the u
295. isplay also appears in a separate window called the MCS Field Statistics window as shown in Figure 18 11 interactive Groundwater 5 00 Untitled E COU Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 8 days 0 02 years In Realization 12 Ges 1 m mb coi em Tine ured m nmang 156 46535 Modei 1 Flow Computabomt Comvesge m 10 2 Itesabons Lpckes Figure 18 11 mcs Field Statistics window and the main model display The display in MCS Field Statistics window is updated after every realization For example in Figure 18 11 the main model displays the results of 12 simulation whereas the MCS Field Statistics window displays the mean of these 12 realizations for velocity concentration head and conductivity etc Display in the MCS Field Statistics window can also be modified by the user by simply right clicking anywhere within the window and selecting Draw Options from the pop up menu as shown in Figure 18 12 This will lead the user back to MCS Means amp Variance window in which user can select a parameter and click edit to change draw options Figure 18 9 and Figure 18 10 187 MCS Field Statistics Model 1 Master Machine No 0 Refresh Draw Option Show 3D Surface ExportData 1 ae Comp 1 ee Figure 18 12 Draw options for MCS Field Statistics window 18 5 2 2 Observing Point Processes To observe stochastic processes at a point the user can define a monit
296. it The user can then click the button which opens the Transient Settings window Refer to Appendix C I for more information The user can also specify constant or transient concentrations in the water body by using the appropriate fields in this area Bottom Elevation Area The river bottom elevation is specified by selecting Constant default and entering a value in the field 98 425 feet 1s the default value entry The available units of measure are feet ft the default centimeters cm meters m and inches in The river bottom may also be set to the same as the surface elevation by selecting Same as Surface Elevation This allows the user to take advantage of topographical data 1 e placing a river in a ground surface depression etc The software automatically turns off the river function in cells where the stage becomes less than the ground elevation Leakance Area The leakance L with a dimension of T is defined as the discharge per unit area per unit head difference It 1s assigned to the zone or the water body to establish the relative hydraulic connection between the feature and the aquifer A higher leakance value indicates a stronger connection The flux q from the zone to the aquifer is calculated in the software as r h if h gt rivbot L h rivbot if lt rivbot 7 6 1 2 2 where q specific discharge out of the zone LT h head stage in the zone L h
297. ith zera or unknown pumping capat Import well data as scatter point data for i Scatter point sampling Iw Use E 00 for wells with following density May spe D interpolation differently for all scatter point data types Sampling density Al I Reported ero or unknown M Jina as xcolfer por Option to import i Top elevation surface elevation DEM DEM or bedrock top t Bedrock top from well file to define 7 Option to import top of model layer top bedrock elevation or well bottom to define model layer bottom density All Available Sampling density AI Available F sampling density All Available f Bottom af well iw Static water level Starting head Filter for determining Prescribed head which method of T Option to read in static water estimating hydraulic REUS e level elevation and save the conductivity will be Specific Capacity Based s data as the model starting employed head or as prescribed heads Samp Sampling density AI Avail Figure 22 34 Scatter Point Extracting Criteria 22 17 3 Estimation of Hydraulic Conductivity It is possible to use the information extracted from the WELLOGIC or GWIM databases for obtaining initial estimates of hydraulic conductivity to be exported to the IGW Modeling Environment Care should be taken when using either dataset as they are based on information reported by water well dril
298. ity z Figure 21 3 Drop Down List for Display Variables 21 1 2 Draw Options Selecting this button opens a vast array of drawing options to the user There are thirteen different functions within this region and each has several sub options A detailed discussion of each of these options follows Draw Options 21 1 3 3D Chart Control Properties 3D chart control properties Figure 21 4 are briefly given at Table 21 1 The user should remember that they can always find out the best settings to demonstrate the model in a descriptive fashion 221 Table 21 1 TAB 3D Chart Control Properties 3D CHART CONTROL PROPERTIES SUB BUTTONS FUNCTION Loading saving 2D chart files in oc2 format Border Changing the style of the border distance of the title and legend on the chart Control border Axes Changing the color of the border and the grids of the chart Uploading image file to the background of the chart Credits for the manufacturer of the chart interface Changing the label and view of the axes Changing the scale of the axes Adding title and changing font style font size of the title Adding removing gridlines for axes Changing number of intervals for the axes Changing font style font size of the axes Changing the style bar surface and the view of the chart Loading editing data changing grid size Chart Adding removing modifying labels Group Changing the color of chart group comp
299. ive see Section 7 2 If no zone is active when attempting to add a scatter point a Message window will appear with the text You should define at least one zone first Clicking the OK button closes the window After the appropriate zone has been made active the next step is to click the Add Scatter Point button This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now define a scatter point in the Working Area by simply clicking the mouse at the desired location Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for each scatter point in the VCI Section 3 13 instead of clicking the mouse at each location This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and allows for more accurate placement of scatter points within the Working Area When a scatter point is defined in the Working Area it becomes the active feature See Figure 7 20 At this point the cursor 1s still in draw mode and the user may continue to add scatter points as desired 77 Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 7 20 scatter Points in the Working Area Scatter points may be defined anywhere within the Working Area regardless of the size of the selected zone Scatter points defined outside of the zone will still contribute to the interpolation simulation scheme for the selected zone in the same fashion as those defined within the zone and still affect only that zone Therefore the user should en
300. iven Values for maximum and minimum range of the attribute being represented by color gradient and or contour lines please also refer to Section 19 4 1 Parent Model Child Model Interface 15 5 The following subsections briefly describe some details about IGW submodels that may be of interest to the user 15 4 1 Boundary Conditions In GW Version 5 0P submodels use constant head or constant flux values as the boundary conditions These values are taken from the window in which the particular submodel was drawn For instance a submodel drawn in the Working Area will use the main model for its boundary conditions while a submodel drawn in a submodel window will use that submodel for its boundary conditions Please refer to Section 15 5 2 for how these conditions are defined for the submodels 15 4 2 Starting Head The starting heads associated with the submodel solver iterations are taken from the parent model Each node excluding the constant head boundary nodes is given a starting head value that is determined by linear interpolation between each node in the parent model 15 4 3 Parameter Interpolation The parameters associated with each node in a particular submodel are taken from the parent model The values are assigned based on linear interpolation between each node in the parent model Assigning Attributes to Submodels User can define assign various attributes to the submodels using the three tabs in the AE as sh
301. ivisions left Hierarchical submodel network right The concept is further illustrated in IGW modeling environment in Figure 15 9 It presents the final hierarchical solutions that characterize a heterogeneous system in response to various sources sinks including the well fields and surface water bodies The solutions capture both the regional and local dynamics and provide important information for integrated management The example in Figure 15 9 shows a total of 16 submodels in 7 levels zooming into 4 focused areas In general the number of levels and submodels needed to achieve desired resolutions depends on what the modeling objectives are how complex the problem is and how powerful the computer is 149 Contamination plumes Figure 15 9 Example of hierarchical modeling a Hierarchical patch solution in the model b Hierarchical patch network for modeling levels This window is the same as described in Section 15 5 1 Additionally the options to select the computational layers to be involved are offered in this layer as well 15 11 2 Submodel Naming Convention A submodel drawn within another submodel will appear in the LHP of the AE see Section 4 1 1 at the Layer Submodel level It appears the same as a submodel drawn in the Working Area but will retain the name of its parent submodel a x where a is the model name and x is a number This indicates that its boundary conditions are associa
302. k one of the computers can act as the Master machine and others as Slaves The Master can assign separate tasks to the slave machines within the network 18 7 1 Prerequisites To enable a net work for parallel computing in GW Version 5 0P open source Message Passing Interface MPICH2 should be run on machines in the system which the user wants to employ for parallel computing MPICH2 is an open source file and can be downloaded at http phase hpcc p mirrors mpi mpich2 Each machine should be given one of the names that appears in Parallel Hosts and Tasks window Figure 18 25 Currently GW Version 5 0P code is customized to these 12 name the names are based on the network where the software is being developed To setup the network follow these steps 1 Install MPICH2 on machines in the network that you want to use for parallel computing 2 Check connections by running config exe of MPICH2 3 Map a network drive with the name S network drive name other than S is not supported by GW Version 5 0P code 4 Put IGW exe VBMPIEXE exe andrelated DLL files to S drive 5 Save the following script shown in as a text file at a desired location on all machines The file should be named IGWMPI3D txt P TGWMPISDExE Notepad EJES File Edit Format View Help Exe S iXIGWSDMPI HM2 28xe Bum default extra localranat window no no Figure 18 22 iGwwPi3D text With this setup any machine
303. l 235 Figure 21 16 3D Visualization Options for Scatter Points 236 Pisure 21 17 Leeend Window seeen erat orum rasa tee po toan ome as E oce EP oss tUa 236 Figure 21 18 3D Visualization Options for Demonstrating Volume 237 Figure 21 19 3D Visualization Options for Demonstrating Surfaces 25 Figure 21 20 3D Visualization Options for 238 Figure 21 21 3D Visualization Options for Particles 238 Figure 21 22 Drape On Site Map Window eese 239 Figure 21 23 Lighting Options for 3D Visualization 239 Figure 21 24 Miscellaneous Options for 3D Visualization 240 Figure 21 25 3D Volume Grid View Manipulation Windows 241 Figure 22 1 Opening the County Based 5515 243 Figure 22 2 County Based Assistant Window esee 244 Fi50re 22 5 electie C OUTLIGS oh dat heu eie Exe npa qud amar acce es doen Uma P RD su E qae E 244 Figure 22 4 County UN a Ren ra Quem e a pus a aae dede 245 Figure 22 5 Opening GIS Model 245 Figure 22 6 GIS Model Importer Environment eterne retro tenen rennen 246
304. l size 1 t TrueType F Upward Diagonal Outline C Downward Diagonal Color Solid line Cross C Dash line Diagonal Cross C Light Gray Fill Outline i Show outline color C Dash Dot line Gray Fill vw Visible in IG Dash Dot Dot line C DarkGray Fill Show labels Apply Choose field FID BARRY Cancel Font Sampe lth Figure 22 17 Changing the Symbol Display Polygons The selected shapefile in this example are lake polygons In this case only the choices under Fill Color Size Outline and Polygon Symbol in the Change symbol window are active Those associated with point and polyline shapefiles Point Symbol and Polyline Symbol are inactive and cannot be selected or changed With polygons it is possible to change the outline color and weight fill color and fill pattern It should be noted that all fill patterns other than Solid are somewhat transparent The Transparent option makes the view completely transparent and does not use the fill color shown in the Fill Color box Options Horizontal through Diagonal Cross indicates the orientation of lines comprising the fill pattern The color of the lines is defined by the color shown in the Fill Color box The space between lines is completely transparent allowing any shapefiles beneath these polygons to be visible Light Gray Fill Gray Fill and Dark Gray Fill approximately represent 75 50 and 25 transparency respectively
305. l Simulation method except the values for the locations corresponding to the measured values are held equal to those values when the field is generated There are two options available in the Simulation Methods area when this procedure is selected 1 Spectral Algorithm the default and 2 Sequential Gaussian Simulation 18 5 Display Options Monitoring There are a number of display and monitoring options that are available with respect to stochastic modeling in GW Version 5 0P These options allow the user to visualize real time stochastic simulations and results as the simulations go The options are discussed in the following subsections 18 5 1 Main Model Display Options After desired stochastic modeling mode has been selected see Section 18 3 clicking the Set Display Options button opens the display settings for the main model These options are exactly the same as discussed in Section 19 1 These options apply to the model display in the main Working Area of GW Version 5 0P interface The user should note that when the display options are accessed in Monte Carlo Simulations mode the Monte Carlo Simulation Results area becomes active This area has two buttons viz Means and Variances and Realizations as shown in Figure 18 8 Realizations button is not active in GW Version 5 0P Means and Variances button is discussed in the next section Display Options for Model 1 Reference
306. le Exponential or Bombing model Available fields are LambdaX LambdaY Seed Theoretical Variance Angle Rotation angle around coordinates and Nugget are available The default values can be observed by switching between Scale 1 and Scale 2 For all subsequent scales the default lambda values increase by an order of magnitude 1 11 Turning Bands Algorithm If this method is chosen the main portion of the Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr window appears as shown in Figure B I III 1 291 C Spectral Algorithm C Sequential Gaussian Simulation C Simulated Annealing Turning Band V anagram Model f Spherical Exponential Lambda 100 Seed 10081 g7 Variance 0 9 jot LIF Cancel Figure B I III 1 Turning Bands Algorithm Options The user has the option in the Variogram Model area of choosing either a Spherical model the default for all scales or an Exponential model The four available parameter fields are Lambda Seed Variance and Nugget with default values of 100 a random seed number 0 9 and 0 01 respectively for all scales B I IV Simulated Annealing If this method is chosen the main portion of the Option of Unconditional Random Field window appears as shown in Figure B I IV 1 The user may subsequently select in the Model area which Anisotropic model to employ The options are Gaussian Exponential the default for all scales Sp
307. le and Basemap Load Basemap Please register the following Real World Coordinates ft t X Length Bo Y Length 2500 Figure 5 2 Model Scale and Basemap window 46 Currently IGW Version 5 0P provides support for BMP BitMaP GIF Graphic Interchange Format JPG Joint Progressive Experts Group SHP SHaPefile and DXF AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format file types If a raster type file is selected BMP GIF or JPG it must be vectorized through the process outlined in Section 5 2 1 Vector type pictures do not need to be vectorized therefore the import process is simpler It is described in Section 5 2 2 5 2 1 Vectorization of raster pictures The vectorization process begins with the appearance of the Vectorization of Raster Pictures window as shown in Figure 5 3 Vectorization of Raster Pictures Length Length 528 ZI C Manually Mo FPimelx Pixel Reals Heal Y T mm Figure 5 9 of Raster Pictures The window will appear with a preview of the selected picture in the white rectangular preview pane with Automatically selected by defau
308. lers and not carefully controlled in situ testing There are two methods of obtaining these estimates 264 1 Using specific capacity calculated from data obtained from well logs Specific Capacity Based or 2 Using the hydraulic conductivity estimated on the basis of aquifer lithology Lithology Based These methods are selected by checking the Hydraulic Conductivity box and then selecting either radio button shown in Figure 22 35 i Hydraulic Conductivity Specific Capacity Based s Sampling denzity All Available Figure 22 35 Selecting the Method for Calculating Hydraulic Conductivity After selecting Specific Capacity Based option the following window opens Figure 22 36 There are four different methods for estimating transmissivity from specific capacity information The first three methods Theis Bradbury and Rothschild and Modified Theis are based on variations of the Theis non equilibrium well hydraulics model Input parameter values used only when using the Theis or Bradbury Rothschild methods Specific Capacity Based K Transmissivity Calculation Methods Iteration Settings Maximal number of iteration 5 Starting Transmissivity 2 25Tt icient 0 0001 gt Bradbuy and T Q 1 n k 25 Default storage coefficient Flothschiid 47 5 5 rs Default radius 0 5 Po Default test hours 0 04168 Q Modified Theis 2000 W
309. lls rivers and geological layers etc They also show modeling results such as velocity vectors static head contours and static water line blue dotted line at the top Geological layers appear in different colors in the cross sections while the computational layers are separated by dotted lines yellow dotted lines between the layers User has options to change the appearance as well as vertical exaggeration of the cross section The active computational layer in the cross section is bounded by a thick red line Cross section 1 Figure 16 1 typical cross section The following sections describe the implementation and functionality of cross sections A series of line segments called Poly linear profile models can be created The entire defined section is projected into a two dimensional window and appears as a simple cross section Currently IGW Version 5 0P does not indicate any three dimensional attributes in the profile model window so for complex cross sections keep in mind what it 1s that 1s displayed 16 1 Defining Cross Sections The first step in defining a cross section is clicking the Define a Cross section button This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now define a cross section in the Working Area by simply clicking the mouse at points along the desired series of line segments same methodology as defining a polyline Section 8 1 Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for each lin
310. lowed in the model The default value is 10 000 Number of Particles Actually Released This field displays the number of particles that currently exist in the model O by default Release Particles This button allows the user to release the particles into the model at their discretion 13 3 4 Display Mode The display mode simply allows the user to determine if they want the contaminant to appear as either particles 1 e a discreet simulation or as a concentration plume within the model i e a continuous simulation Concentration plumes will show more of history of overall movement of contaminants over time whereas particles will show an active location for the head of the contamination plume not recording where the plume has been in previous time steps 13 3 5 Display Options This field allows the user to determine the size of their particles on the screen and the color they would like these to appear using the color button and associated palette 130 13 3 6 Matrix Solver This region is identical to the section discussed in Section 13 1 1 MATRIX SOLUTION CONVERGENCE CRITERIA In this area the user may specify the maximum number of iterations to be used in the MMOC Solver in the Max Iterations field The default value is 4000 The user may also specify the convergence error value as the change in concentration divided by the original concentration in dC the Relative Tolerance field The default value is 0
311. lt The YO XLength and YLength fields associated with the automatic vectorization process will display the software default values The XLength and YLength fields correspond to the same variables in the Model Scale and Basemap window and shown in Table 5 1 The X0 and YO fields in this case are used to enter the Working Area coordinates of the basemap origin At this point the user can only specify YO and XLength The YLength field is calculated automatically based on the pixel dimensions of the picture The Manually setting may be selected if the user desires more control over the vectorization process Once the user has entered the desired settings clicking the OK button returns the user to the Model Scale and Basemap window Figure 5 1 The window will have the desired picture in the preview pane the desired coordinate and scale values entered and additional information concerning the file location and other attributes displayed to the left of the preview pane 47 The software assumes that the information contained in shapefiles shp is given with meters as the unit of measure If this is not the case the user must convert the file information before importing it into IGW The user now has a couple of options at this point They may click the Load Basemap button to combine another picture with the current one see Section 5 3 The user may click the Clear Basemap button to clear all b
312. lt text Input Title Please input new title Cancel In the bottom three rows user can add any desired text Clicking once anywhere in the desired row opens the Input Notes window The user can add text up to 254 characters including spaces in any single row The font style and size is fixed for these rows The text does not wrap from one row to the other The text in access to the row length depending on the size of the WAAD will simply not show but can always be seen accessed in the Input Notes Window Input Motes Please input new nate Cancel 2nd Row User s comments nates remarks etc 3 15 Status Bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of IGW main window It contains three slender gray boxes Different messages will display in these boxes concerning the model solution status 30 3 16 The Cursor The cursor is important to using IGW Version 5 0P because of the software s graphical interface The cursor has a number of modes discussed in Section 3 4 that it may enter depending on the current status of the software These include e Default mode The default cursor mode The cursor always appears as its default shape This mode is used for performing basic Windows functions and using the buttons and menus in the software In order to initialize the cursor the default mode should be used e Draw and add text mode This mode is used when defining features and a
313. m Draw Close window Variable Value Figure 20 3 Histogram Analysis Exploratory Data Analysis PDF h Scatterplot Total Scatter Points Statistics Probability Density Function Maximum Minimum Probability Mean 0 25 Median Mode 0 20 Variance Standard Skewness Coef of variation Lower Quartile 25 Upper Quartile 75 Graph Parameters Number of Intervals 10 Scatterplot Lag h 1 m Scatterplot Tolerance 50 m Draw Close Window 270 280 Variable Value Figure 20 4 Probability Density Function Number of Interva Graph Parameters Data Set Statistics 213 20 2 Exploratory Data Analysis CDF h Scatterplot Total Scatter Statistics Cumulative Density Function Maximum Minimum Cumulative Probability Mean 1 0 Median 0 3 Mode 0 8 Variance 0 7 Standard densi 05 Skewness 0 5 Coef of variation 0 4 Lower Quartile 25 0 3 Upper Quartile 75 0 2 Graph Parameters 01 Number of Intervals 10 Scatterplot Lag h 0 0 100 m Scatterplot Tolerance 50 m Draw Close window 270 280 Variable Value Figure 20 5 cumulative Density Function Exploratory Data Analysis Total Scatter Points Statistics h Scatterplat 113 hd animum Minimum Variable Head Mean Median Mode Variance Standard Skewness Coet of variation Lower Quartile 25 Upper Quartile 755 Graph Paramete
314. m modeling Section 20 4 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy lt lt Main Model TopE 154 User specified E Main Model Layer 1 Exploratory Analysis Remove Attri options 2 49 Zones 1001 2 49 Zone 1001 Show Attributes L 70 BotE gt 154 Point s Cond gt 63 Regression ConstHead gt 152 Point s Linear TopE gt 154 Point s Global regression Use all points Zone 1002 Jc CL ion Use 5 s ocal regression Use neare 5 Zone 1003 C Quadratic Zone 1004 89 Zone 1005 Plines 1001 z Pline 1001 Interpolation Method z Pline 1002 Exponent C Biquadratic Interpolation Simulation Interpolation Parameters wells 1001 Inverse Distance X 2 Well 1001 No of Nearest Poin f 10 Well 1002 C Unconditional Simulation Well 1003 Conditional Simulation Well 1004 f Ordinary Direct inversion Multiscale Conjugate gradient Hierarchical C LU Decomposition Variogram Model Unconditional C e e e V simulation Ei i inco t ovariance Edi Figure 20 11 Interpolation Window with Additional Choices 220 20 3 2 4 Conditional Simulation A conditional simulation is the one in which simulated field is forced to pass through known data points This honors both the data and the statistics The Conditional Simulation procedure generates a spatially correlated random field based on sample statis
315. m the drop down menu and select a color by clicking the Color button or the color outline area and selecting the desired color from the Color window that appears User can also choose the line width for the zone from the drop down list between 1 0 and 10 0 in the Width field 7 6 2 3 Geometrical Information This GIA shows two pieces of information Vertexes and Area Vertexes indicates the number of vertexes in the zone Area indicates the conceptual area of the zone in the Working Area in m This area is the exact area of the zone as drawn and not the area used in model calculations The area used in model calculations is derived by approximating the zone shape with finite difference cells 7 6 2 4 Zone Budget Check Box Checking the box next to Zone Budget allows for the zone to have its water and plume mass balances calculated and displayed Please refer to Section 14 2 for details on how to perform budget analysis When the model is discretized an entry for both Water Balance and Plume Mass Balance will appear in the TPS Section 4 1 3 under a place holder for the selected Refer to Chapter 16 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example of utilizing this feature and viewing the results of the simulation 74 zone that resides in the Mass Water Balance level Clicking these will open the respective windows These displays and settings are discussed in Appendix D I 7 6 2 5 Interpolation Model The Interpol
316. maps may be added at any time by accessing the Model Scale and Basemap window and clicking the Load Basemap button see Section 5 2 The procedure is the same as described in the previous sections however the preview pane in the Model Scale and Basemap window will now show a preview of the combined images The process may be repeated as many times as desired IGW Version 5 0P also allows the user to bring in multiple files of mixed formats It should be noted that all combined basemap images are treated as one image in the software Consequently if an incorrect picture is imported or assigned the wrong scale the entire merged basemap set will have to be cleared and the process repeated Clearing the Basemap At any time the user may open the Model Scale and Basemap window Figure 5 2 and click the Clear Basemap button After confirming the action in a separate window the preview pane shows a blank white screen Click OK to apply the change Click Cancel to close the Model Scale and Basemap window and abort the clearing of the basemap after confirming the action in a separate window When a basemap is added to an IGW file the software remembers the location of the file and opens it from that place Therefore if the file is opened on a different machine or the location of the basemap changes the new location of the basemap file must be specified This can be done by 1 Editing
317. matically set Automatically the drawn height of the cross section Profile Model Display Options Profile Properties Top Boundary of Display Bounding Box W Hiver m V Scatter Points f Equalto Aquifer Top Elevation top f Equalta This Value Well W Water Table a 3 v mj isis z m o s Iv Equal to Maz Head If Larger W Aquifer lw Const Head E Scale Bar if Horizontal W Vertical m Simulation Results M Head 2 Conductivity Display Margin W Velocity if Concentration n Top I zt of Window width E Bottom X of Window Width Vertical Exaggeration Factor 5 16227761 Cancel Figure 16 4 Display Options for Profile Model SIMULATION RESULTS AREA In this area the user may choose to activate or deactivate visualization for Head Velocity and Conductivity Head and Velocity are active by default Clicking the button next to Head Velocity or Conductivity opens up a separate window for further refinement of the display of these features These settings affect only the cross section at hand but the window interfaces are similar to those encountered when setting overall display options through the Main Model Draw Option window Draw Option Profile Head Figure 19 7 Velocity Draw Option Figure 19 8 and Draw Option Profile Conductivity same format as Figure 19 7 PROFILE P
318. meters cm meters m and inches in 64 IGW Version 5 0P allows the user the option to set a Thickness for each layer versus having to always designate a top and bottom elevation to define depth The Random button can be employed to assign random thickness values in the model See Appendix B II for more information on how to use this feature ATTRIBUTE ELEVATIONS FOR PARTIALLY PENETRATING PARAMETERS Top and bottom elevations of partially penetrating parameters can be entered here 7 6 1 4 Sources and Sinks This layer is where the water body and contamination characteristics for the zone are defined The layer is subdivided into three separate tags e Prescribed Head Concentration Prescribed Flux e Head Dependent Flux 7 6 1 4 1 Prescribed Head Concentration This layer is where the water body and contamination characteristics for a model zone are defined Figure 7 9 zone 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Point fe doh Prescribed Flux Head Dependent Flux Prescnbed Head Const 0 0e0 EM E Same as Starting Head Source Concentration i Instantaneous pem E Continuous pom J sah Starting Head fF Figure 7 9 Prescribed Head Concentration PRESCRIBED HEAD AREA Selecting Constant Head or the Transient button in the Prescribed Head area allows the user to set a prescribed hydraulic head for a zone If Constant Head is selecte
319. model child model inside an existing submodel parent model the existing submodel must be open in a separate window The user can define child model within the window of parent model in the same manner as explained in Section 15 1 Using the Create Submodel button puts the cursor in draw mode The user may define a child model in the existing parent model window by defining its shape same as defining a zone Section 7 1 After discretization the shape of child model will turn rectangular as the nodes of the polygon are snapped to the nearest nodes in the parent model grid As soon as a submodel polygon is created in the in the existing submodel window it becomes the active feature If the user opens the AE it will already have the new submodel selected in LHP The corresponding RHP will be available for adding editing the attributes in the new submodel User can add more than one child models in any parent model at the same level There can be overlapping boundaries between the child models in any parent model The user has the option to modify the boundaries of a submodel in the IGW main window Working Area as explained in Section 15 8 However the user must make sure that the boundaries of any child model polygon must stay entirely inside of its parent model polygon Any mistake in this regard may cause an error and the model may not run A submodel will not show in a separate window unless the model is discretized
320. model in their working screen by simply clicking the Save button in the button row along the top of the window and then designating a pathway for the file The user may exit the window and return to the Working Area of IGW by either clicking the Exit button or clicking the X in the top right corner of the window 242 Chapter 22 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM GIS INTERFACE A GIS file mainly shapefile shp here is basically a digital vector file format which can store location and attribute information in it GW can use shapefiles for introducing groundwater modeling features into the modeling environment just in a few minutes and interactively The IGW GIS interface has mainly been developed for Michigan State flow and contamination data files by the Michigan Department of Environmental Quality MDEQ United States Geological Survey USGS and Michigan State University MSU IGW can ONLY recognize the specific data format for those files In order to introduce GIS files for other regions the user should match that specific format Details will be given in later sections 22 1 Opening the County Based GIS Importer Under the GIS tab in the Menu Bar selecting County Based Assistant brings up the GIS file interface Figure 22 1 that opens the County based Assistant window shown in Figure 22 2 This feature has been added to aid in importing various shapefiles used specifically for Well Head Protection Area WHPA deli
321. models in a hierarchical manner Another feature of hierarchical modeling in GW Version 5 0P is the option of up scaling and downscaling When a child model derives its boundary conditions and starting conditions from the parent model at the common nodes the process is termed as downscaling The child model after solving its domain passes back the refined solution to the parent model at the common nodes The main model updates itself based on the feedback from the child model This process is called up scaling After a number of iterations between downscaling and up scaling the solutions at the boundaries between the parent and child models should converge The user can set the convergence criteria between up scaling and downscaling The following sections describe the implementation and functionality of multi scale hierarchical modeling in IGW Version 5 0P Submodel solutions because of their finer grid settings assuming the grid density is not significantly reduced by the user are extremely useful for modeling around areas of sharp head gradient 15 1 Defining Submodels The first step in defining a submodel is clicking the Create Submodel button This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now define a submodel in the Working Area by defining its shape same as defining a zone Section 7 1 Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for each vertex of the submodel area in the VCI se
322. mpled in the Number of random locations to sample field this number may be more than the Total Nodes in Current Zone number however repeat samplings will occur in this case The Seed field allows the user to change the random field by entering different numbers The user may also specify the location and name of the file in the File name field and using the button to browse There are three options available in the Selected Variables section Hydraulic Conductivity Head and Top Elevation Information about the Nugget Effect can be found in Section 20 4 Please also refer to Figure 20 15 Clicking the Save button creates the data file Closing the window aborts the process The data is saved in the comma separated value csv file format The specific format is identical to that of scatter point input files discussed in Section 7 7 4 23 6 Opening a Process File Statistical data analysis and visualization tools of GW Version 5 0P be used to process data for a stochastic process please refer to Chapter 18 for stochastic modeling A stochastic process based on various realizations of logarithm of hydraulic conductivity InK can generate data for heads and concentration in a model Data can be stored for such stochastic processes IGW can accept the process data in a DAT file format as explained below A text editor such as Microsoft Notepad can be used to set
323. mporary arrays from the list If the model is saved and closed and then opened again the temporary arrays will not appear in the Attributes Array List When a temporary array is created it only contains the 3D structure of the array It is not populated with any values To assign values in a temporary array the user can either use the Import function to upload values from a text file or use the Two Array Operation tools Once populated the temporary array can be edited using the Edit function and can be saved in a text file using the Export function Populating a temporary array from a text file will involve the following steps e Create the temporary array using the Create function e Select the temporary array from the Attributes Array List e Using button assign the temporary array to the Single Array Operation area e Click Import and select the required file to populate the temporary array Please be sure that the array name in the text file line 3 matches exactly with the name given to the temporary array Populating a temporary array using the Two Array Operation tools is explained in Section 17 6 17 2 6 Deleting Temporary Arrays Selecting this button will delete user defined temporary arrays Only user defined arrays can be deleted If Delete is clicked while an attribute array is assigned the message You can only delete user defined arrays will popup Head Array Operation Area The Head Array Operat
324. n J Anisotropy Orientation Aquifer Botttom Elevation 7 J Hiver Depth Aquifer Thickness River Leakage Partitioning Coefficient River Bottom Elevation Specific Storage ___ EF Drain Conductance Specie Yield Esel Drain Elevation Longitudinal Dispersivity Exi Storage Coefficent Transverse Dispersivity esl Calibration Conductivity Effective Porosity Calibration Concentration Recharge Calibration Head Iw Show flags Cancel Figure 19 9 input Data for Visualization The user can check all the desired parameters from this window and set their display options using the M button When Input Data box is checked in the Display Options for Model 1 window all the attributes checked in the Input Data window will be display in the Working Area By default the Input Data button is checked but all buttons in Input Data window are unchecked Consequently none of the attributes from this window are displayed by default in the Working Area 19 4 6 Solution Status and Number of Iterations The Solution Status and Number of Iterations box at the bottom right corner of the window unchecked by default Checking this box instructs the software to display more detailed message windows concerning the solution status as the software 1s solving the model 19 4 7 Use Model Level Display Use Model Level Display option is checked by default Whe
325. n be created in all of the geological layers by simply checking the Apply to All Layers box Figure 12 5 Vertical Discretization Geological Layer Number of Computational Layers Apply to All Layers OF Cancel Figure 12 5 Vertical Discretization Window The user can create multiple modeling zones of different sizes within different geological layers Figure 12 6 demonstrates a cross section see Chapter 16 for detailed information on cross sections along the Working Area after discretizing and running a simple model see Chapter 12 and Chapter 14 with three geological layers and different number of computational layers GL and CL indicates the number of geological layers and computational layers respectively Computational layers are separated by a dashed line within a geological layer As one can see dimensions of geological layers are different from each other Contours demonstrate the groundwater head Cross section 1 r fell GL2 GL3 784 00 980 00 99 35 m 196 00 394 Figure 12 6 Geological layers with different dimensions and different number of computational layers 119 12 2 3 Navigating between Model Layers The user can switch between different geological layers using the Layer Selector shown in Figure 12 7 also refer to Section 3 10 area in IGW Version 5 0P main window The user can move the sliding button to select the desired layer The tick marks along the sliding bar co
326. n in Figure 20 10 Repression Polwnomial Coeffcient Choice Action V v all al2 m alO ali fT aal Hone Reset EE Apply Selected alat anz2 Cancel Figure 20 10 Manual Regression Analysis In this window the user may choose the desired coefficients by placing a check mark in the associated boxes The polynomial form is presented in the lower portion of the window Clicking the Apply button shows the numerical form of the polynomial the black None will change to red Done and clicking the Reset button shows the algebraic form changes the Done message to None Clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes in the software Clicking the Cancel button closes the window and discards the changes Note that Log Coordinate is always selected and therefore the interface is disabled Using high order regressions can produce unrealistically high values especially for large polygons Use these with discretion 20 3 2 Interpolation Methods and Simulations The user may choose from three options in this area Interpolation Method default Unconditional Simulation and Conditional Simulation For the Interpolation Method the user may choose from the associated drop down list either Inverse Distance default or Kriging Method 217 20 3 2 1 Inverse distance One of the most commonly used techniques for interpolation of scatter points is the Inver
327. n reinitialized 18 4 Conditional and Unconditional Simulations Statistical parameters for the random field can be inferred from data The data is generally available at specific point locations and can either be entered in the model as scatter points Section 7 7 or directly imported from GIS files Section 22 5 Please also refer to Section 7 7 6 2 and Sections 20 3 2 3 and 20 3 2 4 for unconditional and conditional simulations as a means of interpolation of data 18 4 1 Unconditional Stochastic Simulations An unconditional simulation is one in which the simulated field is not constrained to pass through the known data points but honoring the covariance of the variogram instead of the explicit data values The Unconditional Simulation procedure generates a spatially correlated random field based on sample statistical parameters This procedure will generate new values for the locations corresponding to the measured values Unconditional simulations are similar to the one explained in Section 18 2 except that instead of the user entering the statistical parameters in Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr window the software automatically calculates and assigns these parameters from the data available at scatter points To perform unconditional simulations follow these steps e Select the zone within which scatter points are added with random data attribute 1 e hydraulic conductivity 181 e Open the AE windo
328. n the well is plotted on the y axis and time is plotted on the x axis The plot appears similar to that shown in Figure D III I 3 except the title reads Concentration Breakthrough Notice that the Realization box is checked This indicates that the software will plot the current model solution If this is unchecked the plot will appear empty The other options in this area are specific to stochastic modeling and are discussed in Section Error Reference source not found Figure D III I 2 An Example of the Head Plot 300 Using the list in the lower left field of Attributes Explorer the user may select which model the plot will be associated with if the well exists within the boundaries of a submodel The default is Main Model The field will list all available options After changing models click the Refresh button to update the display All IGW plots update continuously as the model solution proceeds Clicking the disk button begins the process of exporting the data displayed in the window by opening the Save As window This is discussed in Section 20 4 If head or concentration data was defined in the Input Head Concentration Data window Section 9 4 2 they will appear in the respective plot types as discrete points The plots will show a higher resolution if they are resized to have larger dimensions D III I1 Other Well Plots Refer to Section Error Reference source not found for more information concerning stochastic
329. n this is checked the contour intervals and color ramps are calculated assigned by the software based on maximum and minimum values of the attributes If user decides to use a different range of values than the maximum and minimum within the model solution data this option must be unchecked 19 4 8 Show Treemap Show Treemap is unchecked by default This feature brings up the hierarchical structure of all the submodels in the main model This option is elaborated in Section 15 3 209 19 5 Monte Carlo Simulation Results Area 19 6 19 7 19 8 These settings are reserved for stochastic modeling and are discussed in Section 18 3 1 By default these are unchecked and grayed out Display Sequence Top to Bottom Area As soon as a feature is selected for display e g Head Basemap etc it appears at the bottom of the list in the Display Sequence field This area ilb shows the order from top to bottom in which the displayed features will be shown in the Working Area Items may be selected by clicking on them and then moved up up arrow button or down down arrow button in priority or deleted altogether X button Note that certain features such as basemaps may be displayed over the entire extent of the Working Area and may block out other features such as head contours By adjusting the top to bottom sequence the user can see more in the model area Refreshing the Display The Refresh Screen but
330. nal dispersivity transverse drain elevation drain leakance river bed elevation river stage river leakance specific storage specific yield Kx Ky Kx Kz Orientation of AnisF in XY AnisF AnisF X7 anisorient Orientation of AnisF in XZ Decay Coefficient decay coeff Nin wa Tn 7 7 5 Importing Scatter Points from GIS Data Sets 81 IGW Version 5 0P has a sophisticated GIS interface to directly import GIS data into the Working Area See Chapter 22 for detailed features and functionality of GIS interface Refer to Sections 22 5 22 6 22 15 22 16 and 22 17 for importing GIS based scatter point data in IGW 7 7 6 Statistical Interpretation of Scatter Point Data IGW Version 5 0P has a sophisticated statistical geostatistical interface which can be used to analyze and interpret data attributes associated with scatter points The AE window can be changed to alternate LHP and RHP views where user can access the statistical tools to analyze and interpret data at scatter points Please see Chapter 20 below 7 7 6 1 Alternate LHP and RHP The alternate LHP and RHP can be accessed by clicking the Show Interpolation Model button in the zone RHP see Section 7 6 2 5 or by right clicking on any zone in the LHP and selecting Switch List from the drop down menu The alternate LHP and RHP in the AE window is shown in Figure 7 24 The alternate view changes the appearance of the scatter points in the LHP I
331. ndicates that the software will redraw the Working Area after every time step A value of 2 indicates every other time step and so on NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS PLUME This parameter specifies how often the software should perform calculations for concentration plumes A value of 2 default indicates that the software will perform a concentration plume calculation at every other time step A value of 1 indicates the calculation will be performed every time step and so on This setting is not applicable when using the MMOC solver method in IGW Version 5 0P NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS PARTICLES This parameter specifies how often the software should perform calculations for particle tracking see Section 10 3 A value of 2 default indicates that the software will perform a particle tracking calculation at every other time step A value of 1 indicates the calculation will be performed every time step and so on STOP WHEN SIMULATION LENGTH IS REACHED Checking this box instructs the software to automatically stop the simulation when the Simulation Length value has been reached In this case a window will appear indicating that the simulation length has been reached In the window the user is given the option of continuing the simulation If this button 1s unchecked the software will run the simulation indefinitely or until stopped by the user This can now also be controlled by selecting if the simulation length is controlled by Flow time
332. ndividual scatter points under a zone are replaced by entries for each parameter that have been specified by the scatter points These entries also indicate the number of scatter points that have this particular parameter specified Each entry in LHP has its own RHP in which the user may specify the conditions for statistical analysis of the group of scatter points The format for all of the alternate RHPs is the same Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree lt lt Main Model gt BotE gt 154 pts E Main Model B B Layer 1 Exploratory Analysis Remove Attribute Outler Analysis Zones 1001 Zone 1001 Show Attributes Export Attribute 7 Use Log Scale BotE gt 154 Point s Cond gt 63 Point s Regression ConstHead gt 152 Point s TopE gt 154 Point s Global regression Use all points Bilinear 2 C Local regression Use nearest points t More C Quadratic Biquadratic Interpolation Simulation Interpolation Parameters Interpolation Method Exponent 2 Inverse Distance m No of Nearest Points 10 Unconditional Simulation Conditional Simulation f Ordinary Direct inversion C Multiscale Conjugate gradient Hierarchical C LU Decomposition Variogram Model C Variogram G Ei C Covariance Edi Model Top area for exploratory data analysis B Regression area C Interpolation sim
333. ndom settings see Section 7 7 or 2 Single realization mode if at least one data point simulation is specified in this case only one of all possible statistically equivalent models is analyzed Selecting Monte Carlo Simulations sets the software to solve multiple statistically equivalent realizations of model parameters If no data simulations are specified then the mean model will be solved repeatedly 131 Please refer to Chapter 18 for more information concerning stochastic modeling Monte Carlo Simulation options in this tab are discussed in Section 18 3 Model 1 Solver Settings Particle Tracking Stochastic Select Simulation Methods t Single Realization Options Opis LK Cancel Figure 13 7 Stochastic Model Settings 132 Chapter 14 RUNNING THE MODEL This brief chapter describes the basic procedures for running the model and initializing features of the model 14 1 Running the Model Running the model requires simply clicking the Forward button The model should be discretized before attempting to run it If not the software will remind the user to do so with an error window with the message You should create discretize the model first While running the software will indicate its current progress function in the LMA see Section 3 13 The RMA see Section 3 13 will display the number of iterations needed for the solution By default the software only dis
334. ne Upscaling Run done Model1 1 2 1 1 1 Model 1 Patching Main Model m Figure 15 14 Cou V iCooMa Cea Cose gites Default view of Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart window Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart En 9 507E 00 Num Iter 1 aaa Err 8 753E 00 Err 3 561E 00 9 561 00 9 614 00 Err 8 341E 00 Err 3 478E 00 En 1 213E 00 Current ErorHead 3 4707 00 atl 1 1 K 1 lt l gt OldHead 1 0000E 01 New Head 6 5293E 00 Model 1 1 2 1 Current ErrorHead 3 8039 00 atl 1 33 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0000 01 New Head 6 1961E 00 Model 1 2 2 2 1 Current ErrorHead 3 9759 00 atl 1 J 29 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0000 01 New Head 6 0241E 00 Model 1 1 2 1 1 Line Option Color Width start Idx of Child Current 1 8891E 00 at l 37 49 K 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0000E 01 New Head 8 1119E 00 Model 1 1 2 1 1 1 Current ErrorHead 1 5075 00 atl 43 55 K 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0000E 01 New Head 8 4925 00 Model 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Current ErrorHead 1 2130E 00 atl 33 1 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0000 01 New Head 8 7870E 00 Model 1 Current ErrorHead 9 5066 00 atl 13 23 1 lt l gt OldHead 5 0515E 01 New Head 1 0012E 01 in Upscaling Forward done Upscaling Run done Figure 15 15 Submodel windows stop Idx of Pare
335. neation on a county basis The County Based Assistant is a modification of the standard GIS Model Importer see Section 22 2 in that it gathers in a single step all the pre determined shapefiles within a single county or collection of counties that are typically used for delineating WHPA s The user selects the County Based Assistant from the GIS drop down menu on the IGW Modeling Menu Bar as shown in Figure 22 1 Interactive Groundwater 5 0P File Modeling 3D Visualization Utilities Open GIS Importer Figure 22 1 Opening the County Based Assistant Figure 22 2 contains a map showing the outlines of each county in the state The user must first highlight the county shp shapefile in the GIS Layer Explorer and select the Selection Tool icon Using the left mouse button the user may select either a single county or multiple counties In order to select multiple counties the user may depress and hold down the left mouse button and draw a selection rectangle as shown in Figure 22 3 It is also possible to select multiple counties by holding down the CTRL key and individually selecting multiple counties 243 County Based Assistant x wile lle i s E 1013802 1 783206 94 GIS Layer Explorer 199 county shp Highlight county shp Selected County List County Name A Database File Structure Data Base Location scoh 751 gisdpf001 M apl je Apto Al Count pply to All Counties MDEQ structure Modeling Layers
336. nformation and continuing Reading notification of successful install and finishing e Mee el a Once the installation is complete the software is ready to use There is no need to restart the computer It is recommended to use only one 3D version of IGW 4 0 or higher on a single machine at a given time Before installing a different version of the software please be sure to uninstall any previous version s 29 Starting the Software The easiest way to start the program is to use the Windows Start Menu Alternatively the program can be started by executing the IGW Version 5 0P application from the C Program Files Interactive Groundwater 5 0P folder the default or the one chosen during installation The software shortcuts are installed in the ProgramsInteractive Groundwater folder in the Start Menu again by default or in the folder chosen during installation The folder will contain a shortcut IGW 5 0P that is used to start the program and a shortcut Uninstall IGW 5 0P that 15 used to uninstall the program Upon starting the software a splash screen with the software credits will appear see Figure 2 1 The user may click the Continue button or just wait a few seconds The splash screen disappears and the full screen IGW Version 5 0P window appears with a Tip of the Day window see Figure 2 2 From the Tip of the Day window one can e Scroll through the tip list by selecting
337. ng Area to define a point that corresponds to the location of the well The well creation process and other well implementation information is discussed further in Chapter 9 Modify Existing Zone 3 1 Clicking this button allows the user to replace the active zone with another zone without having to redefine the zone attributes or any associated scatter points Section 7 3 The first click of the button brings up one of two windows 1 a Message window appears with the text You should select a zone first if no zone is currently selected or 2 a Warning windows appears with the text Are you sure that you want to replace the current zone with a new one if there is an active zone If the Message window appears the user should click OK select a zone and then re select the Redefine Applied Area for a Zone button If the Warning window appears verify that the correct zone is selected If not then select No activate the desired zone click the Reset toolbar buttons state button then re select the Redefine Applied Area for a Zone button If the correct zone is selected then click Yes The cursor enters draw mode and the user may define a completely new zone to replace the old one Once draw mode has been entered the user may continually replace the previous zone until satisfied This process is described further in Section 7 5 Select Edit Zone 3 2 Clicking th
338. ng an approximately square grid cell Although DY field is updated with DX field but user may change it independent of the DX value A number largely different from the automatically adjusted one will make rectangular grid cells Discretizing the model turns the conceptual model into a numerical model that the computer can solve A higher grid resolution yields a more accurate solution but increases computational time It is generally good practice to perform sensitivity analyses with respect to grid resolution and time step size 12 2 Defining Geological and Computational Layers The user can add multiple geological or conceptual layers in the model IGW Version 5 0P also allows the user for vertical discretization of geological layers into desired number of computational layers The following subsections explain how geological and computational layers can be added to in a model 117 12 2 1 Adding Geological Layers in the Model The user can create multiple geological layers in the model by selecting File menu in the Menu Bar and then selecting Create New Model Layer User can add one layer at a time using this option When a model domain is defined by a zone in a layer new layers can be created using the same domain User can select the zone defining the model domain and then press Alt L on the keyboard Add new layer s window appears Figure 12 2 The user can decide on the number of layers to be added This opt
339. ng situations the user may need to analyze the drawdown caused by pumping recharge or river stage changes etc Create Drawdown Model button makes it very convenient to calculate net change in the system due to change in any of the above mentioned stresses without having to run the model sepatrately for pre and post conditions and then doing the difference to find the net change Create Drawdown Model In IGW Version 5 0P creating a drawdown model option is only applicable for single layered confined aquifer systems 172 17 6 Selecting this button opens Calculate Drawdown window shown in Figure 17 7 The window gives the user the options for selecting boundary conditions for the drawdown model Calculate Drawdown Initialize Arrays to Compute Het Dravdown Flow Boundary Condition Flux Boundary Condition OF Figure 17 7 Calculating Drawdown When user clicks on either of the first two Prescribed Head or No flow boundary conditions a message pops up cautioning the user that rediscretization will be needed to recover this after change By clicking Yes the Done message pops up The user may then run the model without discretization After running the model the Head array is updated to the net draw down in the model and can be observed saved using the Grid Based Operations The drawdown results can also be visualized in the Working Area using the display options The
340. nk points injection and pumping wells respectively or to monitor heads and concentrations in the aquifer The following sections describe the implementation and functionality of well features 9 1 Defining Wells The first step in defining a well is clicking the Add a New Well button located at row 2 column 4 This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now define a well in the Working Area by simply clicking the mouse at the desired point Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for each well in the VCI see Section 3 13 instead of clicking the mouse at the each location This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and allows for more precise placement of well features When wells are defined they become associated with the nearest node Therefore when the mouse is clicked to add a well it may not appear in that exact location it appears at the associated node Note that the coordinates for the desired placement of the well are stored internally so when the resolution of the model changes or a higher resolution submodel is implemented so does the location of the well as 1t must stay associated with the closest node Multiple wells although having different real world coordinates may be associated with the same node in the model In this case the effects of each well are aggregated at the node At this point the cursor is still in draw mode
341. not participating in parallel computing This is sometimes desirable because not all machines on the network can always be available spare 10 Select the Auto Data Collecting and Save options for monitoring wells polyline fluxes and fields Checking the Auto Data Collecting and Save box is always a good idea when 198 the user desires to run simulations over a longer time The file locations for saving the data are setup in the S drive during the network setup stage 11 Click OK button in Parallel Hosts and Tasks window 12 Click OK button in Solver window 13 Click the Run Model Forward button All machines selected in the network will start performing allocated tasks The user will observe IGW Version 5 0P windows open in each slave machine The model simulations can be observed in the Working Area for each job in each machine 18 7 3 Stopping a Parallel Computing Session The user can stop the parallel computing session by clicking the Pause Stop button in the Master machine This will stop simulations in all slave machines However before the simulations stop a messages appears on the screen prompting the user to save simulations results If results are not saved before stopping the simulations all the unsaved results from slaves machines are lost simulations in any slave machine can be stopped by clicking the Pause Stop button within the job window of that machine 18 7 4 Observing Simulation Results
342. ns TOP ELEVATION Top Elevation is the elevation of the top of the aquifer material Clicking the box next to Top Elevation allows the user to enter a desired value in the associated field The default value is 32 808 feet set in the Layer window The default entry is also 32 808 feet with available units of meters m centimeters cm feet ft and inches in The Random button can also be employed to randomly assign a top elevation to the model based on its layer parameters For multi layered models the Overlapping Elevation Control button will allow overlapping layers to be decided by either the current layer s top elevation or the upper layer s bottom elevation If there is no upper confining layer unconfined aquifers the user should set the top elevation equal to the surface elevation Option for Elevation Overlapping Separating window is shown in Figure 7 8 Option for Elevation Overlapping Sep Eg Ince overlapping separating elevation decided by f Upper layers bottom elevation OF Cancel Figure 7 8 Elevation Overlapping Screen BOTTOM ELEVATION THICKNESS Bottom Elevation is the elevation of the bottom of the aquifer material Clicking the box next to Bottom Elevation allows the user to enter a desired value in the associated field The default value is 164 feet set in the Layer window The default entry is also 164 feet with available units of measure being feet ft by default centi
343. ns the Probing Setting for Node Edit window shown in Figure 3 9 The default region for cursor activation for node edit is 1 5 of DeltaX of Mesh Grid User can increase or decrease this from 1 100 to 100 DeltaX using the dropdown choices from Automatic setting User can also assign a Customized distance for node edit When the model grid size is very fine then the default sensitivity for node edit may be only a few pixels and it may become difficult to activate the cursor into the edit ZN sed E mode 7 unless the mouse is very accurately pointing at the node In such situations one can increase the node sensitivity to make node editing easier 3 Probing Setting for Node Edit BHA Probing Setting for Node Edit Probe Size Probe Size Automatic of Delta of Mesh Grid fe Automatic 1 5 of Deltas of Mesh Grid Customized Customized m J Cancel OF Figure 3 9 Probing Settings for Node Edit with dropdown choices When the model is running the cursor turns into an hourglass 3 17 The Right Click Menu When the cursor is in the Working Area the user may right click the mouse to access a special drop down menu that has the following entries Property Copy Paste Delete Remove Node Edit Refresh Display Options Show 3D Surface Show 3D Volume Export Data Discretization Table Grid Based Operation
344. nt Adhere to Nodes Mass Balance jw Error Bars Patching Main Model inContou inColorMap Save Iteration Clear Close History 154 The Patching Main Model area allows user to patch the refined submodel results into the main model By selecting different view options the user can visualize how will the fine details from sub model fit into the main model Figure 15 16 illustrates how sub model patches can be compared and visualized in mail models Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 15 16 Submodel patching in the main model 15 11 5 Mass balance for Submodels By checking the Mass Balace box in the Tree Map Objects Control Panel Figure 15 13 the user can observe mass balance for every submodel in the hierarchical structure However before checking this box the user has to open the mass balance windows for the submodels using the following steps Mass balance option for sub models is currently available in GW Version 5 0P for models with only one geological layer and one computational layer This feature will be extended to multilayered models in the later versions of JGW 1 Select the main model domain polygon in the AE and check the Zone Budget box Section 7 6 2 4 2 Discretize and run the model Section 15 6 3 Select Water Balance for the zone in the TPS Section 14 2 and Section 4 1 3 Zone water balance fo
345. nt migration prediction etc The following sections describe the implementation and functionality of particle features 10 1 Adding Particles Unlike other features adding particles does not require discretizing the model before running it see Chapter 12 There are four different particle features that the user can implement in the Working Area A single particle A zone of particles Particles along a polyline and Particles around wells These features are discussed in the following subsections 10 1 1 Single Particle The first step in defining a solitary particle is clicking the Add a Single Particle button Button Palette row 4 column 1 This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now place a single particle in the Working Area by simply clicking the mouse at the desired point Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for the particle in the VCI see Section 3 13 instead of clicking the mouse at each location This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and allows for a more precise placement of single particle features When a particle is defined in the software it becomes the active feature A graphic is displayed showing particle properties as seen below in Figure 10 1 Particles Vertical Settings f 2D matrix at a vertical location of 05 P Vertical location top 1 Vertical location bottom 0 RE Vertical density multiplier 1 0 a
346. ntaneous Cumulative Figure 15 18 Water balance at first hierarchical level 156 Notice that in Figure 15 18 there are water balance components with titles S_BndIn and S_BndOut These components represent boundary fluxes across the sub model boundary Notice that the SubM component is still present which means that next level of hierarchical models exist This SubM component represents all conceptual components contained in the submodels for the next hierarchical levels 5 Click once on the SubM bar again and the next hierarchical level water balance will appear in a separate window 6 Keep clicking in each color of the SubM bars till the last hierarchical level is reached No SubM component will be shown in the water balance window when last hierarchical level is reached 7 Check the Mass Balance box in the Tree Map Objects control panel Figure 15 13 All mass balance windows for sub models will appear next to their respective nodes as shown in Figure 15 19 Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart Model 1 1 Water Ba b Model 1 2 Water Ba Model 1 1 1 Water Model 1 1 3 Water O X No submodels tions 5 C Pet F o SM 10000 E Pu 5 weld oS SB Model1 1 2 1 W 1 Model1 1 3 1 W Model1 2 2 1 W 0 X Water Barca No submodes corinbutions C Time Vanation xs Pht Instantaneous Mo
347. ntral Calibration Data on gi 106 Po _ L4 Cond 239 Pd Hydraulic Conductivity Molecular Diffusion StartHead gt 1 iw Conductivity 50 das mmm n afd Tope gt 107 Pe AB Zone 1002 Random DF py 0 0e0 n 2 di ET Fee Kor ou a ir put 1 1 e Check the box before the Random button and then click on the Random button this will open the Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr window as shown in Figure 18 1 Here the user can specify correlation scales LambdaX LambdaY etc theoretical variance rotation angle and nugget The user can also select the algorithm and model type to generate random field Click OK when finished with appropriate selections have been made and required values entered 3 Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr Scale 1 Scale 2 gt f Spectral Algorithm Sequential Gaussian Simulation Lambda mo Lambda 100 C Lambda 5 LU Decomposition Algorithm ceed 28786630 Simulated Annealing Theoretical variance 0 Model Theoretical mear E Anisotropic Isotropic Bell whittle Angle Ratate Around 2 90 Exponential Mizell Angle Rotate Around o Mizell B Angle Riotate Around I 0 Nugget 10 01 Cancel Figure 18 1 Option of Unconditional Random Field Attr window Going through the above steps will set up hydraulic conductivity for
348. nts wi tier Besse esee Local Dispersion 08000000845 Long 08000000233 M Trans 08000006384 Storage Terms Vert EM 09000007903 Specific Specific Storage LEM OSQO0000846 08000007553 Sail Farticle Density Effective Porosity handon Import Wells Export Wells ation of RIZ Color Patten Vertexes hi W Zone Visible Active Transparent Inactive Area T Paints t For Display Zone Budget 78 Only Width Domain Control Show Interpolation Model Figure 20 1 scatter Points and Attributes Explorer The LHP view differs in that the individual scatter points under a zone are replaced by entries for each parameter being specified by the scatter points These entries also indicate the number of scatter points that have this particular parameter specified Each entry has its own right hand pane RHP in which the user may specify the conditions for statistical analysis of the group of scatter points 20 1 Exploratory Data Analysis Prior to interpolating scatter point data it is advisable to examine the distribution of the data This is accomplished using Exploratory Data Analysis It is only possible to perform exploratory data analysis on scatter point data at this time It is not possible to analyze attributes associated with polylines or polygons Data
349. o buttons changes the multiplying factor from 2000 to 1500 265 The last method Empirical Model Figure 22 38 is a collection of methods that are based on a field data derived empirical relationship between specific capacity and transmissivity The user may presently select one of four empirical models MSU MDEQ estimated from aquifer tests for wells open to the glacial drift in Michigan Razack and Huntley for unconsolidated alluvial deposits Mace for limestone with secondary permeability and Customize By selecting Customize the user may specify site specific factors for this empirical relationship Specific Capacity Based K Transmissivity Calculation Methods J 9 2 3 kis m Q 4 Theis Solution T 1 6 rS Drawdown Select Confined or amp ec 99 2 Bradbury and T _ __ ap 2s Unconfined to adjust Rothschild Am s s ns multiplying factor from 2000 to 1500 Drawdowr Filter by Test Method Flaas UNKNOWN AIR lv BAIL OTHER PLUGR TSTPUM Well efficiency factor Drawdown Filter Michgan C Razack and Huntley Remove wells if drawdown lt 1 Michgan_B Mace A lz Michgan_C Customize p lz Confined C Unconfined Q 0 57 Empirical Model 7 25 1 Drawdown Conductivity Calculation K T B Cancel lt E 0 GPM B Screen Interval 0 gt 500 GPM B Aquifer Thickness Otherwise B Linear Interpolation Between Scr
350. o Microsoft Excel by clicking on the Save Current Layer to Microsoft Excel button One click on this button will open an Excel spreadsheet and all values will be automatically tabulated in it The user can then save the Excel spreadsheet just as any other spreadsheet is saved in Excel IGW assigns its own values to the inactive cells The User can assign a value of his her choice to the inactive cells in the model in the Inactive Cell Value area by first typing the desired value in the field and then E clicking the Apply This Value button This feature is helpful especially when the user wants to process the array data in other software Inactive Cell Value Data Table Head i nn En ee en ee I 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 Switch Array Layer 1 Go Set Value for Selected Cells 1 0 OO Save Current Layer to Microsoft Excel Inactive Cell Value Apply This Value 999999 Exit Apply Changes Figure 17 4 Data Table window for Editing Arrays To close the Data Table window click the Exit button If Apply Changes button is not clicked before clicking the Exit button the window closes without making any change in the original array The window closes on clicking Exit without warning asking the user whether or not he she wants to Apply Changes 17 2 3 Importing Single Arrays Open window appears on clicking button The user can browse
351. o control over its selection The second option GIS modeling layers will display any model features as mapping features within the IGW Modeling Environment The advantage of doping this is that the shapefile lines are retained even if the layer is not used in the model If this option is not selected no modeling layer lines will be displayed if the layer is not used in the model The third option is to display either the selection rectangle or polygon e g watershed boundary that was used to select the model and mapping layers exported into the IGW Modeling Environment The selection box will be displayed within the IGW Modeling workspace Extraction Criteria Point Layers Polyline Layers Jee ax Mir v Extract wells with zero or unknown pumping Capacity Treat as prescribed head Treat as head dependent flus Use 100 for wells with following pumping rate Tj Sue TOR I Heparted ero or unknown iw Drains Options Well Filter Sampling density All Available t Non specified Stream Order Filter Frec k ox scatter pons w Top elevation Dess Treat as prescribed or head dependent flus DEM Sampling density Al Available Bedrock top iw Lakes Options i Bottom elevation M Mapping layers are Bedrock top Sampling density Al Available Td wetlands shown by default in f Bottom of well IGW I Recharge iw Static water level Starting head a
352. o test variation throughout the vertical extent of their model 71 GENERAL HEAD DEPENDENT FLUX AREA In this area the user can specify values for Concentration ppm Leakance ft day and Source Head ft 7 6 1 5 Scatter Point Control Scatter point control tab is shown in Figure 7 14 This is where the user can manipulate scatter points discussed later in this chapter in any of the following ways In order to access the Scatter Point Control tab the user should first select the model zone in which the scatter points are located Turn Starting Head to Prescribed Head After importing or interactively assigning a starting head in IGW clicking on this button will convert starting head data to a prescribed head boundary Turn Prescribed Head to Starting Head This option will convert prescribed head to starting head Toggle Use as Starting Head Flag Clicking this button will display a flag sign attached to the scatter points belonging to the zone that is currently displayed Copy Starting Head to Calibration Head Starting head in the model can be assigned as calibration head After running the model the user can use this calibration head data to evaluate the fit of their calibration by comparing it to the head distribution from the model Delete All Scatter Points in This Zone If the user selects this option then all scatter points in the given zone will be deleted after a warning message is displayed zone
353. o zero by clicking the Reset Particle Clock button to the left of the Initializing Particles button Deleting Particles All of the particles in the model may be deleted by clicking the Delete All Particles button 111 Chapter 11 SIMULATION TIME PARAMETERS IGW Version 5 0P offers the user a number of options when adjusting time parameters for software simulations These parameters are discussed in this chapter 11 1 Simulation Time Parameters Window The main interface for adjusting the simulation time parameters is the Set Simulation Time Parameters window pictured in Figure 11 1 Simulation Time Parameters Eg Steady State C Transient State Simulation Length 380 Simulation Time Step o pe Visualization Step am Number of Substeps Flume 200 Number of Substeps Particles I Stop when Simulation Length ls Reached iw Controlled by flow time Controlled by plume time Controlled by particles time Syncronize Clocks for Main and All SubModels Reset And Syncronize ManSub Model Clocks i Also Including Clocks of Model Objects ells Cancel OF Figure 11 1 simulation Time Parameters This window may be accessed through the Set Simulation Time Parameters button on the Button Palette or through the Main Model entry in the AE Steady State vs Transient State button Where indicated these parameters ar
354. odel Import Picture Export Picture Export Model Results 3 This Computation Layer Whole Since the parameter units are internally assigned to metric system values in the model exporting interface the user can not change them Additionally Version 5 0P allows the user the option to save either one computational layer of their model or the entire model altogether Selecting this allows the user to set the page up with their preferences At this time the selection is inactive Selecting this allows the user to print the active screen A window prompting the printer function will appear allowing the user to select the desired printing feature Selecting this exits the program The software will prompt the user to confirm the desire to exit the software if the model has not been saved Closing the Main Window is another way to exit the software 11 3 3 2 Modeling Menu The Modeling menu contains the following operations all of which can be found on the button palette The names of each operation are listed along with their respective location on the button palette given in a row column format Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt C Documents File Ma GIS 3D Visualization Utilities Display Help Define Model Damain Import Basemap Modeling Deep Shallow Discretizatian Run Model Forward Run Model Backward Define Model Grid Numerical S
355. of colors based upon the absolute value of the vector Checking the Equal Vector Length instructs the software to draw each velocity vector at the Max Vector Length pixels value This option is best used in conjunction with the color ramp above The user may adjust the color of the velocity vectors by clicking the Color button to open the Color window and subsequently choosing the desired color The selected color is not applicable when Use Color Ramp is checked Clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes in the software Clicking the Cancel button closes the window and discards any changes 19 4 3 Particle Display Options Particle display options can be set in the AE See Section 10 2 1 and Section 10 2 2 Checking un checking the Particle box will display or hide the particles in the Working Area 19 4 4 Concentration Display Options This window is of the same format as the Draw Option Head window see Figure 19 7 208 19 4 5 Input Data Display Options This button provides access to the Model Input and Data window Figure 19 9 which contains a list of other features data that may be displayed in the Working Area Each entry also has an associated options button used to refine its display in the Working Area Input Data Display Input Data Water Top Elevation Hydraulic Conductivity Anisotropy Factor Aquifer Top Elevatio
356. oints In order to access to scatter points the corresponding zone should be activated Select Scatter Point 5 2 Clicking this button allows the user to select a scatter point within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The zone associated with the desired scatter point should be active prior to clicking this button or else the user will not be able to select the desired scatter point The cursor is set to select mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click on a scatter point associated with the active zone in the Working Area to select it This is alternatively referred to as making the scatter point active When a feature 1s selected it appears outlined in red in the Working Area and highlighted in the AE window see Section Error Reference ource not found If no zone is active or none are yet defined in the model in which case no scatter points can exist yet and therefore trying to select one does not make much sense then attempting to select a scatter point elicits the Warning window with the text You should select a zone first In this case click OK select the zone associated with the desired scatter point and re click the Select Scatter Point button Scatter Point implementation is discussed further in Section 7 7 Add 3D Attribute Model 5 3 This feature allows the user to treat the entire model by adding recharge to the first active layer within each node of the simulation for
357. olver Settings Sek Simulation Time Parameters Set Default Model Parameters Reset Flow Clock Reset Concentration Clack Reset Particle Clack Initialize Plume Initialize Particle s Delete All Particles amp lg SRE NPR Ie lom Functions in this menu will be explained in later chapters 3 3 0 GIS Menu The GIS menu allows the user to bring files stored in GIS format into IGW This menu contains GIS Model Importer County Based Assistant and GIS Exporter buttons See Chapter 22 for further details Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untit Dist 3D Visualization Ukilities 615 Model Importer County Based Assistant Fie Modeling G15 Exporter lPk 3 3 4 3D Visualization Menu The 3D Visualization menu is briefly explained below More details are given in Chapter 21 Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untit File Modeling SIS Utilities Dis Shaw as 3D Surface E Shaw as 3D Volume TT gt Show as 3D Surface This feature allows the user to view the results of the model as a three dimensional surface which can be manipulated in plan view for clarity Show as 3D Volume This feature opens a new window with many options that allow the user a complete toolbox of operations for viewing the model in three dimensions Such options include cross sectional and fence diagram manipulations of the model 12 3 3 5 Utilities Menu The Utilities menu contains th
358. on 4 1 1 The spacing of existing open windows and the required sizes of the newly opened windows may affect the initial display location of the newly opened windows This cross flow is estimated from the main model and is more accurate when the profile model is not located near sharp gradients such as would be present near a well 164 Right clicking the mouse in a cross section window opens a menu from which the user may select Refresh Draw Option or Export Data Selecting Refresh is the same as clicking the Refresh button Selecting Draw Option opens the Cross section Draw Option window discussed in Section 16 4 Selecting Export Data begins the process of exporting data contained in the cross section The process is the same as for the main model and is described in Section 23 4 note that Concentration is not selected by default for cross section data export Note that the CAT Section 3 12 will function with the cursor in the cross section window the same as it functions with the cursor in the Working Area except the Y display lists the Z value Cross sections may be present when performing Monte Carlo simulations However the cross section solver will not function during Monte Carlo simulations and hence the display window will only show the stratigraphy of the default realization In IGW Version 5 0P cross sections may be present when modeling multiple scenarios an
359. one they are associated with and individual particle features are listed here in their respective groups The RHPs are briefly discussed in Section 4 1 2 The specific chapter that deals with a feature contains more discussion on RHP for that feature The LHP also has an alternate Interpolation Model view that is associated with scatter point functionality See Section 7 7 6 1 The user may also right click on an items in the LHP to access a Refresh list of functions associated with that entry Right click pop up Attributes menu 1s shown at the right and its entries explained below Delete e Refresh refreshes LHP with latest changes e Attributes shows the RHP associated with the feature e Delete deletes the feature Switch List e Insert inserts features Import Scatker Points Export Scatter Points Rename renames the feature e Switch List toggles between the standard and Import Wells alternate view of the LHP see Section 7 7 6 1 Export Wells e Import Scatter Points allows the user to import a set of scatter point wells in the selected zone that were created either in another model or outside of the program e Export Scatter Points allows the user to save the scatter points from their model for future use e Import Wells the user can bring in well data from another IGW model that was previously created e Export Wells the user can save wells
360. onents Giving data path for data from internet Adding removing styles for chart display Styles Fill Style Changing the color of contour area Titles Changing the line style of 3D graphic display Switching between header footer titles Changing the label name of the title Changing the location of the title in the model graphic Changing the features of the title border Changing the background foreground colors of the title box Changing the font size style of the title Adding images to the background of the title box Changing the location and the view of the legend Changing the legend label Changing the legend location by entering coordinates Legend Changing the style of the legend border Changing the legend box colors Changing the legend font style font size of the legend text Adding image to the background of the legend box Changing the location of the chart area Changing the style and width of the chart border Chart Area Changing the color of the chart area Adding image to the background of chart area Changing the scale of the chart Changing the view of the top of the chart area Plot Cube Changing the view of the bottom of the chart area Changing the scale and horizontal vertical shifting of the chart Changing the color of the chart Adding removing labels Attaching labels Changing the name of the chart labels Chart Delineating chart labels Labels Changing the background and foreground color of chart label boxes Bar
361. ontaminants in the aquifer Concentration This is the leakance factor associated with a head dependent flux component here river RivLeak River leakance Leakance is defined in the Drain subsection in Section 7 6 1 2 River features are discussed in the River subsection in Section 7 6 1 2 CNN This is the stage assigned to a head dependent flux component here river River features 5 are discussed in the River subsection in Section 7 6 1 2 River Bottom This is the bottom elevation of a head dependent flux component here river River Elevation features are discussed in the River subsection in Section 7 6 1 2 This is the leakance factor associated with a drain feature Leakance 1s defined and drain DrnLeak Drain Leakance RivHead RivBotE features are discussed in the Drain subsection in Section 7 6 1 2 This is the elevation assigned to a drain feature Drain features are discussed in the Drain DrnElev Drain Elevation ae subsection in Section 7 6 1 2 Aquifer Aquifer Type This indicates whether the aquifer is Confined or Unconfined See Appendix A I Cell Cell State This field indicates whether the cell is Wet Dry or Inactive See Appendix This field indicates whether the cell is Active meaning the head is calculated Inactive Bound meaning no head is calculated for the cell or ConstH meaning the cell has a prescribed head value See Appendix A III Calib H Calibra
362. oring well at that point GW Version 5 0P allows to user to observe stochastic nature of hydraulic conductivity InK head Head and concentration Conc at the monitoring well location please also refer to Section 9 4 for information on monitoring wells To observe stochastic processes at a monitoring well follow these steps 1 Define a monitoring well at the desired location of interest in the model see Monitoring Well in Section 9 4 2 Select the Monitoring Probability Distribution box in the wells RHP of AE Monitoring Well Monitoring Head and Concentration Monitoring Probability Distribution 3 Discretize the model see Chapter 12 4 Check the Probability box in TPS see Section 4 1 3 DIE Main Model 2 DS Layer 1 DI DIEM well 1001 7 53 Probability 5 Click Numerical Solver Settings button open Stochastic tab Figure 13 7 from the Model 1 Solver Settings window and select Monte Carlo Simulations 6 Run the model After second realization Model 1 Probability at Well xxxx window appears as shown in Figure 18 13 This window keeps updating after every realization till the simulations are stopped 188 Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Process m D o a 2 100 150 200 250 Fealization Select a Parameter ta Visualize pp Breese Process Curve Choice t Head Cone PDF
363. orm the check less often Iterative solver techniques require a threshold error value to determine when the solution has converged When the difference between an iteration and the next one is smaller than this number the solution is considered converged Although the software provides a default value for these errors these may not be appropriate for a given situation For example when modeling a situation that involves very flat gradients the error threshold number may need to be decreased to prevent the software from prematurely terminating the solver 125 13 1 3 Advanced Options Clicking the Advanced Options button opens the Advanced Options for Flow Solver window Figure 13 2 The user chooses between using the Traditional Finite Difference scheme or the Improved Finite Difference scheme when anisotropy is not aligned with grid orientation The software uses the improved scheme by default There are also four options for running and checking the model Refer to the IGW Version 4 7 Reference Manual for more information Finally the user has the option to Apply This Setting to Entire Flow Model Hierarchy giving the model and all of its sub models the properties defined above Advanced Options iw Hun flow model after each Pauses Stop action even under steady state flowy Run flow model each time before solving plume transport even under steady state flow Check wells for pumping and injection for even stea
364. otropic Anisotropic f Exponential Parameters Nugget C Gaussian Vanance Power Rangel m Range Y I fi 00 mo Hole Exp Power Angle 80 degree E C Hole Gauss lope Figure F I 2 Modified View of Input Parameters Window Clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes in the software Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes and closes the window F l The Variogram Window The Variogram window is used to view and edit the software determined variogram parameters An example of the default view of the Variogram window is shown in Figure F II 1 Variogram m Experimental Variogram Teoretical Model m Model Functions y Parameters Types Opt E Spherical m Semi variogram f Isotropic P Nugget fo P EIER V Range 146 76 C Gaussian V Variance m Parameters Influence radius Number of lags Parameter Variogram Model definition m Plot Options Model direction 1 angle 90 1 Experiment data direction1 Iz Experiment data dinsciion 1 Model direction 1 7 Model direction 2 Variogram 7 Experime ent data 600 direction 2 r adel with average variance and nugget 500 Large Graph 400 Automatic optimization 300 Preview C Manual Trial and error 200 100 OK Cancel 0 300 400 Distance h Figure 1 A Sample of the Variogram
365. otropy Onentation 2 Specific Storage Storage Coefficient Specific rield Recharge Longitudinal Dispersivity Transverse Dispersiity Vertical Dispersivity Partitioning Coefficient Retardation Factor Hydraulic Head Seepage Velocity inet Direction Seepage Velocity in Direction Seepage Velocity in Direction Plume Concentration Hiver Leakance Hiver Stage River Bottom Elevation Select All Dram Leakance Drain Elevation Aquifer Type Cell State Indes of Head Bound Calibration Head Calibration Concentration Unselect AJ Calibration Conductryity Parameters for Cell Attribute Viewer Checked boxes are default selection 2 Table 3 2 Expanded CAT Parameter Definitions Para meter Association Definition and References The elevation of the top of the aquifer It is equivalent to Elevation See Section a Elevation 7 6 1 3 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 The elevation of the ground surface It is equivalent to Surface Elevation See Section Elevation 7 6 1 3 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 The elevation of the bottom of the aquifer It is equivalent to Bottom Elevation See Section 7 6 1 3 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 EE F The effective porosity of the aquifer material It is equivalent to Effective Porosity See Porosity Section 7 6 1 1 Also see Section 6 1 and Section 6 2 n The x direction conductivity of the aquifer material See Section 7 6 1 1 Also se
366. ould experiment with the regression method and the number of standard deviations to use in determining data set outliers on a site by site basis An outlier analysis should be performed on all scatter point attributes 20 3 Data Interpolation After data have been extracted and the outliers removed it is necessary to interpolate the data There are two main areas in the Right Hand pane Regression and Interpolation Simulation The user 1s therefore presented with three options for analyzing the scatter point data 1 Regression 2 Interpolation Simulation and 3 Combination Analysis 216 To set up the particular analysis the user simply may place a check mark in the appropriate box Interpolation Simulation is selected by default Checking both boxes sets up the Combination Analysis in which the data are first regressed and then the residuals analyzed through the desired interpolation simulation scheme If there are not enough data to perform a certain analysis the software will prompt the user in a separate window with a message indicating the specific problem 20 3 1 Regression The user may choose from four preset regression types by selecting the desired one The options are Linear Bi Linear Quadratic and Bi Quadratic Formats for these regression types are explicitly given The user may also choose a custom regression format by selecting More button Clicking the More button opens the Regression window show
367. ouse release it and move the cursor to the end point A window opens displaying the distance Figure 22 26 Presently the distance is displayed in meters only 258 22 15 GIS GIS Layos Explorer X Distance Measuring Tool button o Figure 22 26 Measuring Distance Selecting Shapefile Data for Exporting Into IGW After all model data layers and mapping layers have been imported into the GIS model environment any of these data may be exported to the IGW Modeling Environment Prior to selecting data to be exported the data box to the left of each shapefile in the GIS Layer Explorer must be checked to identify the appropriate model shapefile data to export to IGW Only shapefiles that are checked will be exported to the IGW Modeling Environment Select the Data Selector button on the GIS Model Importer toolbar Figure 22 27 Holding down the left mouse button draw a rectangle around the area to be exported to the IGW Modeling Environment GIS Model Importer DMT He Ee E E Xx GIS Layer Explorer Layers for Modeling v Point Layers All Wells_Expandeds sh v 7 Polyline Layers v 7 NHD_Expanded8 shp 9 Polygon Layers HUP Augusta Expanded8 shp JE r b 2 Data Lakes_Expanded8 manual shp j Lithology Layers Selector Layers for Mapping v Point Layers 4 Polyline Layers v 7 Roa
368. ow as Discrete Particles or displaying the entire pathline the particle has traveled Show as 106 Continuous Pathlines the default The vertical location may also be changed at any time in the manner of Section 10 1 1 The user can change the number in the Size field to adjust the display size of the particle default is 12 pixels FarticlePoint 1002 Vertical location 10 5 1 aquifer top Release aquifer bottom Particles Display Options t Show as discrete particles size in pixels 12 f Show as continuous pathlines Color e Figure 10 7 RHP tor a Single Particle Color The user may also click the button or the sample particle point box next to it to open the Color window and subsequently select a new color for the particle The default color is pink To release the particles after reconfiguration the user can select the Release Particles button 10 2 2 RHP for a Particle Zone A sample of the RHP for a particle zone is shown in Figure 10 8 Particle one 1002 Horizontal Setting Humber of particle columns released within this zone 1 5 bong articles Vertical Settings fe 20 matris at a vertical location of 105 f 3D matrix Vertical location top i Vertical location bottom 0 1 aquifer top Vertical density multipier 11 0 aquifer bottom Display Options Show as discrete particles Size in pixels 3 Show as contin
369. own in Figure 15 1 These are explained in the following sub sections 15 5 1 Model Grid 142 Horizontal and vertical grid options for the submodel can be selected from the Model Grid tab shown in Figure 15 1 15 5 1 1 Horizontal Grid Vertical grid settings are shown in the Horizontal Grid area under the Model Grid tab Various fields in this area are explained below AII these fields are calculated by the software The user only decides to choose specified fractions of parent model grid size in X and Y directions that will become the child model grid size in X and Y directions respectively X0 This field displays x coordinate location in the Working Area of the lower left corner of the submodel This number corresponds to the software interpreted shape of the submodel versus the user drawn shape displayed in the Working Area YO This field displays y coordinate location in the Working Area of the lower left corner of the submodel This number corresponds to the software interpreted shape of the submodel versus the user drawn shape displayed in the Working Area X LENGTH This field displays the x direction extent of the submodel area relative to the submodel origin XQ Y LENGTH This field displays the y direction extent of the submodel area relative to the submodel origin YQ NX This field displays the number of cells in the child model in the X direction NY This field displays the number of cells in
370. pecific Lapacit Include Following as GW Basemap Sampling density All Available M GIS modeling layers Place all points within selection polygon GIS selection polygon Scather Point Filter Cancel Figure 22 44 Extracting Polygon Data The user has the option of treating these polygons as a prescribed head dependent flux boundary Treat as prescribed or head dependent flux as a prescribed head feature Treat as prescribed head or as a non specified feature Non specified There are three options for defining head dependent flux features Lakes Rivers and Wetlands Specific polygon shapefiles from the MIV database must be imported into the GIS Model Importer to select these options These are the polygon shapefiles that describe all lakes rivers and wetlands The recharge polygon shapefile must be imported to select Recharge as this is the only shapefile that may be used to define a prescribed flux boundary feature During the extraction process the GIS Extractor searches for specific field identifiers in each shapefile If these specific field identifiers are missing from the shapefile the polygons are read in as Non specified polygons Lake river and wetland polygon shapefiles may be read in as prescribed head features The GIS Extractor will select the head value from these polygons to use as the prescribed head value At any time during the modeling process any unspecified polygon boundary may
371. pens flux inflow outflow data of in a spreadsheet On this spreadsheet 137 water budget is given in m day through multiple rows for the flow features that are represented in the model An example of this spreadsheet is shown in Figure 14 7 The values in this figure correspond to the water balace graph shown in Figure 14 3 Rows follow the same sequential order as the modeling features given by the x axis of the water balance graph A value indicates groundwater outflow while a value indicates inflow to groundwater However this spread sheet does not show the corresponding names of the components as they appear on the graph The user has to follow to sequence The user may copy paste the data onto a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel for further evaluation 2D Chart Control Properties L hart amp rea Flat amp rea ChartLabels View 30 Markers Control Axes Ehartraups ChartStyles Titles Legend ChartGroupes General Data Bar Labels Interet ao un Layout Array Hole 1e 308 eres 1 0 1 AM alue alue 52 716 ThisSenes 1 m ThisPoint 1 zl Load Save Edit Series Sort Cancel Help Figure 14 6 2D Chart Data Control Properties Chart Groups tab with Data sub tab The following water budget Edit tuat 20 pars components and their values correspond to the graph in Figure 14 3 Boundary in Boundary out River 1854 7233213
372. performs the same function See Section 3 13 for information concerning the Working Area the Working Area Attribute Display and the Model Screen Selecting this enlarges the Working Area and Working Area Attribute Display within the Model Screen The Zoom in button see Section 3 4 performs the same function See Section 3 13 for information concerning the Working Area the Working Area Attribute Display and the Model Screen Selecting this updates the Working Area and other IGW Version 5 0P windows to include all recently changed parameters The Refresh button see Section 3 4 performs the same function Selecting this opens the Model Draw Option window Section 19 1 details the options available in this window for changing the IGW Version 5 0P display Change Display Property This feature is currently inactive in IGW Version 5 0P Attributes Explorer Show Toolbar Selecting this feature access the Attributes Explorer window For detailed information on this feature and all of its uses see Error eference source not found By default this feature 1s active Un selecting it will remove the button palette SATDI and Working Area Display Tools from the Model Screen 16 Show Model Notepad default this feature is active Un selecting this removes the Working Area Attribute Display WAAD from the Model Screen 3 3 7 Help Menu The Help menu contains the operations shown in Figur
373. plays the final flow solution This can be changed by right clicking on the either the Solver button the Backward Particle Tracking button the Stop button or the Forward button and selecting Step by Step from the menu that appears This sets the software to display the solution after every outer iteration see Section 13 1 1 This setting lasts only once and therefore must be repeated every time this display option is desired After the flow solution 1s finished the software will continue simulation of any particles or plumes without recalculating the flow unless the model is in transient state If the model is in transient state the flow will be recalculated and displayed with every time step Any particle or plume calculations will be performed with respect to the transient flow field A window will appear when the simulation length has been reached if the Stop when simulation length is reached option was checked in the Simulation Time Parameters window see Chapter 11 While a simulation is in progress the Stop button is the only one that is available The software will finish its current time step calculations before stopping the simulation The simulation time is tracked by the clock in the WAAD see Section 3 13 and the Flow Time Plume Time and Particle Time clocks in the SATDI see Section 3 5 The WAAD clock displays the greatest time from the three SATDI
374. pliers for Sensitivity Analysis for Physical Properties TTT TAT Aquifer Elevations Calibration Data tab is empty in IGW Version 5 0P Sources and Sinks tab has the multipliers for Recharge Source Concentration River Drain Prescribed Head General Head Dependent Leakage and Evapotranspiration The user can enter different multipliers for different model layers or click Apply this setting to polygons in all other layers button to use the same multiplier s in all layers Sources and Sinks tab is shown in Figure 4 8 41 Multiplers For Sensitivity Analysis Aquifer Elevations Sources and Physical Properties Calibration Data Sinks Recharge Brescribed Head Rate Constant Concentration G Head D dent Leak Source Concentration General Head Dependent Leakage Instantaneous Leakance Continuous Source Head Concentration Hiver Hiv stage Evapotranspiration Concentration Max ET Depth E L epth Leakance Drain Leakance Apply this setting to polygons in all other layers Figure 4 8 Multipliers for Sensitivity Analysis for Sources and Sinks The individual zone entries one level below in the LHP 1 Feature Particle Group level Figure 4 2 are titled Zone XXXX where XXXX is a software assigned number starting at 1001 RHP for this level is discussed in Section 7 6 4 1 2 5 Polylines The RHP for the Plines entry on the Group level is
375. pping pausing the simulations the user can reset the plume s and or particles by clicking on initialize particle s and or initialize plume buttons s E E eo The Flow Time Plume Time and Particle Time sections display the computational time for the flow plume and particles respectively Having three separate clocks allows the user to track these model components separately and becomes very useful when model features are added during a simulation or when the clocks associated with certain features are reset to zero the other clocks remain unaffected Finally after stopping pausing the simulations the user can reset any or all of the time clocks by clicking on the appropriate buttons for flow clock concentration clock plume and or particle clock E 61 5 li Time Step DT 170 dy fo J Flow Time 0 0e0 Flume Time 0 0e0 Farticle Time 0 0e0 Flume Step 1 2 DT Particle Step 1 2 DT Visual Step 1 DT Figure 11 2 SATDI The ability to change the time step during the model simulations and adjusting the frequency of the plume and particle calculations is very useful as the characteristic time scales between these transport processes and flow may often be different Typically performing multiple transport calculations per time step yields a more accurate solution although it will increase computational time However since GW Version 5 0P provides the user wit
376. pture option Screen capture options are discussed in Section 23 1 2 Set Capture Option 12 4 Clicking this button allows the user to edit screen capture options by opening the Automatic Capture window Screen capture options are discussed in Section 23 1 2 Step Adjustment and Time Display Interface The Step Adjustment and Time Display Interface SATDI is located on the left side of the main screen immediately below the Button Palette as highlighted in Figure 3 1 When model is running in transient mode this area provides quick access to visualization for flow time plume time and particle time The area also provides interface to make changes in the length of time steps for the flow model the plum and the particles For more details on SATDI please refer to Section 11 2 Working Area Display Tools 3 7 There are 12 buttons in Working Area Display Tools Clicking the arrow buttons in the area will move the entire Working Area and WAAD within the IGW main window The buttons in the right most column are Zoom In Refresh Screen and Zoom Out They are exactly the same as those on the Buttons Palette see Section 3 4 By clicking the button in the center of all arrows brings the Working Area and WAAD back to default magnifications and location Layer Navigator 3 8 Layer navigator displays the number of current la Da geological and computational layer in the model
377. quifer bottom Cancel Figure 10 1 Particle Properties 102 Horizontal Settings and 3D matrix are not applicable to single partilcles Vertical Settings area is shown in Figure 10 2 2D matrix at a vertical location of allows the user to specify the exact release point within the thickness of a given layer by using the pull down box shown in Figure 10 2 By default the location to release the particles is halfway down the layer value of 0 5 where 1 is the aquifer top and 0 is the bottom of the aquifer Vertical Settings 2D matrix at a vertical location of Vertical location tap Vertical location bottom 1 aquifer tap Vertical density multiplier 1 0 aquifer bottom Cancel LK Figure 10 2 Vertical Definition Settings for Particles At this point the cursor is still in draw mode and the user may continue to add particles as desired 10 1 2 Particle Zone Polygon button Button Palette row 4 column 2 This puts the cursor in draw mode The user may now draw a zone same methodology as defining a zone Section 7 1 in the Working Area The first step in defining a zone of particles is clicking the Add Particles Inside a As soon as the user finishes drawing the zone the Particles window appears see Figure 10 3 with the same features as the single particles in Section 10 1 1 except that now the Horizontal Setting and 3D matrix options are
378. r Option to import polyline on basis mpart all of stream order t Import polyline with stream order gt Cancel t Import polyline with stream order Figure 22 43 Stream Order Filter 22 17 5 Polygon Data Surface water bodies wetlands and estimated groundwater recharge are represented in the MIV and GWIM databases as polygon shapefiles The extraction filter options for polygons are shown in Figure 22 44 270 Extraction Criteria Point Layers Polyline Layers 0 Option to export polygon t Treat as prescribed head m shapefile as a head dependent Treat as head dependent flux iw Ls lake river or wetland to the IGW Streams Options Modeling Environment M Drains Options Well Filter Sampling density AIX s Mon specified o Fr as scatter Option to import GW recharge shapefile W Top elevation Polygon Layers Treat as prescribed or head dependent flux DEM Bedrock top lookup iw Lakes tables Options Iw Bottom elevation Option to import id Bedrock top polygon as v wetlands Options Bottom of well prescribed head W Static water level Starting head Option to import Treat as prescribed head f Prescrbed head polygon as nonspecified Polygon Size Filter feature Polygon size filter W Recharge W Hydraulic Conduct s
379. r is black for all symbol types The size is defined in the Size box under the Fill Color selection box 254 symbol Display Options Point Symbol Circle f Square Point symbol f Triangle fill color t Cross TrueType Solid line Point symbol size Dash line Dat line Dash Dot line Dash Dot Dot line W Show outline iw Visible in Gh Show labels Choose a field WE LLID Figure 22 19 22 9 Adding a Single GIS Layer Point symbol type Vertical Upward Diagonal Downward Diagonal Cross Diagonal Cross Light Gray Fill Gray Fill DarkGray Fill HE NE E ME MM E Changing Symbol Display Wells Sections 22 4 and 22 5 described the process for importing GIS mapping or model data layers using the appropriate buttons on the GIS Model Importer toolbar It is also possible to add layers by positioning the cursor on either Layers for Modeling or Layers for Mapping in the GIS Layer Explorer window and right clicking the mouse Figure 22 20 and Figure 22 21 This feature functions exactly as the two add layer buttons on the GIS Model Importer toolbar 299 DEK GIS Model Importer Lie ei S E E Ei iy All w ells Expanded8 shp 4 Polline Layers 4 NHD Expanded8 shp 7149 Polygon Layers V1 Augusta E panded8 shp 22 Lakes Expanded8 manual shp Lithology Layers v Por Refresh All Pol
380. r point along the desired polyline Again a line will extend from the initial point to the current location of the cursor indicating the proposed segment of the polyline The user should adjust the location of the mouse cursor to make the proposed segment coincide with the user s desired segment Clicking the mouse will set the point This process should be repeated until the desired polyline shape has been achieved Double clicking the mouse ends the process and sets the polyline in the software If the desired polyline were simply one line segment then the user should double click at the second point instead of continuing the process Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 8 1 An Example Polyline in the Working Area 89 Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for each segment endpoint in the VCI see Section 3 13 instead of clicking the mouse at the desired location This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and allows for a more precise development of polyline features When a polyline is defined in the software it becomes the active feature At this point the cursor is still in draw mode and the user may continue to add polylines as desired 8 2 Selecting Polylines To select a polyline in the Working Area first click the Select a Polyline and Edit It button row 3 column 3 and then click the cursor at a point on the desired polyline
381. r the main model will appear in a separate window as shown in Figure 15 17 Notice that this mass balance has a component named SubM This component pertains to all the conceptual model features inside the submodels within the main model Water balance for all the conceptual features inside the submodels are lumped in the SubM bar However by double clicking any where in the grey area of this window the user can revert it to the normal water balance display for the main model as shown in Figure 14 3 Double clicking in normal water balance display will toggle the display back to the submodel specific water balance 155 Also notice that the SubM bar is stacked with different colors Each color represents a different submodel at the next hierarchical level Two colors in SubM bar in Figure 15 17 indicates that there are two submodels at the next hierarchical level Model 1 Water Balance in Zone 1001 File Display Water Balance SubM No submodel s contributions Time Variation x y Plot Instantaneous Cumulative Figure 15 17 main Model Water Balance 4 Click once in each color in the SubM bar Each click will open a separate water balance window for the submodel at the next hierarchical level Figure 15 18 shows water balance for the next hierarchical level Model 1 2 Water Balance in Zone 1001 Sele File Display Water Balance CHead s Bnadout submadel s contributions Time Variatian s y Plot c Insta
382. rameters for the model More information is found on this topic in Section 3 12 Unlock Cursor Discretization Flags Selecting this feature allows the user to unlock the cursor to reveal values in the Cursor Activated Table This feature also allows the user to make changes to the model without having to discretize it offering flexibility to the user in terms of approach variations for a given model Set Probe Sensitivity for Node Edit This feature is used to increase or decrease the sensitivity area for cursor activation for node edit Clicking on this item opens the Probing Setting for Node Edit window as shown in Figure 3 4 See Node Edit Mode in Section 3 16 for details 15 Open a process file Probing Setting for Node Edit Egi Probe Size fe Automatic 1 of Deltas of Mesh Grid Customized Cancel OF Figure 3 4 Probing Setting for Node Edit window This feature allows the user to open a Monitoring Well or Pline Flux data file Please refer to Section for details Grid Based Operation Selecting this feature allows the user to modify the grid using different array features Grid based operations are explained in Chapter 17 3 3 6 Display Menu The Display menu contains the following operations Zoom out Zoom in Refresh Display Options Selecting this shrinks the Working Area and Working Area Attribute Display within the Model Screen The Zoom out button see Section 3 4
383. raw the new shape for the zone same methodology as Section 7 1 When finished the old zone will disappear and the new zone will have all the associations of the old one it will also become the active feature This is similar to redefining the zone Section 7 3 except this method replaces the zone in one step instead of using incremental adjustments Therefore this replacement method is most useful if the newly desired zone 1s quite different in shape than the one to be replaced If only a minor adjustment to the zone shape is required it would be simpler to use the method presented in Section 7 3 57 7 6 Setting Zone Attributes Zone attributes are set in the AE see Section Error Reference source not found After ccessing the AE the first step is to select the desired zone in the LHP i e Zone 1001 see Section 4 1 1 Doing this brings up the Zone RHP see Section 4 1 2 A sample of the RHP for Zone 101 is shown in Figure 7 3 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree Em Zone 1002 Physical Properties Project Main Model Dd Layer 1 D Zones 1001 89 Zone 1001 CP Zone 1002 Conductivity Kx Ky KwKz Orientation of l Ky Orientation of KK x Kz Storage Terms Specific Yield Hydraulic Conductivity TN Specific Storage Effective Porosity Random Color Pattern Transparent Color
384. retization Table window 122 Having a look at the Discretization Table before shallow discretization is a good idea The user can see before hand what all parameters have been modified since last discretization and make up for any omissions at this stage If any changes are made in the grid size or shape and or any change is made in the number of conceptual or computational layers shallow discretization will sz not implement those changes Any change in model grid and or layers will EAE 3E require deep discretization For the first discretization of a model functions of both deep and shallow discretization buttons are the same After some changes are made in the model using Working Area or Attributes Explorer e g modifying locations and values of modeling features it is enough to use shallow discretization in order to introduce those changes This will ONLY implement the incremental changes to the model instead of discretizing the whole model reducing the computational time If user feels that some changes do not seem to take effect 1n the model he she may go for deep discretization to fully implement all changes made 12 5 Displaying the Grid By default the grid is not displayed in the Working Area The grid line is activated in the Main Model Draw Option window see Section 19 1 by checking the box next to Grid Line in the Reference Coordinate Visualization area and then clicking the OK button
385. ride any pumping rate assigned to that well in the point shapefile The option for assigning a uniform pumping rate is selected using the left mouse button on the Use for wells with following pumping rate selection box The uniform pumping rate is entered along with the appropriate units One of the two boxes Reported or Zero or unknown must be selected if the uniform pumping rate is to override the reported pumping rate or to be entered where the reported rate 1s zero unknown or both conditions Note that the Zero or unknown option is active only after the Extract wells with zero or unknown pumping capacity option shown below is selected Option to import wells with zero or unknown pumping rate Default is not to import wells with no reported pumping rates Import Extraction Criteria wells as pumping Point Layers P wells Fr axo Iv wells with zero ar unknown pumping capacity Ww Use E 00 for wells with following pumping rate W Heparted ero or unknown Option to set uniform pumping rate for wells with Reported and or Zero or unknown pumping rates Well Filter Sampling density All Available vw nM ax xcofer poss v elevati Iw Tap elevation Well Filter for setting criteria for DEM Sampling density aj avaiable sampling determining which wells Bedrock top density are selected to be extracted Figure 22 32 Extracting Point Data as Pumping W
386. rinks the Working Area and Working Area Attribute Display within the Model Screen see Section 3 13 This is the same as selecting Zoom out on the Display menu see Section 3 3 6 The Zoom out button is discussed further in Section 19 8 Numerical Solver Settings 9 1 Clicking this button allows the user to adjust flow transport and stochastic model solver settings by opening the Solver window See Chapter 13 for more information concerning the solver engine settings rm Run Model Backward 9 2 Clicking this button causes the software to track particles in the opposite direction of the velocity vectors Backward particle tracking is presented in Section 10 3 2 lt If the button is inactive it will appear grayed out as shown to the right Pause Stop Model 9 3 Clicking this button causes the software to stop the present simulation at the current state The software will finish its calculations and the model redraws for the present time step before appearing idle Run Model Forward 9 4 Clicking this button causes the software to solve the numerical model If the model is set to transient state or there are transport calculations to be done in a steady state model then the software will continually update as it proceeds through the simulation Options for running the model are discussed in Chapter 14 The solver options are presented in Chapter 13 The model must be discretized s
387. ristics Section 13 3 1 Right hand Pane Section 4 1 2 RMA Right Message Area Section 3 13 SATDI Step Adjustment and Time Display Interface Figure 3 1 5 lt O P Successive Over Relaxation Section 13 1 1 PS Time Process Selector Section 4 1 3 VC Vertex Coordinate Interface Section 3 13 O Section 5 2 R A Visualization Option Area Section 7 6 A Appendix E WAAD XXXX C ZTA MGD Million Gallons per Day Section 9 4 2 MHz Section 1 2 3 i 1 2 3 System Requirements IGW Version 5 0P is designed for PCs running Microsoft Windows The software runs on the following versions of Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP and Vista Table 1 2 lists the minimum and recommended system requirements for reliably using the IGW Version 5 0P software Users of Windows 95 98 NT and 2000 will need access to zip decompression software See Section 2 1 for more information Table 1 2 Minimum and Recommended System Requirements ATTRIBUTE MINIMUM RECOMMENDED Processor Speed 300 MHz 800 MHz Memory RAM 64 MB 256 MB Hard Drive Space 100 MB 200 MB Display Resolution 640 x 480 dpi 1024 x 768 dpi Color Setting 1 3 Additional Information Additional information concerning IGW can be obtained from the IGW website http www egr msu edu igw The site contains numerous topics including Exploring the capabilities and algorithms associated with the software Viewing software demonstrations and asso
388. rrespond to the computational layers The user can also directly type in the number corresponding to the desired geological and or computation layer in the fields provided at the top The selected layer will show up in the working area eo 3 Comp 2 I Figure 12 7 Layer Navigation Window Another way to switch between different layers is using the layer selection tool at the bottom left of the Working Area 7 4mm umb coo gt 12 3 Advanced Discretization Options Clicking the Advanced Discretization Options button on Define Model Grid window opens the Advanced Options window as shown in Figure 12 8 Advanced Options Selected Model Main model only Copy to Multiple and all its submodels Machines Discretization Upton f Adaptive discretization Cancel Define Min Thickness OF Figure 12 8 Advanced Discretization Options This window affords the user several options including the choice to discretize the main model only or instead discretize the main model and all of its sub models see Chapter 15 for more on submodels The option of Adaptive Discretization or Deep Discretization is shown in Figure 12 8 though at this time the deep discretization feature 1s not offered 120 The minimum thickness of a geological layer can also be defined by clicking on the Define Min Thickness button in the bottom of the window This opens a separate screen Figur
389. rs Number of Intervals 10 Scatterplot Lag h 100 D Scatterplot Tolerance m Draw Close Window Variable T ail Figure 20 6 scatterplot Outlier Analysis Following the examination of the data distribution in the Exploratory Data Analysis it is generally necessary to perform an outlier analysis of the data and remove any possible outliers The first step is to check the Regression analysis check box Figure 20 7 This is necessary since the outlier analysis fits a regression equation of the users choosing to the data The user also selects the type of regression equation e g Linear Bilinear Quadratic Biquadratic or a higher order More and whether to perform Global or Local regression These options depend entirely on the data set 214 It is recommended that the user perform the outlier analysis using different regression options to obtain the best regression fit to the data After selecting the Regression options the user next selects the Outlier Analysis button When processing hydraulic conductivity data it is necessary to check the Use Log Scale option Selecting this option forces IGW to process the logarithm of the estimated hydraulic conductivity values Attributes Explorer Outlier Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree Seay Analysis Project Remove Attribute Outlier Analysis Main Model Layer 1 Exploratory Analysis DP Zones 1001 2 4 Zone 1001 Show
390. rties In the Sediment thickness d area in the window the user can select Constant and subsequently enter a value to set the thickness of the river bottom sediments The default value entry is 0 98425 ft with centimeters cm meters m and inches in also available Alternately the user may set the thickness to be equal to River bot elev aquifer top elev or in other words the difference between the bottom of the river and the top elevation of the aquifer Ee Fig g g 70 If unconfined situations are expected or develop during the simulation it is recommended to use the Constant setting to define the sediment thickness The problem arises because the top of the aquifer and water table no longer coincide in an unconfined aquifer and saturated thickness may change HEAD DEPENDENT FLUX ONE WAY AREA Checking the box before Head Dependent Flux One Way defines the zone as an area of direct outward seepage flux relative to the aquifer such as a wetland drain trench or quarry A drain does not supply any aquifer recharge The relative local head controls the flux between the aquifer and the water body Outward flux from the aquifer into zone exists when the local head in the aquifer exceeds the elevation of the zone The equation controlling the flow of water into the zone is Ga er 7 6 1 2 1 0 if h lt d where specific discharge into the zone LT h head in the aquifer L
391. s are set in the AE see Section Error Reference source not found After ccessing the AE the first step is to select the desired polyline in the LHP see Section 4 1 1 Doing this brings up the Pline RHP see Section 4 1 2 A sample of the RHP for a polyline is shown in Figure 8 2 90 Pline 1001 Non specitied Prescribed Head Constant 000 ft Venable Equalta Y elevation e g Water T able Head Dependent Flux Calculate and display flus across the polyline Iv Show total flus at a selected time in new window m Apply Seepage flux Solute flux Show total flus as a function of time in new windo Display Option width 1 Pixels Color Figure 8 2 RHP for Polylines The polyline attributes displayed in the AE are discussed in the following subsections 8 5 1 Non Specified Selecting Non Specified in the Polyline Type area makes the polyline non functional in the model solution It is in effect for drawing purposes only This is the default setting 8 5 2 Prescribed Head This section allows the user to manipulate the polyline with a designated head type The head choices are Constant Variable and Equal to Y elevation as shown in Figure 8 3 Prescribed Head Constant 00 0 ft Variable Equalta Y elevation amp g ater T able Figure 8 3 Prescribed Head area CONSTANT HEAD Selecting Constant in the Prescribed Head
392. s balance for respective submodels appear next to their nodes Mass balance for submodels is explained in detail in next section Section 15 11 5 153 Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart Err 3 851E 03 Num Iter 4 Err 3 244E 03 Err 9 490E 03 Err 1 845E 03 Err 8 350E 04 1 533 03 Err 5 461E 03 En 6 972E 03 En 1 415E 03 Err 5 337E 04 Err 8 353E 04 Err 3 322E 03 En 6 248E 03 Err 2 905E 04 Err 5 483E 03 1 650 04 Errz1 153E 04 Current ErrorHead 8 3530E 04 atl 1 J 19 K 1 lt gt OldHead 5 9991 01 New 6 0075E 01 A Line Option Model 1 1 2 1 CL Bi Current ErrorHead 5 3375E 04 atl 1 33 K 1 lt gt OldHead 4 1152E 01 New Heads 4 1206E 01 Model 1 2 2 2 1 F Current ErorHead 5 4830 03 atl 41 J 1 K 1 lle Old Head 1 2219E 00 New Head 1 2274E 00 start Idx of Child Model 1 1 2 1 1 Current ErrorHead 2 9048E 04 atl 1 49 K 1 lt gt Old Head 5 1567 01 New 5 1596E 01 stop Idx of Parent Adhere to Nodes Current ErrorHead 1 64956 04 atl 1 55 K 1 lt gt OldHead 7 0845E 01 New 7 0861E 01 SubModelg Mass Balance Model 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Current ErorHead 1 1630E 04 atl 1 47 K 1 lt gt OldHead 9 3536E 01 New Head 9 3548E 01 Size fu um v Eror Bars Current ErrorHead 9 8513E 03 atl 28 5 1 lt gt OldHead 1 0224 00 New Head 1 0322E 00 in Upscaling Forward do
393. s defined the Particles window appears prompting the user to enter the number of particles to be released along the polyline Once the number is entered click OK to create the particle polyline or Cancel to abort Particle implementation is discussed further in Chapter 10 Add Particles Around Well s 4 4 Clicking this button allows the user to add particles to existing wells This is discussed further in Section 10 1 4 Particle implementation is discussed further in Chapter 10 Add Scatter Point 5 1 Clicking this button allows the user to add a scatter point associated with a zone to the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to draw mode see Section 3 16 and the user may click at any point in the Working Area to define a scatter point This process may be repeated as desired without having to re select the Add Scatter Point button however be sure to wait for the crosshair cursor to reappear before defining another scatter point If no zone is active attempting to add scatter points in the Working Area will bring up the Message window with the text You should select a zone first In this case click the OK button select the desired zone and then re click the Add Scatter Point button Scatter point implementation is discussed further in Section 7 7 20 Before adding scatter points the user should first select the polygon onto which they will add the p
394. s from the unconditional random field options are used These defaults may be edited by clicking the Option button to open the Option of Unconditional Random Field window see the Appendix B D If Correlated with LnK button is selected the user then may specify whether the relationship is a or The correlations are specified by the following formula with the plus sign applicable for the correlation and the sign applicable for the correlation w B II D where x the variable of interest applicable dimensions the mean of the variable of interest applicable dimensions a the correlation factor T L f inK the natural log of conductivity L T and w white noise value dimensionless 293 The user specifies the coefficient of variation in the Variation coeff Field This is defined as the standard deviation divided by the mean value c and is used to determine value The user also specifies the white noise value This value typically the standard deviation then sets the upper boundary for the distribution of the randomly selected white noise values while the lower bound is set as the of this value The white noise exhibits a normal distribution For either of these the user may set fields to reflect absolute values leaving the units list field blank default or to relative values by setting the units list field to Therefore
395. s the user edits them As additional data are entered in the Attribute Explorer they are appended to the spreadsheet In this example the new data are for the top of the screen interval bottom of the screen interval and pumping rate for that particular well The number of attributes are shown on the same spreadsheet Table 4 2 Import export structure for wells Welsduafe Geemedbylw Oo s MEN Well 4 x Y Screen sereen Bot Q 37 In order to import scatter points wells to IGW the data base structure should be the same as the spreadsheet exported from IGW The user may choose the sequence to follow through columns of the spreadsheet by simply exporting a dataset from IGW The same structure can then easily be applied for the CSV file that will be imported The Export scatter points wells command converts data to the metric system regardless of the unit system the data are in presently Before importing scatter points wells to IGW data should be entered in metric system units for convenience There are two other file formats SPF and SWF These formats are not currently used in the IGW importing exporting procedure When an entry is selected in the LHP it will be highlighted with a blue box In addition if a model feature is selected its corresponding entry in the Working Area will be outlined in red Features selected in the Working Area will automatically become highlighted in the AE W
396. se Distance Weighted IDW interpolation Inverse distance weighted methods are based on the assumption that the interpolating surface should be influenced the most by the nearby points and less by the more distant points The interpolating surface is a weighted average of the scatter points and the weight assigned to each scatter point diminishes as the distance from the interpolation point to the scatter point increases The simplest form of inverse distance weighted interpolation is sometimes called Shepard s Method Shepard 1968 The equation used is as follows FG y wf where n number of scatter points in the dat set f prescribed function values at the scatter points e g the data set values and w weight functions assigned to each scatter point The classical form of the weight function 1s h Yu jel w 1 where p arbitrary positive real number called the power parameter typically 2 and h distance from the scatter to the interpolation point E 2 2 h 4 x xjy where x y coordinates of the interpolation point and as y coordinates of each scatter point The weight function varies from a value of unity at the scatter point to a value approaching zero as the distance from the scatter point increases The weight functions are normalized so that the weights sum to convergence The effect of the weight function is that the surface interpolates each scatter
397. ser may simply click within a submodel in the Working Area to select it This is alternatively referred to as making the submodel active When a feature 1s selected it appears outlined in red in the Working Area and highlighted in the AE window see Chapter 4 This process is discussed further in Section 15 7 Display Options 8 1 Clicking this button allows the user to adjust numerous display parameters by opening the Main Model Draw Option window This is the same window that appears when Option from the Display menu is selected This window and its functionality are discussed further in Section 19 1 Refresh Screen 8 2 Clicking this button causes all IGW Version 5 0P screens and windows to be redrawn with any incorporated changes such as window resizing or a changing of color for a certain attribute It is not always necessary to click the Refresh Screen button as the software automatically updates most changes Details concerning changing the display are presented in Section 19 7 Clicking this button is the same as selecting Refresh on the Display menu see Section 3 3 6 22 Zoom In 8 3 Clicking this button enlarges the Working Area and Working Area Attribute Display within the Model Screen see Section 3 13 This is the same as selecting Zoom in on the Display menu see Section 3 3 6 The Zoom in button is discussed further in Section 19 8 Zoom Out 8 4 Clicking this button sh
398. ser to http www egr msu edu lishug research igw This is the IGW home page 17 Tip of the Day Selecting this toggles the Tip of the Day window on and off A check mark appears in this window if it is active The Tip of the Day window is discussed in Section 2 3 3 4 Button Palette The Button Palette is located just below the menu bar on the left hand side of the main window see Figure 3 1 In the initial state the software displays 48 buttons all of which are active in IGW 5 0P The button functions are explained further in the remainder of this section The title of the button is appears in a bubble box when the cursor is placed over it Due to differences in display resolution settings the Button Palette may appear differently on some machines The location of each button is given next to its name in a row column format that coincides with its location in the 12 x 4 palette Create New Project 1 1 Clicking this button opens a new model without saving the current work It performs the same function as the New Model operation in the File menu Section 3 3 1 Open Model 1 2 Clicking this button allows the user to open a previously saved model in IGW Save model 1 3 Clicking this button allows the user to save the current model into any desired location Define model domain Import Basemap 1 4 Clicking this button initiates the process of setting a picture file as
399. sis of their intended use by selecting any or all of the desired well categories It is also possible to refine the well selection on the basis of well depth This is shown as the Screen Location filter The user has the option of selecting all wells or entering the Elevation of Screen Top and Depth to Screen Bottom of the open interval of the well This could be the depth to the top and bottom of the well screen for a Drift well or the depth to the bottom of well casing Top and the bottom of the borehole Bottom for a Rock well The user may select any of the available units by selecting the second box to the right of Top or Bottom The user may further refine the well selection by specifying a time interval from which to select wells on the basis of well construction date This may be done by date Define year range by season Define month range or a combination of the two The user may also choose not to select either time filter In this case all wells meeting the other selection criteria will be selected 22 17 2 Scatter Point Data Figure 22 34 is for exporting a point shapefile as scatter points hydrogeologic point data The option to Treat as scatter points must be selected using the left mouse button The user is able to select the aquifer Top elevation based on land surface elevation DEM or bedrock top elevation Bedrock top aquifer Bottom elevation based on bedrock top elevation Bedrock top or Bottom of well stat
400. sitivity Analysis window RHP for Zones in AE Section 4 1 2 4 but then the model has to be discretized before it can run In more complicated processes 166 discretization may take longer time Also the process resets the whole model based on the conceptual settings which may not be desirable in certain situations while performing sensitivity analysis If you want to see the effect of change s made by using Grid Based Operations in any of the listed arrays in the model DO NOT discretize the model just do one of the following for visualizing the effects When change is made in an input parameter array run the model without discretization and observe the change When any modification is directly made in an output parameter e g Head just refresh the display to observe the change If you discretize the model all the changes made in model arrays using Grid Based Operations will be undone Discretization will replace the values in all arrays based on the conceptual model The Grid Based Operation is a calculator for performing array manipulations as mentioned above It is also used for preparing arrays for IGW and for other simple model array calculations Grid Based Operations provide the user with a set of tools through which 3D arrays in the model can be manipulated in a variety of ways In IGW Version 5 0P Grid Based Operation tools are consolidated in the Grid Based Operations window Figure 17 2 The window can be ac
401. sivity estimates must be divided by the aquifer thickness in order to obtain hydraulic conductivity However wells from which specific capacity data are derived are typically residential wells whose reported test pumping rate is very low Because of this it s not likely that a significant portion of the aquifer was stressed during initial testing The user has the option of using only the thickness of the screen interval the entire aquifer thickness or some value in between To use the screen interval thickness the user must specify a value for pumping rate that is much greater than any value in the extracted data This value should be placed in the first box in the lower left portion of the window shown in Figure 22 39 The value in the second box should be equal to or greater than this value To use the aquifer thickness the user must specify a value much smaller than the smallest value in the extracted data This value must be placed in the second box In this example the value in the first box should be less than or equal to the value in the second box To use a value between the screen interval thickness and aquifer thickness the user should specify a first box value that is typical of the lower range of pumping and a value that is typical of the upper range of pumping should be placed in the second box The user also has the option of including only the specific capacity data derived using a particular well testing method by checking any or
402. source of water for the aquifer Option to treat polyline as prescribed head Option to treat polyline as river or drain in model Shapefile must have ity stream order and or stage mping rate Polyline Layers Treat as prescribed head fe Treat as head dependent flux v Streams Options information W Drains Options t Non specified Lookup table to assign streambed Polygon Layers or drain leakance Treat as prescribed q ead dependent flu Option to Stream Order Filter import as stream and or drain Ivf Lakes Iw Botton elevat M Bedrock td Option to import polyline V wen Stream Order Bettemof as non specified line Filter feature in model Recharge iw Static water le f Starting head f Prescribed head Non specified Hydraulic Conductivity Polygon Size Filter e D dle uad Include Following as IG Basemap Sampling density All Available 0 GIS modeling layers Sampling density Al Available f Treat as prescribed head Place all points within selection polygon GIS selection polygon Cancel Figure 22 41 Polyline Extraction Criteria OF It is also possible to treat all stream orders the same by assigning the same leakance or specifying that the stream functions as a river or drain in the model The
403. splay options selected in the Display Options area this area shows the selected process graphically The graphical representation is dynamically updated at the end of each realization Right anywhere in this area will open the 2D Char Control Properties window Figure 14 5 which is explained in Section 14 3 STATISTICAL PARAMETERS AREA For the parameter selected Seepage or Solute in the Display Options area the Statistical Parameters area displays the listed statistics for that parameter The name of the parameter is also displayed at the top of the area The statistics are updated dynamically at the end of each realization These statistical parameters in this area include max min mean median mode average error std deviation skewness and kurtosis These statistical parameters are defined in Appendix E II I except average error and kurtosis Avg Err and Kurtosis are defined in Section 18 5 2 2 193 DISPLAY OPTIONS AREA The display options area is subdivided into more areas These are explained below Select a Parameter to Visualize allows the user to choose between Seepage or Solute Only one of the stochastic processes can be selected at a time Show Stats on allows the user to choose whether to display stochastic process from the Master machine only or include the Slaves machines as well Master and Slave machines are employed in parallel computing and are discussed in Section 18 7 Clicking on the 9 Probability R
404. stochastic simulations To run the stochastic model the user will discretize the model and go to the Solver Settings as explained in the next section 18 3 Solver Settings The Stochastic Model tab of the Solver Settings window Figure 13 7 is the interface used to activate stochastic modeling It can be accessed through Numerical Solver Setting button and clicking on the Stochastic Model tab The user may select the modeling method as either Single Realization or Monte Carlo Simulations The model must be discretized before selecting the solver setting 178 18 3 1 Select Simulation Methods In this area the user selects the stochastic modeling method Available methods are discussed in the following subsections SINGLE REALIZATION This is the default selection When this is selected the software operates in one of two ways If no parameters are defined statistically as described in Section 18 1 the software will operate in mean deterministic mode However if one or more parameters have been assigned a random field or determined from a scatter point based simulation then the software will operate in single realization mode In single realization mode the software generates only one model realization In this realization each statistically defined parameter is assigned an independent random variable field instead of being assigned a spatially averaged value as would be the case in mean mode Note that th
405. structs the software to automatically determine the parameters and apply them Clicking the associated Edit button opens the Variogram window This window provides visualization of the statistical analysis and allows the user to tweak some of the automatic settings Variogram modeling will be further explained later in this chapter It is important to note that the number of nearest scatter points to use is set in the No of Nearest Points field The greater the number of points used the longer the computational time Typically the number of nearest points is approximately that found within 1 correlation scale from the variogram The basic equation used in ordinary kriging is as follows F x y w f i l where n number of scatter points in the data Set f values of scatter points and w weights assigned to each scatter point This equation is essentially the same as the equation used for inverse distance weighted interpolation except that rather than using weights based on an arbitrary function of distance the weights used in kriging are based on the model variogram The weights are found through the solution of the simultaneous equations based on those below Since there are now four equations and three unknowns a slack variable A is added to the equation set A 7 1 By using the variogram in this fashion to compute the weights the expected estimation error is minimized in a least squares sense
406. subsequently choose Change Draw Property option This opens the 2D Chart Control Properties window in which the user may customize the display of the water balance chart area Details are given in Section 14 3 The user may also open this window by right clicking in the window area 298 THE TIME VARIATION X Y PLOT The Time Variation x y Plot shows the flux plotted on the y axis versus time plotted on the x axis aS a continuous variation An example is shown in Figure D I I 2 Water Balance Recharge Drain CHead In CHead Out 200 300 storage well Out Errar Time days Figure D I I 2 An Example of the Time Variation X Y Plot THE INSTANTANEOUS PLOT The Instantaneous plot shows the instantaneous flux plotted on the y axis for each feature type defined on the x axis An example is shown in Figure D I I 3 Water Balance Ady InBody Gut River Rich Drain Figure D I I 3 An Example of the Instantaneous Plot THE CUMULATIVE PLOT The Cumulative plot is similar in display to the Instantaneous plot above except that it shows the cumulative flux measured from the time the monitoring was activated not when the plot window is opened instead of the instantaneous flux 0 1 1 The Plume Mass Balance This window functions in the same manner as the Water Balance window see Section D I I except it monitors contaminants It is opened by checking the Plume Mass Balance checkbox in the lower left window of Attributes Explorer
407. sure that the correct zone 15 selected before defining scatter points 7 7 2 Selecting Scatter Points To select a scatter point in the Working Area first click the Select Scatter Point button and then click on the desired scatter point The scatter point turns bold and red indicating that is currently selected If multiple scatter points exist at the same location then this method will only allow the user to select the first scatter point defined To select the others or to select the first with an alternate method access them in the AE Section 4 1 1 7 7 3 Assigning Attribute Values to Scatter Points The scatter points appear in the LHP of AE under their parent zone The user can select a point and then assign it spatial attributes and or calibration values using appropriate fields in the RHP A sample of the AE for scatter points is shown in Figure 7 21 The tabs in the RHP for scatter points are identical to those of the zones accept that Scatter Point Control tab is inactive In the bottom portion of RHP the user can change the point style size and color can type in the exact coordinates of the point and can check or uncheck the box to choose whether or not the point be visible in the Working Area 78 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree joe unn Layer 1 08000006303 89 Zones 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Zone 1001 Properties Properties Elevations Sinks 050000
408. t option is selected the user can select boundary conditions for up scaling operation The available choices are Prescribed head and Prescribed flux Currently only one interpolation scheme for up scaling operation is available in GW Version 5 0P When Up scaling to parent option is selected the software performs a number of iterations to between Up scaling and Downscaling operations to converge the modeling results at the interface of parent and child models Upscaling downscaling Iteration area allows the user to select Max Iterations default 20 Relaxation factor default 1 and Head tolerance default 0 01m The exact values assigned to the boundary nodes are determined by linear interpolation between each node in the parent model Relaxation factor is only required when Prescribed flux boundary condition is chosen Recommended value is 0 4 144 There are three more options at the bottom left of Down Upscaling tab All of these options are checked by default Model Grid Down Upscaling scatter Point Control IV Downscaling from parent Upscaling to parent Boundary Condition Type Boundary Condition Type f Prescribed head f Prescribed head C Prescribed flux C Prescribed flux Interpolation Scheme Interpolation Scheme Linear interpolation within Interpolation conceotual laver LI LI LI S Linear interpolation C eo Upscaling downecaling Iteration Max Iterations 20 Relation Factor
409. ted name and will not reset even in the event of subordinate models being deleted 16 6 2 Parameter Interpolation The parameters associated with each node in a particular cross section are taken from the parent model The values are assigned based on linear interpolation between each node in the parent model 16 6 3 Grid Streamline Orientation IGW Version 5 0P allows for the formulation of cross sections that do not follow the grid orientation Also the software treats cross sections in such a way that they do not have to be drawn along streamlines due to the treatment of cross flow discussed in Section 16 6 4 16 6 4 Cross Flow The profile view is an actual model representing the cross section Any net cross flow into the profile slice is treated as recharge for the cross section therefore maintaining an accurate representation The total cross flow for a given cell in the parent model is evenly distributed throughout the vertical extent of the cross section 16 7 Cross Section Window For each cross section defined a separate window titled Cross section n where n 15 a software assigned number will appear see Figure 16 1 when the model is discretized Chapter 12 The windows will cascade from the upper left hand corner of the window corresponding to the cross section that appears above it in the LHP of the AE the location of the initial window will be in the upper left hand corner of the monitor see Secti
410. ted to IGW It is also possible to use the watershed boundary instead of a rectangle to select data for export into the IGW Modeling Environment To do this the watershed shapefile must have been imported into the GIS Model Importer environment as a modeling layer Select the watershed shapefile then select the Data Selector button Move the cursor over the desired watershed and select the watershed All model and mapping layers within the watershed boundary will be selected Figure 22 29 GIS Model Importer GIS Layer Explorer Layers for Modeling Point Layers AllWwells_Expanded8 shp 4 Polyline Layers v 7 NHD_Expanded8 shp 17 Polygon Layers 7149 Augusta Expanded8 shp Lithology Layers Layers for Mapping Point Layers 4 Polline Layers Roads E pay d 17 Polygon Layers Raster Layers Select watershed shapefile n ah 22 Lakes Expanded8 manual shp S 127 Augusta 007 Bougdary shp 9 T elector DER Eg Selected watershed and all data within the watershed boundary is selected 260 22 16 Extracting to IGW Using the left mouse button the user should select the Data Exporter button on the GIS Model Importer toolbar Figure 22 30 GIS Model Importer Layers for Modeling v Point Layers Expanded8 shp 4 Polyline Layers lt v MA NHD Expanded amp shp
411. ted with the submodel it is named after For example a submodel drawn in the Model 1 window will by default be titled Model 1 1 to indicate that it is associated with Model 1 If a second submodel is defined in Model 1 it will be named as Model 1 2 If a submodel is then defined Model 1 2 it will be named as Model 1 2 1 And so on Names of submodels as they appear in LHP of AE for Model 1 are shown in Figure 15 10 If the name of a parent model is changed it will not affect the names of any previously defined subordinates only those defined after the name change will be reflected The x number will retain the correct index regardless of the associated name and will not reset even in the event of subordinate models being deleted EEEEEIEEIEEIEIEEIEEIEEzEiIIII zcE zi m PR R3 R3 BR BR BR BR gure 15 10 Submodel names in LHP of AE 150 The user can over write the name of any submodel in the LHP Clicking once on the submodel name will highlight it clicking on it a second time 1 e clicking on it again will allow the user to edit its name 15 11 3 Adding Submodels in a Submodel IGW Version 5 0P submodels function in a hierarchical setting that allows for the nesting of submodels within other submodels There is no limit to the number of levels of submodels that may be defined To define a sub
412. ter MastersSlaves 7 Realization Change Probability Resolution cave Mean Std CV Figure 18 29 Head PDF with Master Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Head PDF Mn Mean 0 256532 Median 0255s m Mode P251 m AveEm 000504 m Std oom Skewness 0 3432 3 Select a Parameter to Visualize ect Process Eume Taie Head Cone c PDF Realization Mean Mean Std Mean Std Show Stats on CDF Master MasterSlaves Hetgram variation w Realization Change Probability Resolution Save Mean Std CY Figure 18 30 Head PDF with Master Slaves Finally show the fluctuations in Coefficient of Variation for Master machine and Master Slave All these examples highlight the point that in order to have more meaningful stochastic simulations we always need a larger number of realizations For relatively more complicated models it might take a very long time to complete the required number of realizations Parallel computing features can improve the speed of generating realizations by orders of magnitude depending upon the size and combined computing power of a network 201 x Model 1 Probability at Well 1001 Concentration Concentration Process ic M 31670 Min 7 38732 Mean 17 7804 Median 10 2021 Mode 10 24984 Std 18 2208 0 22826 pem m 4 c B D T c
413. text field will not be visible until text is actually typed into it via the AE window Section Error Reference source not found EN Select Text 11 2 Clicking this button allows the user the select a text field within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor is set to select mode see Section 3 16 and the user may simply click on a text field in the Working Area to select it This is alternatively referred to as making the text field active When a feature is selected it appears outlined in red in the Working Area and highlighted in the Attribute Explore AE window see Section Error Reference source not ound Text fields are discussed further in Section 19 3 2 Initialize Particle s 11 3 Clicking this button returns all particles to their original locations Particle implementation is discussed further in Chapter 10 Delete Particle s 11 4 Clicking this button deletes all particles from the conceptual model Particle implementation is discussed further in Chapter 10 No Capture 12 1 Clicking this button turns off all capture options Screen capture options are discussed in Section 23 1 2 External Calling Capture 12 3 Clicking this button activates the time step save feature and allows the user to invoke the manual timer function Screen capture options are discussed in Section 23 1 2 24 Timing Capture 12 3 Clicking this button activates the automatic timing screen ca
414. that describes the tails for a given distribution It is defined as E 18 3 2 2 2 N Do kurtosis 189 where N total number of data in a set x a datum in the set mean of data and o standard deviation of data DISPLAY OPTIONS AREA The display options area is subdivided into more areas These are explained below Select a Parameter to Visualize allows the user to choose between InK Head or Conc Only one of the stochastic processes can be selected at a time Show Stats on allows the user to choose whether to display stochastic process from the Master machine only or include the Slaves machines as well Master and Slave machines are employed in parallel computing and are discussed in Section 18 7 Clicking on the 9 Probability Resolution button opens the Subdivisions between Min Max window as shown in Figure 18 14 This window allows the user to choose the resolution or number of bars for the PDF CDF and Histogram displays for the selected stochastic process in the Graphical Display area subdivisions between Min Max E Resolution Apply Ink Head Seepage Flux 1 0 Concentration Salute Flux 1 F Cancel Figure 18 14 Probability resolution for PDF CDF and Histograms for various parameters In the middle of the Display Options area the user can choose to display the Process the PDF the CDF or the Histogram Only one of these displays can be selected
415. the Clear Basemap button to clear all basemap information and start from scratch The user may click the Cancel button to cancel the entire basemap importing process The user may change the assigned dimensions for the Working Area see Section 5 2 3 Or the user may click the OK button to accept the basemap configuration and end the process Clicking the OK button sets the changes in the software closes the window and updates the Working Area to show the desired basemap 48 5 2 3 Changing Working Area Dimensions Even if a basemap is being used the Working Area is not locked to the size of the basemap or combinations thereof if multiple basemaps are used Simply enter the desired dimensions and the X Length and Y Length in Model Scale and Basemap window Figure 5 2 and the Working Area becomes that size If it is set larger than the basemap the Working Area will show extra white space If it 1s set smaller the Working Area will display only a portion of the basemap It should be noted that the software references the images from the lower left hand corner of the Working Area versus the center of the screen Therefore any additional white space will show at the right hand side and top of the image and not be evenly spaced Similarly when displaying only a portion of the basemap it will appear in the vicinity of the lower left hand corner Loading Multiple Basemap Images Additional base
416. the GIS Importer Window and also in the appropriate position within the GIS Layer Explorer shown on the left side of the GIS Importer Window as a Point Layer Polyline Layer or Polygon Layer under Layers for Mapping Figure 22 8 It is not currently possible to import Lithology or Raster Layers The example shown in Figure 22 8 depicts the steps followed in importing road polylines as a mapping layer Any shapefile may be imported as a mapping layer All data linked to these shapefiles are imported and may be viewed in the GIS Model Importer environment however only the graphic file versus the data from GIS mapping layers are exported to the IGW Modeling Environment m UUHHNHS mea ES Layers for Modeling 4 Point Layers n m TM a Wj AllWells_Expanded8 shp L 4 V 7 Polyline Layers N T Op 3 v 7 NHD_Expanded8 shp 35 5 HP Polygon Layers gt Sg Look in O GIS files Vol 4 X f ex 127 aAugusta Expanded8 shp k NBI HP Lakes Expanded8 manual shp P L 7 4 E All Wells_Expanded8 shp Lithology Layers E Augusta Expanded8 shp Layers for Mapping 3 My Recent E Lakes Expanded8 manual shp f Point Layers 3 i Documents E NHD_Expandeds shp z Polyline L 1 r3 IE Rchg_Expandeds shp TR B Roads Expanged8 shp j 3 B P E Roads Expanded8 shp 3 lt lt Deskto ed 27 Polygon L
417. the IGW website to contact Dr Li or his associates All feedback is appreciated 2 2 Installing the Software Once the setup files have been extracted from the zip file simply execute the setup application located in the folder where the files were extracted The icon or font may not exactly match the picture at right depending on the software version and target computer appearance settings Alternatively some decompression software packages allow the user to install the software as a continuation of the unzipping process In this case it is not necessary to execute the setup file as the decompression software does it automatically The steps involved in the installation process after initiating the setup application are 1 Authorizing installation continuation 2 Closing other open programs and continuing 3 Reading the License Agreement and accepting it 4 Reading an important notice and continuing 5 Selecting the install folder and verifying overwrite if folder already exists There are also movies associated with the tutorials document that may be loaded as a package with the software by using the following link http www egr msu edu lishug research igw download igw3 x 1gw3 x movie zip Versions 3 1 and earlier should be uninstalled before installing of IGW Version 5 0P Selecting the Start Menu group Authorizing continuation last chance to review options and installation Reading important i
418. the Precondition Index which currently is not being utilized 13 1 2 Iteration Parameters INNER ITERATION MATRIX SOLUTION AREA In the Inner Iteration Matrix Solution area the user specifies the maximum number of iterations to be performed in the Max Iterations field 4000 by default and the minimum absolute error allowed between iterations in the Tolerance field 0 0001 meters by default before the solution is considered converged see Section 13 3 OUTER ITERATION WATER TABLE ITERATION AREA In situations where there is a variable water table the software must also perform a water table outer iteration for every inner matrix solution This is due to the fact that flow is dependent on the transmissivity which in turn is dependent on the unknown head values being calculated in the inner iteration The settings for this scenario are in the Outer Iteration Water Table Iteration area The user specifies the maximum number of iterations in the Max Iterations field 3 by default and the relative tolerance allowed between iterations in the Relative Tolerance field 0 1 by default before the solution is considered converged see Section 13 3 The user also specifies how often the software checks to determine the dryness wetness criteria of each cell The default value entry 1 indicates that the software will perform the check during every outer iteration Higher numbers instruct the software to perf
419. the WETFCT field it is dimensionless The default value is 0 5 The threshold can be specified in the THRESH field it must be in meters This field becomes active only after the second head specification option is selected The default value is 0 2 meters 54 Chapter 7 ZONES Zones are used to define areas in the Working Area that represent specific features or areas of interest The following sections describe the implementation and functionality of zone features 71 Defining Zones The first step in defining a zone is clicking the Create Zone Assign Property button Button Palette row 2 column 2 This puts the cursor in drawing mode The user p may now define a zone in the Working Area by simply clicking the mouse at points around the edge of the desired area as explained below First the user selects a beginning point arbitrary somewhere on the edge of the zone and clicks the mouse Next the user moves the mouse cursor to another point on the edge of the area A line will extend from the initial point to the current location of the cursor indicating the proposed edge of the zone The user should adjust the location of the mouse cursor to make the proposed edge coincide with the user s desired edge Once this 1s done clicking the mouse sets the point Next the user should move the mouse cursor to another point on the edge of the area One line will extend from the last defined point Again the user sho
420. the child model in the Y direction DX This field displays the grid cell size of child model in X direction DY This field displays the grid cell size of child model in Y direction 15 5 1 2 Vertical Grid Using the vertical grid options the user can choose the vertical extent of the submodel within the conceptual layers of the main model Vertical Grid area in the submodel RHP Figure 15 1 allows the user to specify the layer of the model in which to place the boundaries of the submodel This save computational time effort if refined solution is not desired for all geological layers The user can select which layers will be the top and bottom boundaries of the model by using the pull down menus next to the respective boundary name Clicking on the Sempulta anel EE as a button opens the vertical discretization window for submodel as shown in Figure 15 2 Here the user can choose a fraction of parent models computational layer thickness within a geological layer which would be applied to each layer in the child model The user can choose different fractions for different geological layers as seen in the figure below For example Geological Layer field in the figure shows that geological layers 1 and 2 are selected as the vertical extents 143 of the submodel The line Layer 2 Parent 3 Child 9 shows that the parent model has 3 computational layers in Layer 2 while the child model has 9 computational layers in Layer 2
421. tical parameters This procedure is similar to the Unconditional Simulation method except the values for the locations corresponding to the measured values are held equal to those values when the field is generated There are two options available in the Simulation Methods area when this procedure is selected 3 Spectral Algorithm the default and 4 Sequential Gaussian Simulation 20 4 Variogram Models The following example illustrates the interpolation of imported static water level elevation data Highlight the model feature labeled StartHead then uncheck the Regression option and select the Interpolation Simulation button Select the radio button to the left of the Interpolation Method option The user has the option of selecting either Inverse Distance or Kriging as the interpolation method and it is generally recommended that the user select the Kriging Method This is accomplished by scrolling down to Kriging Method in the scroll down window below Interpolation Method Figure 20 12 The information contained within the boxes in the lower right hand corner of the AE window change to fit whichever interpolation method is selected Inverse Distance or Kriging It is also necessary for the user to edit the semi variogram model parameters Uncheck Regression Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree nne Project Main Model gt TopE gt 154 pts Main Model Layer 1 DP Zones 1001 DP Zone 1001
422. tices and or 2 Creating new vertices To move an existing vertex click and hold the mouse above the black square that corresponds to the desired vertex endpoint drag the cursor to the desired location and release the mouse button 56 Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 7 2 zone with nodal points denoted as blue crosses To create a new vertex click and hold the mouse above the blue crosshair symbol nearest to the desired location of the new vertex Drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button These steps may be repeated as many times as necessary until the desired zone shape is achieved If the newly desired zone shape is quite different from the existing zone shape it may be more efficient to simply replace the zone This process is described in Section 7 5 T 4 Moving Zones To move zones in the Working Area hold down the CTRL key while clicking and holding the cursor down on top of a selected zone Then drag the zone into the desired position simply by moving the mouse to that position and releasing the cursor T 5 Replacing Zones Sometimes the user may want to replace an existing zone with a new one without losing the associated attributes and scatter points To do this first select the zone to be replaced same methodology as Section 7 2 Next click the Modify Existing Zone button and verify the request in the warning s window that appears D
423. ting and Save 500 Num of realizations on Master for each collecting Mwell File name of monitoring well probability and Statis Overwrite PFlus File name of Plineflux probability and Statis Overwrite Field File name of field mean and variance Overwrite Com gt cm Figure 12 10 Parallel Hosts and Tasks window 121 12 4 Shallow Discretization of Model Once a model has been discretized IGW allows the user to add or delete features parameters in the model or make changes in any of those Also when models are built incrementally all model features and complexity is not introduced in the model right from start Every time a new model feature is added an existing feature deleted or any change made in an existing feature the model needs to be re discretized to map the latest change s in the model to the numerical grid The model should be discretized every time an addition deletion or change 1s made in any features or settings of the model however some features such as particles can be executed in the model without discretization Re discretizing the whole model every time a change is made may not be very efficient in terms of computing time especially in case of more complex models IGW Version 5 0P allows the user to implement any additions changes in conceptual model features to the numerical grid by shallow discretization Clicking the Shallow Discretize button discretizes the model in
424. tion Head This field indicates the value of the calibration data for head Calib C Calibration This field indicates the value of the calibration data for concentration Conductivity Calib_K This field indicates the value of the calibration data for conductivity Conductivity 28 Index of Head Ibound A check mark should be placed in the boxes corresponding to the desired parameters The user may also use the Select All and Unselect buttons as desired Clicking the OK button in the Choose Parameters at Cursor window makes the desired changes appear in the CAT Ibound Calib_H Calib_C and Calib_K cannot be visualized in the Cell Attribute Viewer at this time In the CAT Inactive will be displayed in all but the X Y IX and TY fields when the cursor 1s placed in an inactive cell If a specific parameter is not assigned for a particular cell then a value of N A will be displayed for that cell in the CAT 3 13 Working Area The remainder of the Main Window is referred to as the Model Screen It is pictured in Figure 3 8 Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 3 8 rhe Model Screen The Model Screen exists mainly to provide a background against which the Working Area the large white rectangle and the Working Area Attribute Display WAAD the peach rectangle can be displayed The Working Area
425. tions button on the Button Palette see Section 3 4 The window can also be accessed by clicking the Option button in the RHP of Main Model in the AE or from by selecting Display Options from the Display menu or by selecting Display Options in the pop up menu after right clicking in the Working Area The window is divided in five areas Reference Maps Conceptual Features and Texts Simulation Inputs and Results Monte Carlo Simulations and Display Sequence and some general options All parameters in the window are discussed in the following sections When the desired options have been selected the user selects OK to set the options in the software or Cancel to close the window and discard any changes This window sets the visualization attributes for the main model Visualization attributes submodels and profile models cross sections are set in separate windows Refer to Error eference source not found and Chapter 16 respectively for further information Display Options for Model 1 Reference Maps Display Sequence top to bottom iv Basemap Model Grid Particles W GIS Mapping Layer Velocity GIS Mapping Layer W Horizontal Scale Bar E v Vertical Scale Bar Conceptual Features and Texts iw Polygons W Submodel polygon W Scatter Points iw Wells lw Tests Iv Polylines Seep Area Simulation Inputs and Results iw Head W Particles i Velocity Cone m
426. tiscale Conjugate gradient C Hierarchical LU Decomposition Variogram Model User specified E dit Infer from data C Covariance Kriging Prototype Variogram ot Gub t Main Model 7 Figure 20 17 Changing Number of Nearest Points Used in Kriging Interpolation A different semi variogram model should be fit to each scatter point attribute This is accomplished by selecting the attribute from the AE window and repeating the model fitting process After a semi variogram model has been fit to all scatter point attribute data the user then selects the Apply button to apply all semi variogram models The AE window shown in Figure 20 17 closes and the IGW Modeling Environment window appears 225 Chapter 21 THREE DIMENSIONAL VISUALIZATION IGW offers the ability to display models in three dimensions either as a surface or as a volume Each method contains many features that will be beneficial to the user from cross sectional analysis to zooming in directly on a plume s location by planar coordinates and depth A detailed explanation of these capabilities is below 21 1 Demonstration of 3D Surfaces IGW Version 4 7 allows the model to be viewed as a three dimensional surface with x y and z coordinates that correspond to the values stated for distance and elevation An example of the interface is shown below in Figure 21 1 Model 2 Perspective View of 3D Data Redra
427. to Section 3 9 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for examples of defining well attributes 977 DISPLAY OPTIONS The top left area of the RHP gives various display options for the wells The options include display size color and visibility for well and or label options APPLY SETTINGS TO ALL SUB NODE WELLS This feature allows the user to specify a given flow rate for wells in GPM by default a head correction factor and or give the wells transient values It also allows injection wells to have a specific contamination concentration for each location Clicking the Apply this to all sub node pumping wells box will implement the stated values and or conditions to all pumping wells in the group Likewise clicking the Apply this to all sub node injection wells box will implement the stated values and or conditions to all injection wells in the group 9 4 2 RHP for Attributes of Individual Wells After accessing the AE the first step is to select the desired well in the LHP see Section 4 1 1 Doing this brings up the RHP for wells see Section 4 1 2 as shown in Figure 9 2 The well attributes shown in the AE are discussed in the following subsections Well 1001 Well Location x Top 76552 Color Bottom 120 29 EN BENE Y erasoak W Use default interval size 5 Well vizibl Flow Aate iv PREIS f Pumping O 458 28 Label visible C Transient njection 4 1 Equals to
428. to define the zone over which the solution will apply The user can define such a zone as Domain Control Zone by checking the appropriate box in the RHP of AE when the zone is selected Domain Control Zone check box is located at the bottom right corner of the RHP see Figure 7 3 7 2 Selecting Zones To select a zone in the Working Area first click the Select a Zone button Button Palette row 3 column 2 and then click the cursor within the desired zone The zone becomes outlined in red therefore indicating that is currently selected In the case of zone overlapping the software will select the zone that is taking precedence according to the software rules see Section 6 2 at the specific location the mouse was clicked Alternately the desired zone may be selected in the AE see Section 4 1 1 7 3 Redefining Zones A zone that has been defined in the model can be redefined by placing the cursor in Node Edit mode see Section 3 16 for instructions on placing the cursor in this mode also see set probe sensitivity for node edit in Section 3 3 5 to see how Node Edit is used As soon as you are in mode edit mode the selected zone appears as shown in Figure 7 2 The black squares represent existing nodes and the blue crosshair between the existing nodes represent additional nodes created by the software The user may change the shape of the zone in the Working Area either by 1 Moving the existing ver
429. ton may be used at any time to refresh the features in the Working Area This button will not draw features that have not yet been discretized into the model Zooming In Out within the model screen The Zoom in button may be used to enlarge the Working Area within the model screen The Zoom out button may be used to shrink the Working Area 210 Chapter 20 SCATTER POINT DATA PROCESSING Scatter points are discrete points that may be associated with zones to achieve greater resolution when data such as bore hole logs is available for one or more points Within IGW the processing of scatter point data consists of three primary steps Exploratory Data Analysis Outlier Analysis and Interpolation Simulation The view of the left hand pane LHP is where the user selects the desired statistical interpretation for the defined scatter points It can be accessed by right clicking on any zone in the LHP and selecting Switch List from the drop down menu appears Figure 20 1 Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree 2 Layer 1 one 1001 JP Zones 1001 E Physical sources and Scatter Point Felsen Bee d Zone 10i Properties Properties Elevations Sinks Control P nap Refresh Dan Attributes onductivity Molecular Diffusion cao Delete ctivity Dees 0901 bw D zz h Import Scatter Points Orien degree po pon Switch List ation of Export Scatter Poi
430. tract only polygons that have an area greater than a determined value or extract polygons having an area greater than a specified percentage of all polygons in that layer Selecting the Polygon Size Filter button shown in Figure 22 44 will open the window shown in Figure 22 47 Polygon 5ize Filter Import all t import polygon with area gt Ese t Import polygon with area gt Of all polygons Figure 22 47 Polygon Filter Finally the user has the option of extracting the groundwater recharge rates estimated by the U S Geological Survey by selecting Recharge These are square mile polygons that cover the entire state and there are no manipulative options for these polygons in IGW at this time All line work for the polygon shapefiles may be exported without attributes as Non specified features Within the IGW Model Environment the user may specify the leakance head bottom elevation or flux at any time if they choose to model any Non specified polygons as prescribed flux head dependent flux or prescribed head boundaries 273 22 17 6 Mapping Criteria Prior to extracting data to the IGW Modeling Environment the user has the option of determining how information will be displayed within the IGW Modeling Environment see Include Following as IGW Basemap in lower right corner of Figure 22 48 The first option GIS mapping layers is to display all mapping layer features This option is mandatory and the user has n
431. tributes to every cell in which the center node lies inside of the defined zone area However if the node lies inside the defined zone area at two different points in the same zone due to overlapping the boundary lines that cell will not be assigned to those particular zone attributes When scatter points are defined in a zone their explicitly defined parameters take priority over the zone attributes For example if a scatter point is placed in a zone and the conductivity for the 51 scatter point is specified the conductivity specified for the zone no longer has any effect in the software If two zones overlap the attributes of smaller zones will take precedence over larger zones Dry Re Wetting Criteria The Dry Re wetting Criteria button in the Default Model Parameters window Figure 6 1 opens the Default Desaturation Re wetting Cell Criteria window shown in Figure 6 2 Default Desaturation Re wetting Cell Criteria Wet to Dry f hn BotE Epsilon Epsilon E m Head value assigned to dry cells 0 Ave hn lt BatE Epsilon he BatE 10 1429 h 10 1429 h Bat 10 1429 h 0 1429 h west 10 1429 h East 10 1429 h_North 0 1429 h_Sourth lt BotE Epsilon Dry to wet Awe hn gt BoE Epsilon i h WETFCT Ave hn BatE BatE f hn Epsilon C he WETFET THRESH Bote WETFCT 0 THRESH m f h_Bot BatE Epsilon m n 1667 0 1667 h
432. tropic sotropic Lambda wo Bell whittle Exponential C Mizell seamen Ue Mizell B Lambda 10 Seed 59727775 Variance 1 E Block average Angle n Ma Yes Rotate Around 2 Angle 0 Rotate Around xi Angle Rotate Around r Nugget 20 Cancel More on Kriging Figure 18 6 Random Field Options window E Variogram Experimental V arograrm Theoretical Model Types Isotropic Model Functions Parameters Variogram 2D Anisotropic B Eu Options pherical P eae C 3D Anisotropic idis P Exponential Nugget P t CN Gaussian l Range Influence Radius 16888 77 Power Yarance Slope Customize Exponent Variogram Open Multiscale Window 0 6 Display Options 0 5 Direction w Experimental V 0 4 Dir Directions Expl Direction E 0 3 0 2 Preview BestFit Automatic fitting 07 Enlarge o Manual fitting 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 BOO FOO TET Cancel Lag Distance Mater Definition x Figure 18 7 Variogram window 18 4 2 Conditional Stochastic Simulation A conditional simulation is the one in which simulated field is forced to pass through known data points This honors both the data and the statistics The Conditional Simulation procedure generates a spatially correlated random field based on sample statistical parameters This 183 procedure is similar to the Unconditiona
433. ttom of the aquifer are considered no flow boundaries For unconfined aquifers the values at the top are set to constant head levels 163 based upon the water table These head values are taken from the window in which the particular cross section was drawn For instance a cross section drawn in the Working Area will use the main model for its boundary conditions while a cross section drawn in a submodel window see Error Reference source not found will use that submodel for its boundary conditions The exact alues assigned to the boundary nodes are determined by linear interpolation between each node in the parent model A profile model drawn within a submodel will appear in the LHP of the AE see Section 4 1 1 at the Layer Submodel level This is the same as a profile model drawn in the Working Area but will retain the name of its parent submodel with a n where n is a number following it This indicates that its boundary conditions are not associated with the main model but instead with the submodel it is named after For example a profile model drawn in the Submodel 110 window will be titled Profile Model 110 1 by default to indicate that it 1s associated with Submodel 110 If the name of a parent model is changed it will not affect the names of any previously defined subordinates Only those defined after the name change will be reflected The n number will retain the correct index regardless of the associa
434. tyle Editing data from the water balance chart Figure 14 2 2 Chart Stretching and changing length of the x axis Groups Adding removing modifying labels Giving data path for data from internet Adding removing data fields Changing the color of the chart components by default bars Changing the style and color of the lines Changing the style and color of budget columns Titles Changing the location and visibility of the chart legend Changing the location of the chart legend by entering coordinates Legend Changing the view of the chart legend border Changing the background and foreground color of the chart legend Changing the font style and size of the chart legend Importing image to the background of the chart legend Changing the view style of the chart components Changing the dimensions of the chart area Chart Area Changing the view of the border of the inner chart area Changing the background and foreground color of the inner chart area Importing image to the background of the inner chart area Delineating the plot area of the chart Plot Area Changing the background and foreground color of the plot area Importing image to the background of the plot area Chart Labels Changing the font style and size of the chart label boxes Markers Changing the location of markers by data or value Changing the line style of the axes The user can select Chart Groups tab and then Data sub tab Clicking on Edit button in Data sub tab Figure 14 6 o
435. ues for every cell of the array are tabulated as a single column The first value represents the bottom left cell of the deepest layer in the model 17 2 4 Exporting Single Arrays Clicking the button allows the user to save the assigned attribute array from the grid based distribution as a txt file Save As window appears The user can save the file in a desired location A valid name must be supplied as no default name is given The text file created using this feature is in the format explained above and can be imported back into an array using the Import function If the saved file has to be imported in an array which has a different name the user should first open the file in a text editor and change the array name in the third line before opening the file using Import function 17 2 5 Creating a Temporary Array Selecting this allows the user to create a temporary array file The user must enter a name in the window to the right of the Create button and then click the Create button The name of the temporary file will appear at the bottom of the Attributes Array List 170 17 3 ae The user can create as many temporary arrays as he she requires If the Grid Based Operation window is closed and opened again in the same session the user created array will still appear in the Attributes Array List If the model is discretized all temporary arrays disappear Shallow discretization however will not remove the te
436. ulation area Figure 7 24 Alternate LHP and RHP for Scatter Points 82 As seen in Figure 7 24 the BotE gt 154 Point s is highlighted in the LHP The title in the RHP reads the same This means that there are 154 scatter points in this zone that have explicitly specified aquifer bottom elevation values These points can be statistically analyzed and interpreted 7 7 6 2 Statistical Tools in RHP The user can analyze the data on scatter points for their statistical parameters in a variety of ways Spatial parameters in a model zone such as aquifer elevations hydraulic conductivities etc can be interpolated within the zones RHP provides the user to perform these analyses and interpretations Please refer to Chapter 20 for more detailed account of statistical tools for data processing There are three main areas in the alternate RHP as shown in Figure 7 24 1 Top area with five buttons and a check box 2 Regression 3 Interpolation Simulation The top area deals more with descriptive statistics of the data while Regression and Interpolation Simulation deal with geostatistical analysis of data To set up a particular analysis the user may simply place a check mark in the appropriate box Interpolation Simulation is selected by default Checking both boxes sets up the Combination Analysis in which the data is first regressed and then the residuals are analyzed through the desired interpolation simulation scheme If th
437. uld adjust the location of the mouse cursor to make the line from the last defined point coincide with the desired edge of the zone Clicking the mouse will set the point Another line will extend from the initial point indicating the proposed polygon shape The edge defining process should be repeated until the desired zone shape has been achieved Double clicking the mouse ends the process and sets the zone in the software A rectangle is easily defined by holding down the SHIFT key before clicking the mouse on the first point and then simply moving the cursor to the opposite end of the rectangle and clicking the mouse again Alternately the user may type in the coordinates for each vertex instead of clicking the mouse at the desired location using VCI see Section 3 8 This method is not limited by the resolution of the screen mouse relationship and therefore allows for a more precise development of zone features When a zone is defined in the software it becomes an active feature At this point the cursor is still in draw mode and the user may continue to add more zones as desired A zone drawn in the model area is shown in Figure 7 1 Refer to Section 3 42 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for step by step examples of defining a zone 29 Layer 1 1 Steady Flow Time Elapsed 0 days 0 00 years Figure 1 1 An Example Zone in the Working Area A good first place to start in building a model is
438. ultiplying the drawdown by the Well efficiency factor results in a proportionally higher specific capacity and estimated transmissivity Specific Capacity Based K Transmissivity Calculation Methods Iteration Settings Maximal number of iteration 5 Starting Transmissivity 500 2257 rs Drawdown Bradbury and Q ip J 2s Default storage coefficient 10 0001 4 5 5 rns Default radius 05 Option to extract 8 5 e hydraulic conductivity pub Option to adjust Welllnss Sw C 2 32 7 L reported drawdown Jj on basis of estimates on basis of well pumping method Filter by Test Method Flags d well Confined t Unecontined UNKNOWN AIF BAIL EM efficiency i OTHER M PLUGA Method for estimating n Q 0 57 effective aquifer T 25 1 Well efficiency factor 1 thickness to divide into Drawdown Option to filter out well on basis of reported well drawdown W Drawdown Filter estimated transmissivity Michgan Razack and Huntley Remove wells if drawdown lt 1 Michgan B Mace Michgan C f Customize p i Conductivity Calculation Cancel 0 lt 10 B Screen Interval 0 gt 1500 B Aquifer Thickness Otherwise B Linear Interpolation Between Screen Interval And Aquifer Thickness OF Figure 22 39 Specific Capacity Based K Other Options The transmis
439. umber will instruct the machine to stop after that many number of realizations for each process However if the user desires to let the slave machines continue realizations as long as the user wants then the Stop at box should be unchecked in Monte Carlo Simulation window Figure 18 2 prior to accessing the Parallel Hosts and Tasks window Although a number will still appear in the Total Number of Realizations field but it will not be effective 7 Before selecting the number of processes to be assigned to each slave machine in the network get all desired slave machines in the network ready to receive jobs from the master machine To get them ready follow these steps e Go to each machine and open the Command Prompt e Goto root directory C gt and type the following C gt aaa then press Enter e C V5 echo off is displayed in the Command Prompt window e Leave the window open The machine is now ready to accept jobs from the Master machine 8 Come back to Parallel Hosts and Tasks window 9 Enter the number of processes jobs to be assigned to each Slave machine in the network By default one job is already assigned to the Master 1 e the main model that is running in the machine More number of child jobs can be assigned to master At least one job is to be assigned to every slave machine that the user wants to use for parallel computing A zero in second column against any machine would mean that that machine is
440. until the desired one appears 13 Table 3 1 Available Units in IGW UNIT TYPES UNIT SYSTEMS English Conductivity Time Concentration inch year m day Recharge m day inch year cm day cm year ft year 1 day 1 hour Leakance 1 day 1 day 1 sec 1 month 1 year Ib year Solute kg year Ib day kg day Specific Storage Partioning Coef Ka Bulk Density Set Units Unit System Metric f English Customized Length Solute AL Conductivity Angle ar Time Area Specific Storage Partitioning Caef Kd BulkDensity d n 2 m t Concentration Head Recharge ar Leakance Pumping Hate 0 a Velocity Cancel DK Figure 3 3 Set Units window When entering numbers interface first change the unit and then input the numerical value When changing units software automatically converts the existing numerical value into the new ones Getting in this habit will prevent input errors when inputting data into the software Also after changing the unit be sure to delete all numbers from the numerical field before entering the new ones Some numbers may be present in the field but not visible due to the number having many decimal places and therefore not being completely displayed in the given field Again this helps prevent data entry errors Cell Attribute Viewer Selecting this allows the user to choose the desired pa
441. unty shp Mapping Layers Error message when attempting to read in file as Modeling and Mapping Layer Apply selected layers to all counties EH Message Send files to GIS Importer m Missaukee Data Base Location coh761 gisdpf001 M apl m Modeling Layers Mapping Layers River Recharge Road _ TypelWell Lake Wetland T UST Typell Well Well s F Watershed ge Drain __ 7 Whpa E enl Apply to All Counties Figure 22 4 county Based Assistant A shapefile may be imported as either a modeling layer or a mapping layer but not both The message shown in Figure 22 4 will be displayed should this occur It is possible to select the same shapefiles as Modeling Layers or Mapping Layers for each county by simply clicking on them and depressing Apply to All Counties button It is also possible to select different shapefiles as Modeling Layers or Mapping Layers for each county should that be necessary This is done by simply selecting each county individually from the Selected County List and selecting a shapefile as a modeling layer or mapping layer All selected shapefiles may be sent to the GIS Model Importer by selecting the Deliver to GIS Importer button in the lower right hand corner of the window shown in Figure 22 4 22 2 Opening the GIS Importer Return to the IGW Modeling Environment window by either closing the County Based Assistant w
442. uous pathlines Color Figure 10 8 RHP for a Particle Zone The user may adjust the number of particle columns by entering a number in the appropriate field and also releasing the particles by selecting that button 107 The user has the option of displaying each particle at a single location at each point in time Discrete Particles the default or displaying the entire pathline each particle has traveled Continuous Pathline Vertical aspects of the particle location can be defined in the same manner using the appropriate boxes as described in Section 10 1 2 The user can change the number in the Draw Width field to adjust the display size of the particles in the zone default 1s 3 pixels The user may also click the Color button or the sample particle point box next to it to open the Color window and subsequently select a new color for the particles The default color is pink 10 2 3 RHP for Particles Along a Polyline A sample RHP for the particles along a polyline is shown in Figure 10 9 ParticleLine 1002 Horizontal Setting Number of particles released along this line 30 Release Particles Vertical Settings 2D matis at a vertical location of 10 5 T 3D matrix Vertical location top 1 T Vertical location bottom 0 I cutter fas Vertical density multipier 1 0 aquifer bottom Display Options Size in pixels 3 f Continuous pathlines Color
443. urrent version of the software characterized by its full interactivity and built in real time and animated visualization has the following distinct capabilities e High level and grid independent conceptual modeling This includes interactive visual specification and editing of model domain aquifer properties and stresses over any arbitrarily shaped area at any point in time during the process of model construction simulation and analysis e Automatic grid generation and conversion of conceptual representation to numerical model s e Interactive simulation and real time visualization and animation of flow in response to both deterministic and stochastic stresses e Interactive visual and real time particle tracking random walk and reactive plume modeling in both systematically and randomly fluctuating flow e Interactive and visual conditional simulation of hydrogeologic and geochemical spatial fields real time visual and parallel conditional flow and transport simulations e Interactive scattered data interpolation regression and variogram modeling e Interactive water and contaminant mass balance analysis with visual and real time flux update e Interactive visual and real time monitoring of head hydrographs and concentration breakthroughs e Real time modeling and visualization of aquifer transition confined or unconfined to partially de saturated or completely dry and rewetting e Intera
444. used in the last discretization 2212 A Title Bar H Attributes Explorer Button B Menu Bar l Layer Selector C Button Palette J Grid Based Operations Button D Step Adjustment and Time K Cursor Activated Table CAT Display Interface SATDI L Working Area E Working Area Display Tools M Working Area Attributes Display F Layer Navigator WAAD G Vertex Coordinates Interface N Status Bar Message Bar Figure 3 1 version 5 0P Main Window gt Refer to Section 2 2 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for a short interactive walkthrough of the Main Window interface EH E E jJ pu J pere j t piw J pv J os Nida E ia Title Bar The title bar shows the name of the software the version in this instance 5 0P and the name and path of the open file in this case the software default Untitled It also contains the Windows buttons that allow the user to minimize the window toggle the window between full screen and small window and close the program the same as selecting Exit from the File menu see Section 3 3 1 The remaining attributes of the main window are discussed in the following sections Interactive Groundwater 5 0P gt Untitled Menu Bar The menu bar is located just below the title bar Seven menus are accessible from the menu bar File Modeling GIS 3D Visualization Utility Display and Help
445. user may choose between Unconditional Simulation and Conditional Simulation UNCONDITIONAL SIMULATION The Unconditional Simulation procedure generates a spatially correlated random field based on sample statistical parameters This procedure will generate new values for the locations corresponding to the measured values There are six options available in the Simulation Methods area when this procedure is selected 1 Spectral Algorithm the default 2 Sequential Gaussian Simulation 3 Turning Bands Algorithm 4 Sequential Indicator 5 LU Decomposition and 6 Simulated Annealing Appendices B I I B I II and B I III discuss these methods some of the writing in the referenced appendices is not directly applicable as the appendices were written with respect to the Option of Unconditional Random Field window simply disregard those portions There are two options that appear in the Spatial Statistics Parameters area when Unconditional Simulation is chosen Choosing User Specified allows the user to explicitly define simulation parameters by accessing the Random Field Options window see Appendix F IIL clicking the appropriate Option button Choosing Infer from Data instructs the software to automatically determine the parameters and apply them Clicking the associated Edit button opens the Variogram window see Appendix F II This window provides 87 visualization of the statistical analysis and allows the user to tweak som
446. user to specify the Kd value and any desired randomness The default value set in the Default Attribute window is 0 which is equivalent to no sorption The default entry is zero The available units of measure m g default 1 1 ppm and m kg The default random Kd distribution is activated by clicking the box next to the deactivated Random button Clicking the newly activated Random button allows the user to change the settings for the Random Kd distribution by opening the Random Parameters window see Appendix DECAY COEFFICIENT The decay coefficient is used to describe a first order irreversible process of the form _ 2 7 6 1 1 4 Ot where C concentration ML time decay coefficient T HALF LIFE The half life describes the time it takes half of the given material to decay 7 6 1 3 Aquifer Elevations This layer is where elevations for the zone are defined It is shown in Figure 7 7 The individual parameters are discussed further in the following subsections 63 fone 1001 Physical Biochemical Aquifer Sources and Scatter Paint rn Aquifer Elevations Attribute Elevations Elevation mM 4 Upper fF C zie wp Overlapping Elevation Control for partially penatrating parameters Bottom Elevation Thickness Bottom Elevation AE Fandom Thickness EM Random Figure 7 7 RHP for Aquifer Type Elevatio
447. utational layer whole model from the File menu Selecting this opens the Save As Refer to Section 17 2 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example 5 Refer to Section 17 1 of the IGW Version 5 0P Tutorials document for an example 281 window and the user may browse to the desired path and type in the desired file name for the data store Clicking the Save button then opens the Output Data to File window pictured in Figure 23 2 Clicking the Cancel button aborts the data exporting process Output Data to File Available data for output Data resample rate v L oncentration ppm v Seepage Velocity m day v Seepage Velocity r m day Treat value in v Seepage Velocity zimda Inactive area as Vv L onductiiu m dau in 3 Cancel Lae Figure 23 2 Output Data Types In the Available data for output area the user places a checkmark in the appropriate boxes to indicate which data sets should be saved Head m Concentration ppm Seepage Velocity X m day and Seepage Velocity Y m day are checked by default The user may set the Data resample rate the ratio of sampled nodes to total nodes by using the appropriate list field available settings are 1 default 11 1 For example a setting of 1 samples every node a setting of V samples every other node etc The user may also assign the default value to the inactive Working Area space by enterin
448. utes are related to both input parameters e g aquifer parameters boundary conditions sources and sinks and output results e g head velocity and concentration distribution The user also can create new arrays using the Create button in the Single Array Operations area The new arrays are appended at the end of this list The vertical sliding bar to the right of the Attribute Array list can be used to see all arrays in the list 17 2 Single Array Operation Area Single Array Operation toolbox contains several buttons for single array operations The user can edit import export create and delete an array using these buttons The buttons in this area explained below 17 2 1 Assigning Arrays Prior to using any single array operation except for creating a new array it is necessary to specify an array from the array list on which the operation will be performed To assign an array for single array operation the user has to first highlight an array from the Attributes Array List by single mouse click and then press assign button The selected array shows up in the space as can be seen in Figure 17 3 Edit import export and delete functions can now be preformed on the assigned array Grid Based Operation Single Array Operation Edit Import Figure 17 3 Assigning an array for single array operations Head 3l Conductivity Concentration HBound Bottom Elevation M alo cai
449. vertices To move an existing vertex line segment endpoint click and hold the mouse above the black square that corresponds to the desired vertex drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button To create a new vertex 1 e make one line segment into two click and hold the mouse above the blue crosshair symbol one exists between each vertex nearest to the desired location of the new vertex Drag the cursor to the desired vertex location and release the mouse button These steps may be repeated as many times as necessary until the desired cross section shape is achieved 16 4 Setting Cross Section Attributes Cross section attributes are set in the AE see Chapter 4 After accessing the AE the first step is to select the desired cross section in the LHP see Section 4 1 1 Doing this brings up the Cross section RHP see Section 4 1 2 A sample of the RHP for Cross section 1 is shown in Figure 16 2 The cross section attributes displayed in the AE are discussed in the following subsections Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree gem Cross section 1 Project Main Model 2i 688 Cross sections Number of grid along sect NL 60 Cross section T Layer 1 P Zones 1001 Equal to NL Sqit Kx Kz 89 Zone 1001 Ge Plines 1001 Horizontal grid spacing DL z Pline 1001 Pline 1002 Vertical arid spacing DZ Layer 2 200
450. w Layer Down Show Elev Extension Log Scale Choose Values to Display Set 1 Top Elevation set 2 Elevation Set Perspective Scale Automatically Draw Options Figure 21 1 Window for Demonstrating 3D Surface The interface allows for many different forms of visual manipulation seen in the right hand side of the screen Options include Redraw which resets the model to its original form Layer Up and Layer Down which show different layers of the model and options to show elevation extension and the model on a graphic log scale The remainder of the options are discussed below 21 1 1 Parameters to Display This feature allows the user to select which attributes they would like to display on their three dimensional surface model Along with Top Elevation there are several options available for display Bottom Elevation Aquifer Thickness Head Concentration Velocity X Y Z Conductivity and Transmissivity Figure 21 2 and Figure 21 3 show the selected options and drop down menu for options respectively 226 Choose Values to Display set Top Elevation aet 2 Top Elevation Set Perspective Scale Automatically Figure 21 2 Display Menu Choose Values to Display Set Top Elevation Bottom Elevation Aquifer Thickness Head Concentration Velocity Welocity Veloc
451. w Figure 7 23 A B C D E F G H 1 Scatter Points Sample Data file 2 Layer Layer1 Zone Zone 1001 Attributes 8 3 Wills X Y Cond TopE BotE ConstHead CalibHead CalibConc 4 000001 5521009 213011 7 284 89 164 99 277 673 277 368 100 5 PODDD02 556775 1 2128342 34 01 300 84 199 84 277 368 6 00003 554328 3 212816 9 69 7 288 95 195 95 7 POO0004 551878 3 212782 1 288 04 228 04 282 245 8 00005 556749 212778 9 25 66 300 84 234 84 291 694 281 635 104 9 00006 5567334 212716 299 92 238 92 286 207 10 00007 552007 1 212681 2 284 07 209 07 279 197 274 32 102 11 00008 556708 4 212470 4 299 92 119 92 277 673 12 00009 551379 4 212303 5 0 1 290 78 200 78 275 234 13 000010 551146 212186 2 288 95 212 95 279 806 281 635 99 14 000011 555983 7 212109 4 337 25 295 05 218 05 279 806 276 149 98 15 00012 557075 3 212073 8 281 635 16 00013 556291 8 212008 2 63 76 293 863 220 83 278 587 17 PO00014 5570438 211949 32 84 299 92 139 92 266 395 18 000015 555797 9 211940 28407 227 07 274 93 281 635 104 19 00016 5540449 211919 3 282 85 219 85 278 587 274 32 99 20 000017 555560 1 211882 281 03 175 03 274 93 21 P0000168 551268 8 211468 1 15 49 292 198 279 806 276 149 105 22 000019 551198 6 211377 2 295 05 224 05 280 111 23 000020 556791 211294 4 299 92 139 92 24 pnnnn 1 557575 011280 3 38 19 284 n7 229 280 41 Figure 7 23 scatter point file in spreadsheet view 80 The keywords shown abov
452. w and right click on the selected zone and click Switch List so that the scatter points appear as shown on the right Gf AE window already show the point in this format then this step is not required Model Explorer Hierarchy Tree lt Layer 1 S P Zones 1001 9 Zone 1001 ai BotE gt 106 Point s ast Cond gt 239 Point s StartHead gt 133 ai gt 10 m e Select Cond gt nnn Point s e The corresponding RHP will appear in the AE as shown in Figure 20 11 e Check the Unconditional Simulation button and choose a Simulation Method in the list e In the Variogram Model area if User specified button is checked and then the Options button is clicked the Random Field Options window Figure 18 6 will appear Here the user can manually specify statistical parameters e In the Variogram Model area if Infer from Data button is checked and then the Edit button 1s clicked the Variogram window Figure 18 7 will appear Here the user can select built a variogram model based on data When satistifed with variogram model click OK Statistical parameters of the variogram model are automatically assigned to the unconditional simulation Please refer to Section 20 4 for more on variogram modeling e Before running the unconditional simulation discretize the model and then follow the procedure given in Section 18 2
453. w the sub models mass balance of sub models and error of convergence By default Error Bars is checked Figure 15 14 shows the default view of Hierarchical Models Tree Map and Flow Chart widow The error bars appear horizontally by default Clicking once on any error bar makes it vertical A text line showing the magnitude of error also appears with every error bar With the top node representing the main model the number of iterations performed to reach the convergence criteria 1s also given by another bar User can hover the cursor inside the window As soon as the cursor touches a node a text display pops up to the right side of the cursor giving information about the submodel being represented by that node By checking the SubModels all submodel windows already open are snapped to the right side of their respective nodes The user can increase or decrease the size of submodel windows in the tree map by using the sliding button next to Size in the Adhare to Nodes area Figure 15 15 shows submodel windows in the Tree Map The display options for any submodel window can be separately chosen by right clicking inside the window and selecting Display Options from the pop up menu The display options interface for any submodel is exactly the same as for the main model in the working area User can refer to Chapter 19 for details on display options By checking the Mass Balance box bar graphs showing mas
454. which these boundaries are established For instance it could be that the water table is not present until layer 3 in the model and therefore it makes sense to only apply recharge to this layer versus the top layer for best results The user outlines a portion of the active area or the entire active area if so desired to apply this feature and once discretized the model will add active recharge evaporation only to the active layers Select 3D Attribute Model 5 4 Clicking this button allows the user to select any of the 3D attribute sub models that were created in the above step for adding recharge to an active layer of the simulation This feature is identical to selecting a zone within a model Set Simulation Time Parameters 6 1 Clicking this button allows the user to edit the time parameters associated with the model by opening the Simulation Time Parameters window The time parameters are discussed further in Chapter 11 Set Edit Default Parameters for the Active Model 6 2 Clicking this button allows the user to change the model parameters of the active modeling layer assigned to zones when they are created by opening the Default Attribute window Those parameters are discussed further in Chapter 6 21 Define Cross section 6 3 Clicking this button allows the user to create a cross section by defining its extent as a series of line segments within the Working Area see Section 3 13 The cursor
455. window The default value is 0 meters The other field dubbed Head Value Assigned To Dry Cells is used to enter a numerical value that the software assigns to the head values in dry cells to flag them for the user the software internally assigns a zero value for transimissivity The default value is with meters as the unit of measure This value is not considered in the model solution as the software recognizes these cells to be temporarily inactive and hence not involved in the solution because they are dry If simulations are run that contain heads in the 0 meter or specified value range the model will function properly It will appear that the dry cells actually have head values due to the software assigning or the specified value to them and therefore the user may interpret the dry cells to be wet and have the displayed head value To avoid this kind of confusion either simply change this number to a value that will not be encountered during the simulation or examine the Cell and IBound values Appendix and Appendix A III respectively that are displayed in the CAT Section 3 6 to determine the actual state of the cell in question 6 3 2 Making Dry Cells Wet The user specifies the re wetting criteria in this area The user has four options concerning the re wetting of cells 1 Ave hn gt BotE Epsilon 2 hn gt BotE Epsilon 3 h bot gt BotE 4 Weighted Method The first reads the avera
456. wn in Figure 15 1 The submodel RHP has three tabs plus a general area in the bottom of the RHP The general area in this window provides display options explained in next section and solver options for the submodel Clicking the Submodel Solvers opens the Model x x Solver Settings window This window is exactly the same as shown in Figure 13 1 The functionality of this widow is explained in Chapter 13 Submodel Solvers become available only after the submodel has been discretized The three tabs in the RHP viz Model Grid Down Upscaling and Scatter Point Control are used to assign attributes to the submodels These are discussed in detail in Section The performance of different solvers can be tested by defining multiple submodels over the same area selecting different solvers for them and comparing the results Attributes Explorer Model Explorer Tree msc 89 Zone 1003 2 4 Plines 1001 4 amp Pline 1001 Horizontal Grid Vertical Grid S A ParticlesGroup 1001 xol to Vertical Extent ParticlePoints 1001 2 ParticleZones 1001 YO EM Top Boundary Layer 1 zl T Texts 1001 X Length Text 1001 T Text 1002 T Text 1003 T Text 1004 T Text 1005 T Text 1006 Layer 2 P Zones 2001 P Zone 2001 Layer 3 Zones 3001 Zone 3001 2 4 Wells 3001 Well 3001 Well 3002 Well 3003 Well 3004 Model 1 3 Model 1 3 Window Y Length fee x esp
457. y as Array3 which will contain the result Click apply Before performing a Two Array Operation it is a good idea to create a new array using Create function This new array can be assigned as Array3 in the operation 17 6 4 Backing up an Array The user can utilize Grid Based Operations backing up any of the attribute arrays in the list For example hydraulic head can be backed up by using the following steps 175 Create a temporary file name say head backup in which the hydraulic head array will be copied Highlight the temporary file name in the Attributes Array List and assign it to the Array3 field Highlight the Head array in the Attributes Array List and assign it to the Array field The transfer of the Head array to the head backup array is completed by selecting the Apply button The user can then select head backup array from the Attributes Array List and assign it to the Single Array Operation area Using the Export function the user can save the head backup array in a file In order to implement the changes in grid based operations there is no need to discretize the model It is important to understand that all changes related to the grid based operations will be eliminated if the user discretizes the model Grid based operations are very useful for sensitivity analysis In order to observe the effect of a parameter e g hydraulic conductivity on the groundwater model the user is recommended to perform array
458. y button shows the numerical form of the polynomial the black None will change to red Done and clicking the Reset button shows the algebraic form changes the Done message to None Clicking the OK button closes the window and sets the changes in the software Clicking the Cancel button closes the window and discards the changes The user should note that Log Coordinate is always selected and therefore the interface 1s disabled The software will only allow the user to implement choices for which there are enough data to complete the analysis Using high order regressions can produce unrealistically high values especially for large polygons The user should invoke these with discretion 85 INTERPOLATION SIMULATION The user may choose from three options in this area Interpolation Method default Unconditional Simulation and Conditional Simulation For Interpolation Method the user may choose from the associated drop down list either Inverse Distance default or Kriging Method INVERSE DISTANCE The Inverse Distance method determines parameter values based more heavily on closer points than distant ones Refer to the IGW Version 5 0P Reference Manual for more details There are two parameters in the Deterministic Parameters area that need to be set when using the Inverse Distance interpolation method The exponent is set in the Inverse Distance Exponent field and the number of nearest scatter points to use is set in the No
459. y default exported data in CSV format has at least two attributes excluding scatter point ID 1001 to 1004 These are the X and Y coordinates of that particular scatter point whose values change as the user changes them In the AE if any modeling parameters are introduced other than data point coordinates the spreadsheet file will list those as well Using Table 4 1 both the hydraulic conductivity values and the top elevations of the aquifer from scatter points 1001 to 1004 are entered into the model In this table Layer corresponds to the active modeling layer to which conceptual modeling components i e zones and scatter points are appended Attributes corresponds to the number of data types assigned to the scatter points Zone 1001 indicates the active model area onto which scatter points are appended The coordinates of a scatter point do not necessarily have to fall inside of the associated zone but a scatter point cannot be entered without being associated to a zone File structure for importing exporting scatter points is almost the same as that for importing exporting wells The only difference will be the number of available data types as wells do not have as many attributes as scatter points In Table 4 2 the CSV spreadsheet structure for imported exported wells can be seen Here excluding the well ID value 1001 to 1004 there are a minimum of two attributes these being the X and Y coordinates values change a
460. y setting Show all layers C Show first and last layers only C Customize Figure 21 18 3D Visualization Options for Demonstrating Volume 21 2 2 8 Surfaces This feature is identical to the Volume tab in that the user may specify which surfaces to display within their three dimensional model Figure 21 19 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs Volume Show surface Show all layers C Show first and last layers only C Customize Show water table Apply Cancel DK Figure 21 19 3D Visualization Options for Demonstrating Surfaces 237 21 2 2 9 Vectors This tab gives options for displaying velocity vectors within a three dimensional model including vector length color and frequency of location Figure 21 20 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs Show velocity vectors Layer visibility setting V Use given color C Show all layers Color Show first and last layers only C Customize Equal vector length Resolution No facets Show vector every 1 grids Max vector length 65 61 67 Figure 21 20 3D Visualization Options for Vectors 21 2 2 10 Particles This feature gives options for displaying particles within a three dimensional model including color shape style and diameter of each particle Figure 21 21 3D Visualization Options Annotation Miscs Show particles Show style Particle shape Discrete particles
461. zog wx z2 nyja C DXA C DX 2 f DY 2 C DX 3 C DY 3 C DX A C DY 4 C DX 5 C pv 5 Polygon Color Submodel Solvers Bottom Boundary v Computational Layers Iv Display This Model Options Use Model Level Display Option Figure 15 1 submodel Parameters 14 15 3 Submodels Display Options 15 4 In the general area of submodel RHP under the tabs the user can choose the Color of submodel polygon The user can also choose whether or not to display the submodel in the main model by checking the Display This Model box By default this box is checked By clicking on Options button Display Options for Model 1 x window appears This widow is exactly similar in appearance and function as for main model display options discussed in Chapter 19 please also refer to Figure 19 1 The Show Tree Map option when checked will display the a hierarchical map please refer to Figure 15 2 of all the submodels When the model is running this map also dynamically shows the direction of flow of information between the parent models and child models When Use Model Level Display Options box is checked the contours and or color gradients within the submodel display will be independent of the main model This box is checked by default However in order to match the color code and contour scale of the main model the user have to uncheck this box and supply the G

IGW - User`s Manual - Michigan State University

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents